Basic Teachings Of The Great Philosophers A Survey Of Their Basic Idea

11342'

_ ',*% .' ',"'', , '*" ' /' ' f Wfyi^t''^.

BASIC TEACHINGS OF
THE GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

A Survey of Their Basic Ideas

S. E. FROST, JR., PLD.

REVISED EDITION

ANCHOR BOOKS
DOUBLEDAY

NTF.W VOB1T T.ONTVON TORONTO SYDNEY AUCKLAND

AN ANCHOR BOOK
PUBLISHED BY DOUBLEDAY

a division of Bantam Doubleday Dell Publishing Group, Inc.
666 Fifth Avenue, New York, New York 10103

ANCHOR BOOKS, DOUBLEDAY, and the portrayal of an anchor

are trademarks of Doubleday, a division of Bantam Doubleday

Dell Publishing Group, Inc.

Basic Teachings of the Great Philosophers

was originally published in hardcover by

Doubleday in 1942. The revised edition was originally

published in paperback by Dolphin Books in 1962.

The Anchor Books edition is published by arrangement with Doubleday.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Frost, S. E, 1899-

Basic teachings of the great philosophers:

a survey of their basic ideas / S, E. Frost.

Rev. ed., 1st Anchor Books ed,

p. cm.
Reprint. Originally published: Garden City, N.Y:

Doubleday, 1962.

L Philosophy Introductions. I. Title.

BD2LF73 1989 8948158

100-dc20 CIP

ISBN 0-385-03007-X

Copyright 1942, 1962, by Doubkday,
a division of Bantam, Doubkday, Dell Publishing Group, Inc.

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
FIRST ANCHOR BOOKS EDITION:
RRC

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION i

I THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE 5

The Views of the Early Greek Philosophers 6

Plato's Theory of die Universe 10

Aristotle's Conception of the Universe 12
The Views of the Epicureans, Stoics, and

Skeptics 16
The Universe According to the Greco-Reli-
gious Thinkers 18
The Position of the Early Christian Thinkers 19
The Positions of the Medieval Christian

Thinkers 20
The Views of the Forerunners of the Renais-
sance 27
The Universe According to the Philosophers

of the Renaissance 29

Descartes 1 Conception of the Universe 31

Spinoza's Theory of the Universe 33

The Positions of Locke, Berkeley, and Hume 35

Leibnitz' Theory of the Universe 39

Kant's Conception of the Universe 4

Fichte, Schelling, and Hegel 4 1

The Views of the Later German Philosophers 44
The Positions o John Stuart Mill and Herbert

Spencer 47

Vlii BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

Josiah Royce, William James, and John

Dewey 49

The Views of Henri Bergson and George

Santayana gl

n MAN'S PLACE IN TBE UNIVERSE 53

Man's Importance According to the Early

Greek Philosophers 54

The Positions of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle 56

The Views of theater Greek Thinkers 58
Man's Importance According to the Early

Christian Thinkers 58
The Views of the Medieval Christian

Thinkers 59
As Seen by the Forerunners of the Renais-
sance 62
The Positions of Bacon and Hobbes 63
The Views of Descartes and Spinoza 64
Man's Place as Seen by Locke, Berkeley, and

Hume 65

The Views of Leibnitz 67

The Position of Rousseau 68

Kant's View of Man's Importance 68

Fichte, ScheBing, Schleiennacher, and Hegel 69

The Views of Later German Thinkers 72

Man's Place According to Comte 74

The Positions of Mill and! Spencer 75

The Views of James, Dewey, and Russell 77

m WHAT Is GOOD AND WHAT Is EVEL? 80

Good and Evil According to the Early Greek

Philosophers 81
The Ethical Views of Socrates, Plato, and

Aristotle 83
Good and Evil According to the Epicureans

and Stoics 86

The Position of the Greco-Religious Thinkers 87
The Ethical Views of the Early Christian

Thinkers 88

CONTENTS IX

The Views of the Medieval Christian

Thinkers 89

Hobbes, Spinoza, Locke, and Leibnitz 91

The Ethical Philosophy of Kant 94

The Views of Fichte and Schopenhauer 95

According to Mill, Benthani, and Spencer 97

The Ethical Views of James and Dewey 98

IV THE NATOBE OF GOD 100

The Views of the Early Greek Philosophers 102
Hie Concept of God in the Thought of

Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle 104

The Position of the Later Greek Thinkers 106

The Greco-Religious Ideas About God 107
The Early and Medieval Christian Concep-

tion of God 108
Bruno, Boehme, and Otter Forerunners of

the Renaissance 113
The Position of Bacon, Hobbes, Descartes,

and Pascal 13 4

The Nature of God According to Spinoza 116
The Views of Locke, Berkeley, Hume, and

Leibnitz "7

The Concept of God in the Thought of Kant 120
Fichte, Schelling, Sdbleiermacher, Hegel, and

Later German Thinkers 1*1

The Position of Comte, Spencer, and Bradley 1*4

The Views of James and Dewey 124

V FATE VERSUS FBEE Wnx

The Idea of Fate Among the Early Greek

Thinkers

According to Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle 130

The Views of the Later Greek Philosophers 13^

The Position of the Greco-Religious Thinkers 134
Early and Medieval Christian Thinkers 13S

The Views of Bacon, Hobbes, Descartes, and
Spinoza

X BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

The Position of Locke, of Hume, and of

Leibnitz
Fate and Free Will According to Voltaire and

to Rousseau 145

Kant, Fichte, Schelling, Schopenhauer, and

Other German Thinkers 146

The Position of Mill and of Green 150

The Views of James and Dewey 151

VI THE SOOT, AND IMMORTAXJTY 153

The Soul as Viewed by the Early Greek

Philosophers 155
The Soul and Immortality According to Plato

and Aristotle 157
The Position of the Later Greek Thinkers 159
The Views of Plotinus 160
The Early and Medieval Christian Concep-
tion of the Soul 160
The Soul According to the Forerunners of the

Renaissance 162
The Views of Bacon and Hobbes 163
The Views of Descartes and Spinoza 163
Locke, Berkeley, Hume, and Leibnitz 165
The Soul and Immortality According to Kant 167
Fichte, Schleiennacher, Herbart, and Scho-
penhauer 168
Recent and Present-Day Conceptions of the

Soul and Immortality 170

VII MAN AND THE STATE 173

The State as Viewed by tibe Early Greek

Philosophers 178

The State According to Socrates, Plato, and

Aristotle 181

The Positions of the Later Greek Thinkers 184

The Views of the Early Christian Thinkers 186

The Views of the Medieval Christian Think-
ers 188
The State as Viewed by the Forerunners of

the Renaissance 192

CONTENTS 3d

Machiavellf s Conception of the State 193
Grotius, Hobbes, and Other Thinkers of the

Renaissance 194
The Views of Spinoza, Locke, and Adam

Smith 196

The Position of Voltaire and of Rousseau 198
The State According to Hegel, Marx, and

Lassalle 199

De Maistre, Saint-Simon, and Comte 200

The Views of Mill and Spencer 202

Nietzsche's Conception of the State 204

The Views of Dewey and Recent Thinkers 205

VIII MAN AND EDUCATION 207
Education as Viewed by the Early Greek

Philosophers 209

According to Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle 210

The Roman Conception of Education 212

Early Christian Conception of Education 213

St. Benedict and the Monastic Way of Life 214
Education in the Middle Ages and Early

Renaissance 215
Martin Luther and the Protestant Refor-
mation 217
The Views of Bacon and Hobbes 218
, Comenius* Philosophy of Education 218
Locke and Rousseau 219
Pestalozzfs Conception of Education
Herbart's View of Education
Froebel's Conception of Education

IX MEND AND MATTER

Mind and Matter as Contrasted by the Early

Greek Thinkers 228
Plato, Aristotle, and the Later Greek Phi-
losophers 230
The Positions of Philo and St. Augustine 333
According to the Medieval Christian Thinkers 234
Roger Bacon and Paracelsus 235

Xii BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

Francis Bacon and Hobbes 236

Descartes and Spinoza 238

Locke, Berkeley, and Hume 240

The Views of Leibnitz 241

Kant and Later German Philosophers 241

Bradley, Royce, and Bergson 244

Comte, James, Dewey, Santayana 244

X IDEAS AJSTD THINKING 246

What Thinking Meant to the Early Greek

Philosophers 247

According to Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle 249

The Views of the Later Greek Philosophers 250

The Medieval Christian View 251
Galileo and the Beginning of the Scientific

Attitude 253

Bacon, Descartes, Spinoza 254

Locke, Berkeley, Hume, and Leibnitz 256

Kant, Fichte, Hegel 257

Comte, Mill, Spencer 260

James and Dewey 260

XI SOME RECENT APPROACHES TO PHILOSOPHY 263
Kierkegaard and the Beginnings of Existen-
tialism 264
The Views of Heidegger, Jaspers, and Sartre 265
Three Philosophers of Science: Whitehead,

RusseD, and Moore 266

Logical Positivism 268

Two Philosophers of the Spirit 269

Some Current Philosophers in the Religious

Tradition 270

CONCLUSION 272

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES 275

INDEX 297

BASIC TEACHINGS OF
THE GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

INTRODUCTION

Everyone, whether he be plowman or banker, clerk or
captain, citizen or ruler, is, in a real sense, a philosopher.
Being human, having a highly developed brain and nervous
system, he must think; and thinking is the pathway to
philosophy.

The world in which we live will not let us rest. It keeps
prodding us, challenging us with problems to be solved,
demanding that we act wisely or be destroyed by the
forces which inhabit our world* In this way experiences are
born hungers and satisfactions, pains and pleasures, sights,
feelings, sounds, and a host of others.

But we cannot rest contented with a mass of unrelated
experiences scattered at random throughout life. We must
take our experiences and weave them into some kind of a
pattern, a whole which is more or less satisfying. This pat-
tern, this whole, is our philosophy*

Your philosophy, then, is the meaning which the world
has for you. It is your answer to the question, "Why?"
Having fitted your experiences into a whole, having re-
lated them to each other, you say of the world, This is
the way things fit together. This is the world as I under-
stand it. This is my philosophy."

Your philosophy and the philosophy of those whose
names appear in books of Philosophy diflEer only in that
the latter use more experiences in weaving their patterns,
those patterns which satisfy them, and are more careful
and thorough in fitting their experiences into a pattern.
Theirs is a more complete, more all-inclusive pattern, more
logical, more consistent, more accurate.

2 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

What are the great philosophic problems which puzzle
all of us, and which the great philosophers throughout
the ages have sought to answer? We find that there are
ten major problems which have always challenged thinking
men and women.

The first of these problems is: What is the nature of the
universe? Did this universe come into being through an
act of divine creation or is it the result of a gradual process
of growth? Of what substance or substances is the uni-
verse created? How does the universe change?

The second problem is: What is mans place in the uni-
verse? Is the human individual the crowning achievement
of a growing and creating universe, or is he a mere speck
of dust in unlimited space? Does the universe care for you
and me, or are we of no more concern than a grain of
sand on a vast beach? Can we mould the universe to our
liking, or will it eventually destroy us?

The third great problem is: What is good and what is
evil? How are we to know the good from the evil? Has
some divine power set standards of good and evil for all
times, or are good and evil matters of the local culture?
Is good in the very nature of things, or is it something
which we can decide for ourselves? How can we distin-
guish good from evil?

A fourth problem is: What is the nature of God? Is God
a being very much like man who governs the universe, or
is He a spirit which pervades everything? Is God all-power-
ful, all-good, and all-just, or is He just another individual
who has little more power or insight than you and I?

A fifth problem is related to the question of Fat e versus
free will? Are we free individuals who can make our
choices and determine our actions without let or hindrance,
or are we determined by a fate over which we have no
control? Can we determine tomorrow in any significant
sense, or is it all determined for us from the beginning of
time?

The sixth problem is concerned with the Soul and im~
mortality. What is the soul about which we have heard so
much? Is it of such a nature that it lives after the death of

INTRODUCTION 3

the body, or does it die with the body? Is there a future
life in which good is rewarded and evil punished, or does
death mark the end of everything?

A seventh problem consists of man's questions about
Man and the state* Is the state a human creation which
has been brought into being to serve man, or is it some-
thing that has divine origin? Are the rulers of states given
their power by those they rule or by God? Does man have
a right to rebel against his rulers and create a new kind of
state? What is the best form of state and what is the worst?

The eighth problem is that of Man and education.
What is education? Why do we have a system of educa-
tion and why do we send our children to school? Who
shall control education, the people or the state? Is educa-
tion designed to make free men or to make men who will
serve blindly an all-powerful state?

The ninth problem has to do with Mind and matter.
Which is superior, mind or matter? Is matter a creation of
mind, or is mind merely another kind of matter? Can mind
be superior and free from matter, or is it so tied up with
matter that it is doomed? Is matter the source of all evil in
the universe? How can mind remain pure and at the same
time inhabit a body?

And the tenth problem is concerned with Ideas and
thinking. Where do we get our ideas? Are they inherent
in the very nature of our minds, or do they come to us
from outside the mind? What are the laws of thinking?
How can we be sure that our thinking is correct? Is think-
ing significant in the universe or is it a mere sham?

This book brings together the answers which the great
philosophers of all times have offered to the problems
which you and I think about today. They have toiled to
form an answer that seems to them satisfactory. We have
brought it to you.

Our method is to bring together what each pMlosopher
has written on each of these problems as briefly and con-
cisely as possible. This is done so that you, busy as you
are, do not have to read long discourses on philosophy to
discover that which will help you in your thinking. By

4 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

reading any one of the chapters in this book, you can get a
dear picture of what the philosophers down through the
ages have said about one of your real problems.

Although each chapter is a unit to itself and can be read
without reference to the other chapters, it is advisable for
the reader to begin with the first chapter and go through
the book This will give you a wide view of the great phi-
losophers and will help you to see each problem or group
of problems in relation to the other problems and groups
of problems in the book.

Following these ten chapters arranged according to phil-
osophical problems, we include a new chapter dealing
with Some Recent Approaches to Philosophy. The views
of the men discussed in this eleventh chapter apply to
many of the problems which are the topics of earlier chap-
ters and should be considered in relation to them. But
most readers will prefer to have these newer approaches
grouped together at this one point in the book, as a survey
of important aspects of recent philosophical thought.

At the end of the book you will find Biographical Notes
concerning the philosophers whom you meet in the pages
of the book. This section should be used as a quick refer-
ence when you want to know the exact dates during which
the philosopher lived or other pertinent facts about

Chapter I
THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE

THALES PYTHAGORAS HEBACLITUS

PABMENIDES PLATO ABISTOTLE

AUGUSTINE AQUINAS BACON HOBBES

DESCARTES SPINOZA LOCKE KANT HEGEL

MILL DEWEY BERGSON SANTAYANA

The world in which you and 1 tive was here long be-
fore as. How did it come to be? Was it created, or
has it existed forever? Who or what made it, and how
was it made? Are the trees, stars, men and women
really "there* or are they mere creations of our minds
or of the mind of God? How came this universe to be,
and what is it made of?

There is no one of us who has not wondered how the
universe came into being. This world, with its flowers,
rivers, rocks, sky, stars, sun, and moon, all did not come
about by mere chance, we reason. All that we see around
us, and all that we know of, must have become what it is
today by some process. If we fcould understand this proc-
ess, we would understand the nature of the universe.

The earliest people that we have any records of had
theories of the beginning and nature of things. They wove
these ideas into their religion and the priests and religious
men explained them to the young men, who in turn passed
them on to their children. In the first book of the Bible,
Genesis, is one of these theories. Here we are told that God

6 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHJLOSCXPHEBS

created the world out of nothing in six days. He made light
and darkness, the sun, moon, and stats, the earth and the
waters, and finally made all living things, including man.
Then, when all was completed and man along with woman
was placed in a beautiful garden, God came to die world
and walked in the garden, contented with his handiwork.

The Views of the Early Greek Philosophers
The earliest philosophers, the Greeks, were greatly in-
terested in this problem of the nature of the universe. In-
deed, it was the first problem they attacked. Just as chil-
dren break open their toys to discover how they are made,
so these philosophers of the childhood of the human race
sought to break apart the universe in their minds, and to
penetrate the mystery of the making of all things found
in it "What is the 'stuff from which aH things come?" they
asked themselves. "How does it happen that there are
many things in the universe?"

THALES, who lived in Miletus in Ancient Greece (about
600 B.C.), was the first to propose a solution of this prob-
lem. He told his neighbors that water was the original
stuff." He saw water turning into a solid, ice, when it was
frozen, and into air, steam, when heated. Therefore, he
reasoned that everything, from the hardest rock to the
lightest air, originally came from water and in the end re-
turned to water.

A little kter another citizen of Miletus, ANAXIMAHDEB,
wrote that the original "stuff" of which everything in the
universe was made was not, as Thales had suggested,
water, but was a living mass which filled aH space. He
called this mass "the infinite.- In the beginning, he told his
fellows, this mass, this "infinite," was whole, not broken
into pieces. But it contained "motion." This "motion-
caused it to begin to move up and down, back and forth,
and around. Slowly pieces were broken off from the mass
so that eventually afl the things which we now have in the
universe came into being. As the motion continued, he be-
lieved, these innumerable pieces would be brought back to-

THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE 7

gether and the mass, the "infinite,'* would assume its origi-
nal unbroken unity.

Anaximander wrote a very detailed account of how he
believed the world, the sun, the stars, air, animals, fishes,
and man developed out of this original mass.

A third resident of Miletus, ANAXIMINES, was not satis-
fied with the accounts which had been given by these two
thinkers who had preceded him. He suggested that the
original "stuff* of which all else in the universe was made
was air. He realized that men and animals breathe air and
are able to live, and reasoned that the air turned into flesh,
bone, and blood. Therefore, he went on to reason that air
could become wind, clouds, water, earth, and stone.

These three philosophers of Miletus were interested in
discovering the original "stuff" of which all else in the uni-
verse was made. They were followed by a group of phi-
losophers who, although they were interested in the same
problem, were more interested in finding out in what ways
the many things in the universe were related. These were
the Pythagoreans, a group or school founded by Pythag-
oras.

PYTHAGORAS and the Pythagoreans were impressed by
the fact that many things in the universe were related in
ways that could be stated by numbers. For example, the
tone of a wire or piece of gut is related to its length in a
manner that can be expressed in numbers.. So, they rea-
soned, number must be this "stuff* for which philosophers
were looking. To them numbers became things, entities,
and they taught that the whole universe was built of num-
bers. They believed that since the harmonious octave
reached over eight notes, eight was friendship. A point,
they held, was one, and a line two. And on they went to
develop a most complicated system of numbers in their ef-
fort to show how everything was actually made of num-
bers.

All the philosophers whom we have mentioned so far
took it for granted that things change. They saw change
all about them and did not recognize it as a problem.
Water changed into ice or into steam, air became wind,

8 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT MOLOSOPHEBS

numbers became things* motion was in everything produc-
ing these changes. For them this fact just was; and why be
concerned about it?

But as philosophers continued to work with this problem
of the nature of the universe, they began to recognize that
change was itself a problem. Wliat is it? How does it come
about? Is there really change, or do we just imagine that
things change? These questions began to rear their heads
end demand an answer.

This fact of change so impressed HERACIJTUS, a son of a
noble family of Ephesus, that lie concluded that fire was
the original "stuff* of which all else in the universe was
made. Fire, he believed, was forever changing, never still,
never tie same. Since everything is constantly changing,
since change is the fundamental characteristic of the uni-
verse, the forever-changing fire must be the material of the
universe. "You could not," he wrote, "step twice into the
same river, for other and yet other waters are ever flowing
on." There is nothing permanent, stable. Change is all
that is.

We may think that we see things that do not change,
Heraditus taught, but we are fooled. If we could really see
what is happening, if we had eyes powerful enough to see
exactly what is happening, we would realize that even the
most stable thing in the universe is actually changing all
the time. The universe, then, is ruled by "strife.'* The mo-
ment a thing is made, strife begins to break it up. All
things are changing all the time, and there is nothing per-
manent

While Heraditus was preaching the doctrine that
change is tike essence of aH things, there were Greek phi-
losophers living in Elea who taught that change is impos-
sible. Nothing, they said, can possibly change. If we think
we see change, we are fooled; for it cannot be. XENOPH-
ANES, the earliest of these Eleatics, believed that the
universe was a solid mass which was forever unchangeable,
immovable. The parts might diange, but the whole could
never change. PABMENIDES, another member of this school
at Elea, taught that all change is inconceivable. If there

THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE Q

were such a thing as change, he reasoned, something would
have to come from nothing, and that was impossible.
What we see with our eyes is not true but an illusion. The
universe is unchangeable and immovable, ZENO, a third
member of this school, sought to prove that anyone who
attempted to prove the existence of change would contra-
dict himself.

These arguments of Heraclitus and of the Eleatics were
so interesting to philosophers that some set about to see if
the positions of both sides could be reconciled in some way.
They felt that this "riddle of permanence and change" had
to be solved, and they turned their attention to the task

EMPEDOCLES agreed with the Eleatics when he said that
in the strict sense there can be no change, but he also
agreed with Heraclitus in holding that there is "mingling
and separation.* The universe, said he, is composed of four
dements or "roots of things": earth, air, fire, and water.
There are millions and millions of very tiny particles of
each element These combine in various ways to form the
many things in the universe. As filings decay or change, the
elements separate. Then they may come together or mingle
again in another thing. The elements never change. They
are permanent Thus, actually there is no change, but
merely a mingling and separating of elements. This min-
gling and separating is caused, he believed, by Love and
Hate. Love brings the elements together to form things.
Hate breaks them apart

Empedocles* solution of the problem of change and per-
manence interested ANAXAGOBAS but did not satisfy him.
After much study, he reached the conclusion that there
must be more than four elements. Indeed, he became con-
vinced that there were untold millions of elements or sub-
stances. Each of these was in untold millions of tiny pieces.
Flesh was a result of millions of flesh elements coming
together in one place. Bone was the result of millions of
bone elements combining. So with everything in the uni-
verse. Numbers of elements come together and the thing is
formed. No element can be changed into another. There-
fore there is in reality no change. But as these elements

1O BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

combine, separate, and recombine, we have change. These
elements combine and separate, not because of anything
in them, but because of the rotation of the heavenly bodies.
As a whirling motion was first produced in the original
mass of elements lying quiet, they began to combine and
the many things in the universe were formed

All of this thinking paved the way for another important
group of early Greek thinkers, the Atontfsts. The most
noted members of this group were LEUGPPUS and DEMOG-
BTTUS. These men agreed with their predecessors that
change was a result of the mingling and separating of tiny
units. But they disagreed with them as to the nature of
these elements. All the thinkers before the Atomists had!
taught that the elements differed in quality. There were
flesh elements, bone elements, hair element?, and so on.
The flesh elements were different from the bone or hair
elements. The Atomists taught that all units, or atoms, are
alike as far as quality is concerned. Some have hooks,
others eyes, and still others grooves, humps, or depressions.
As these atoms unite in different ways and in different
numbers, things are formed. Each atom has motion inside
it, so that it moves about of its own accord and attaches
itself to other atoms.

Change, then, for the Atomists was a matter of the min-
gling and separating of atoms. The atoms never changed,
but were eternal, minutely small, and all alike. Real change
of an atom was impossible. The only change possible was
as atoms grouped themselves together to form a thing or
separated from each other.

Thus the early Greeks, working with the problem of the
nature of the universe for about 250 years, reached the
conclusion that everything in the universe was composed
by the uniting in various ways and in various numbers of
tiny atoms which were all alike.

Plato's Theory of the Universe

None of these early theories satisfied PLATO, one of the
greatest thinkers of all times. For Plato, the world which
we see, touch, and experience through our other senses is

THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE 11

not real, but is a copy world In it we find things changing,
coming and going, and in great abundance. It is a world of
many mistakes, deformities, evils. It exists and we experi-
ence it every day. But it is not real.

There is, however, a real world in which are to be found
the true things of which aD. that we experience are mere
copies. He called this the world of "ideas." Here is to be
found the ideal tree of which all trees which we see are
copies, the ideal house, and ideas of all other objects in the
universe. These are perfect, do not change in any way,
never fade or die, but remain forever.

These "ideas* or "forms" (Plato uses both words to de-
scribe them) were never created, but have existed from
the very beginning in just the perfect state in which they
will always exist They are independent of all things, and
are not influenced by the changes which take place in the
world which we experience through our senses. These ob-
jects which we experience are reflections of these "eternal
patterns."

All "ideas'* are arranged in the "ideal world" in order;
the "highest idea," the idea of perfect goodness, being at
the top.

But there is another principle in the universe, that of
"matter." This is all that "ideas" are not It may be thought
of as the raw material upon which the "ideas" are im-
pressed. Let us think, for example, of the work of a sculp-
tor. He has an idea of a figure which he wishes to repro-
duce in marble, let us say. Now, this idea is independent
of all the marble in the universe. But the marble is neces-
sary for its realization so that others may experience it
through their senses. Therefore, the sculptor takes a slab
of marble and creates a statue. The marble, as raw ma-
terial, has the idea impressed upon it The sculptor may
make many statues without affecting his idea in the least

In this way Plato thought that title world was created.
Nature, all that we experience through our senses, owes
its existence to the influence of the world of ideas upon
matter. It is not the "real" world, but an impression of the
"real" world upon matter. Thus, all the mistakes, all the

Ifc BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

changes, all the imperfections of the world of our senses are
due to matter and not to the ideas.

La one of Plato's famous Dialogues, the Tvmaeus, he tells
us how the world o our senses was created. There was an
"architect," the "Demiurge/* who brought the ideal world
and matter together just as a sculptor might bring his idea
and marble together to produce a statue. This "Demiurge"
had perfect ideas of everything, and he had a great mass of
matter. Plato never tells us where either the "Demiurge,"
ideas, or matter came from originally. They were just there
when things began. As the "Demiurge"* brought an idea in
touch with some matter, a thing was created. Indeed, a
great many things were created from one idea. There is
one perfect idea of an oak tree, but there are millions of
oak trees. So with everything else in the universe, it is a
combination of a perfect idea and matter. And the idea is
not at aQ influenced by this. It remains perfect and un-
changed forever.

Plato has been called an Idealist because he thought
that the real world was this world of ideas. Some students
of his philosophy say that it would be truer to call him an
"Idea-ist** since he was interested in ideas. But, whatever
we choose to call him, Idealist or Idea-ist, we recognize
that he believed the universe to consist of a realm of per-
fect and unchanging ideas and matter. The world of ideas
was, for him, the true, the real, world. That which we ex-
perience through our senses was, for him, a copy world, an
"unreal world** in this sense. It was a world of objects pro-
duced by impressing a perfect idea upon matter. All of its
imperfections came from the fact that it was impossible to
impress the idea perfectly upon matter; matter is imper-
fect and thus distorts the idea to some extent, twists it out
of shape.

Aristotle's Conception of the Universe

Democritus and the Atomists, as we have seen, ex-
plained the universe in terms of moving identical atoms.
Plato explained it in terms of perfect ideas which somehow
were impressed upon matter. ARISTOTLE, who stands with

THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE 13

Plato among the world's very greatest philosophers, at-
tempted to arrive at a theory of th# universe which would
mediate between that of the Atomists and of Plato.

Aristotle was willing to admit that matter does exist. And
as a pupil of Plato, he believed that ideas existed. But, he
wanted to bring these together in a way that would be
more satisfying than the solution suggested by Plato. His
problem was, then How can perfect, changeless, eternal
ideas be impressed upon lifeless matter? And his answer
was that ideas, or "forms* as he called them, are not out-
side of and above things, are not "transcendent," but are in
things. He taught that form and matter are always and
eternally together. Therefore, the world which we experi-
ence through our senses is not, as Plato taught, a mere copy
of the real world, but is the real world. Here form and
matter are one, and neither can be experienced separately.
Only by thinking can we separate the two; actually we al-
ways find them together.

Let us take an acorn as an example. An acorn is a unity
of form and matter. We recognize the form "acorn," which
is characteristic of all acorns. Wherever we see an acorn,
we discover this form. But our example is a particular
acorn. Never do Ve have the form "acorn" divorced from a
particular acorn. But, in addition to form, our example has
matter. The form "acorn** seeks to realize itself in matter,
and the result is the acorn which we have. The more per-
fect the acorn, the more perfectly the form is realized.

But the acorn may become an oak tree. Thus this acorn
which we hold in our hands is matter, and the form which
it seeks to realize is the oak tree. As the acorn is planted
and as it grows, it is striving to realize the form of the oak
tree; it is seeking to become an oak tree. In the same way,
the oak tree may become oak boards which are used to
build tables, chairs, or other pieces of furniture. Here the
oak tree is matter, and the particular piece of furniture is
the form which the oak tree seeks to realize.

In every case, the acorn, the oak tree, the piece of fur-
niture, we have matter and form. At every stage the ob-
ject which exists is both the realization of a form and also

14 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

matter for the realization of another form. Thus, forms
never change, but are eternally the same. The form "acorn"
is always the same and never becomes the form "oak tree."
But matter takes on different forms as it changes. First it
took on the form of an acorn, then the form of an oak tree,
and then the form of a piece of furniture. And the process
goes on indefinitely as change takes place. Matter is always
taking on, striving to realize, forms.

Wherever we look in nature, in the universe, Aristotle
taught, we find both matter and form. For him there can
be no matter divorced from form, nor can there be any
form divorced from matter. And both matter and form are
eternal, never being created or destroyed. Thus the entire
universe can be explained, he believed, as the process in
which matter constantly seeks to realize different forms, to
become what it can become.

If we wish to understand the universe, then, we may
think of it in terms of a sculptor producing a statue. But,
while in the case of Plato the sculptor is independent, free
from his marble* in the case of Aristotle he is dependent
on his marble. His idea of a perfect statue is actually in the
marble, a form which the marble seeks to realize.

Therefore, Aristotle taught that every object in the uni-
verse had four causes. The first corresponds to the idea of
the statue which the artist has before he begins work, the
form which is to be realized. This he called the "formal
cause." Then there is the marble with which the artist is to
work, the matter. This is the "material cause." The third
cause is that by which the statue is made, the tools em-
ployed to make the statue. This he called the "efficient
cause" or "moving cause." The fourth cause is the purpose
or end for which the statue is made, that for the sake of
which the work is done. This he termed the "final cause."

For Aristotle, all these causes are operating in the thing
as it develops, changes, grows, becomes. We must not
think of an artist separated from his marble, but rather of
an artist as a part of his marble. A better illustration may
be that of a man seeking to become, let us say, a doctor.

THE NATUBE OP THE UNIVERSE 1$

He seeks to change himself into something else. His idea
of "doctor" is the "formal cause"; his body with all its
characteristics is the "material cause**; that which he does
to change himself is the "efficient cause"; and the reason he
makes this change from what he is originally to a doctor
is the "final cause." Here the man is within that which is
changed and he is what is created.

For Aristotle all motion is to be explained as the union
of form and matter. When matter offers resistance to form
we have deformities, mistakes, evils. However, matter is
also a help to form in that it seeks to realize form, to be-
come something.

It is clear from what we have already said that Aris-
totle's world is not a purely mechanical something. It is
not a mere mass of units or atoms moving about and form-
ing objects, as the Atomists taught Rather, it is charac-
terized by purposes which matter seeks to realize. There is
striving in this universe, a seeking to become. We call such
a world "teleological," not a world of mere chance but one
of purpose.

If the acorn seeks to become an oak tree and the oak tree
seeks to become a piece of furniture, where does the proc-
ess stop? Is everything seeking to become something else,
and is there no end to the chain? Aristotle believed that
there was an end. This he thought of as the first cause or
the "unmoved mover." It is pure form without any matter.
It does not cause anything else, but just is. It is not in mat-
ter and does not seek to impress itself upon matter. We
cannot experience it, but we can think it.

Thus, at one extreme we may think of pure matter with-
out any form, formless matter, And at the other extreme
we may think of pure form, matterless form. But we can-
not experience either. The universe which we experience,
the world of chairs, stars, earth, men, and all other things,
is a world in which matter and form are united. And each
object is the realization of a form and is the matter for the
realization of still another form. In this way Aristotle at-
tempted to solve the problem of the universe.

l6 BASIC TEACHINGS OF tSEREAT PHXLOSOPHEBS

The Views of the Epicureans, Stoics, and Skeptics

With the coming of EPICUITOS and the Epicureans, many
thinkers devoted their attention largely to the problem of
how to live a good life. However, even these philosophers
recognized that one could not be good unless he understood
the world in which he had to live this life. Hius they strug-
gled with the problem of the nature of the universe.

Epicurus based his solution largely on the theory of De-
mocritus and the Atomists which we have already studied.
He taught that the real things in the universe are bodies
which we experience through the senses. These bodies are
made up of small units or atoms which differ in size,
weight, and shape. As they come together in various
ways, the bodies which we see are formed. Then, as they
separate, these bodies disappear and we experience them
no longer.

The universe, Epicurus taught, came to be by mere
chance. Atoms have the power to swerve from a straight
line. Thus, in the beginning, all atoms were falling straight
down in space. Being able to swerve, some went one way
and some another, deviating from the straight line. In this
way aH the bodies of the universe have been formed and
are being formed.

The atoms cannot be destroyed or divided into smaller
units. They have existed just as they now are from the be-
ginning and will continue to exist in the same way forever.

The Stoics, a school of Greek thinkers founded by ZENO
during the fourth century before Christ, were as interested
as were the Epicureans in the problem of the good life, or
"ethics" as it is called. But they too developed an explana-
tion of the nature of the universe which is important.

These philosophers agreed with Aristotle that the uni-
verse is composed of two principles: form or "force" and
matter. Force moves and acts, while matter is acted upon.
These two principles are not separated from each other, as
Plato taught, but are united in every object. Further, both
force and matter are, for the Stoics, bodies. The bodies
which are force are very fine-grained, while those which

THE NATUBE OF THE UNIVERSE VJ

are matter are coarse and formless. Thus, everything in the
universe is a body, is corporeal.

All the forces in the universe form a force which is in
everything, a sort of fire which is the active soul of the uni-
verse. The Stoics thought of this world soul as fire because
they believed that heat produced everything and moved
everything. Heat, for them, is the giver of life. Conse-
quently, fire is the basic principle of the universe.

This fire, or world soul, is related to everything in the
universe just as the soul of a man is related to his body.
Indeed, the world is merely the body of the world soul
From the original fire, the Stoics taught, air, water,
earth, and all else in the universe arise. These four ele-
ments, fire, air, water, and earth (which were also the
four elements of Empedocles), combine in many ways to
form the things of the universe. And through every object
in the universe the divine principle flows, making it alive.
The Stoics were not willing, as were the Epicureans, to
think of the universe as something that just happened by
chance. Nor were they willing to go along with the Epi-
cureans to the extent of holding that the universe is purely
mechanical. Their principle of force was alive, and the uni-
verse which came into being was also alive. For them the
universe was a perfect sphere or ball floating in empty
space, a ball held together and made alive by its soul
From the time of Thales to that of the Stoics, thinkers
had been busy attempting to account for the universe, to
explain how it w^s made, to develop a theory of the nature
of things. Each one wove a different theory and offered
evidence to prove that he was right.

This diversity of theories and explanations struck a group
of Greek thinkers as proof of the fact that man is unable to
know what the universe is or how it came into being. This
group is known as the Skeptics, and its founder was
PYRRHO. Its members felt that all attempts to explain the
nature of the universe were futile, a waste of time, for, they
argued, man cannot know the nature of things. All we see
is the world around us. Our senses give conflicting evidence.
Different men have different reports to make. We have no

l8 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

way of telling whose report is correct, whose is true to the
real nature of the world. Therefore, the Skeptics were will-
ing to give up the search, to say, "We do not know, and
no man can know." They recommended that men be
practical, accept what they experience through the senses,
follow custom. Their answer to the problem of the nature
of the universe was one of despair, and they abandoned
all further attempts to work with the problem.

The Universe According to the Greco-Religious Thinkers
At about this time, toward the close of the pre-Christian
era, men were tinning to religions and seeking comfort in
them. They were confused, tired mentally, and lost among
the many conflicting theories which had been developed
in the past. The time was ripe, then, for merging the many
religious doctrines and beliefs with one or more of the
Greek philosophies which had come down to that day in a
more or less garbled form.

PHH.O, a Jew living in Alexandria in Egypt, was the
leader of the attempt to merge Judaism, the religion of the
ancient Jews, with Greek philosophies. For him there was
God who was so pure and far above everything in this
world that he could not possibly come into contact with it.
Thus, to account for the universe, Philo taught that there
were many powers, or spirits, which radiated from God
as light might radiate from a lamp. One of these powers,
which he called the "Logos," was the creator of the world.
This Logos, he taught, worked with matter and out of it
created everything in the universe. In this way, God,
through the Logos, created the universe. Further, every-
thing in the universe is a copy of an idea in the mind of
God. This reminds us of Plato's belief that the world which
we experience through our senses is a copy of ideas in the
ideal world. And, indeed, Philo was attempting here to
reconcile Plato's philosophy with the Jewish religion.

Other religious-minded thinkers attempted to do the
same thing, reconciling their religious beliefs with Greek
philosophy. One of the most noted was PLOTINUS, who was
born in Egypt in the third century of the Christian era and

THE NATUBE OF THE UNIVERSE 1Q

taught in Rome. His theory was very much like that of
Philo. Out of a pure God flow beings, or emanations, as a
stream might flow from an inexhaustible source, or as light
flows from the sun without affecting the sun. The further
the light is from its source, the dimmer it becomes. At the
far extreme is darkness or matter.

Between God and matter Plotinus taught that there ex-
isted mind, soul. The soul acts upon matter and the uni-
verse is created. Matter, then, is the substance and soul is
the form of all things.

In the thinking of all these men we see clearly the
theories of Plato, Aristotle, and others. The world is, in
each case, a combination of an idea or form and matter. As
the two come together in different ways, different objects
are created.

The Position of the Early Christian Thinkers
This attempt to account for the universe, which is a
theater of change and imperfection, and at the same time
teach that God is perfect and unchanging was continued
by the Christians. Those men who sought to reconcile
Christianity with Greek philosophy were known as Apolo-
gists. They taught that the universe contains traces of
something different from pure matter and thus points to a
God who is eternal, unchanging, and good. This God is the
First Cause of everything in the universe, the creator of
the universe. For them the "ideas" of Plato and the forms
of Aristotle become God. God is the eternal and abiding
principle in all change, the eternal pattern which never
changes. He is the unity of all forms, all ideas. Through
divine emanations he has created the world; and everything
in the world, in so far as it is a part of God, strives to be
more like God, to return to Him. The Creator fashioned
the world from matter which He created out of nothing.
The pattern of the world is in His mind.

One of the greatest thinkers among these early Christian
philosophers, one who worked out the theory of the Apolo-
gists most completely, was AUGUSTINE, who became Saint
Augustine. God, he taught, created matter out of nothing

20 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

and then created everything in the universe. The forms
which he impressed upon matter were in God's mind from
the beginning of time, and even before, for God existed
before there was any time. Indeed, God created time and
space also. Thus everything that is or ever shall be is a
creation of God and must follow His laws and will. Here
again we see the influence of the Greeks in the belief that
the universe is the result of the coming together of matter
and form.

But the Christian thinkers went further than the Greeks
in that they attempted to account for the existence of mat-
ter. You will remember that the Greeks simply accepted
matter as well as the ideas or forms as existing from the
beginning. The Christians put the ideas or forms in God's
mind and went on to say that God created matter out of
nothing. After He had created matter, He had something
upon which to impress ideas or forms.

Further, these Christian philosophers taught that the
ideas or forms, being in the mind of God, were divine.
Theref ore, in so far as things axe ideas or forms impressed
on matter, they seek God, try to return to Him. But matter
holds them back. Matter, which God has created, is the
principle which makes it necessary for things to struggle in
their attempt to become divine.

Augustine lived during the fourth century of the Chris-
tian era. He saw the great Roman Empire, which had been
established by the Caesars, falling to pieces, and watched
the barbarians from the north gradually moving down into
the empire and even toward Rome. He lived near the be-
ginning of that period in history known as the Dark Ages,
a period when these ignorant, crude barbarians swarmed
over the Roman Empire and destroyed the civilization
which had been building since the early days of the Greeks.

The Positions of the Medieval Christian Thinkers

After Augustine for centuries few men had! time for
thinking about the universe and its nature. Philosophy was
gradually neglected, and those who did endeavor to think
merely repeated the philosophies of those who had gone

THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE 21

before them, Plato, Aristotle, the Epicureans, the Stoics,
and others. Most of the books written during this period
were "remarkable only for their nieagerness of original
thought.** Indeed, by the time of the seventh century the
cloud of ignorance had so settled over Western Europe
that this century and the next, the eighth, have been re-
ferred to as "perhaps the darkest period of our Western
European civilization.''

By the middle of the ninth century some men were be-
ginning to think again. By this time the Christian church
was in complete control of Western Europe. It dominated
everything, the state, men's lives, and all education and
thought Those who did attempt to think had to confine
their thinking to the beliefs which the church accepted.
Thus, all thinking was limited to church doctrines. In most
cases men merely attempted to show that the beliefs of the
church were true, reasonable.

So, when JOHN Scorus EBIGENA wrote during the ninth
century, he tried to show that the orthodox theory of the
creation of everything in the universe was reasonable. He
taught that God created the world out of nothing or "out
of himself, the causeless first cause.** Before God created
the world, he had a complete pattern of the world in his
mind. Then, as a light is radiated from its source so the
world was radiated from God. Consequently, the universe
and God are one, but God is more than the universe. God
is in his creation and his creation is in him,

Since God is one and is not divided, Erigena taught, so
the universe is $ unity. We may see differences, many indi-
vidual objects, but they are all one. They are all God. We
call this belief "pantheism.** This universe is "an expression
of the thought of God" and therefore cannot exist apart
from him. Being God, everything in the universe strives to
return to the unity of God.

From Plato to Erigena philosophers had been, as we
have seen, explaining the universe as the union of ideas or
forms and matter. In every instance the idea or form is
thought of as a real thing existing before it was impressed
upon matter. Plato thought of ideas as existing before

22 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

tilings and in an ideal world. Aristotle taught that forms ex-
isted in things but were distinct from matter. The Chris-
tians taught that ideas or forms existed in the mind of
God and moulded matter into things of the universe.

All these philosophers Lave been called "realists" since
they taught that ideas or forms are real things existing in-
dependently of whether or not they ever come in contact
with matter. In each instance the idea or form could exist
without matter.

But there arose a thinker wlio dared to fling himself in
the teeth of all this tradition and to declare that these ideas
or forms, these "universal** as they were called, were mere
names and had no reality. His name was ROSCELIN, or
sometimes called Roscellinus. He taught that the only real
things are the individual objects in the universe. Each in-
dividual man exists, but the universal ^mankind* does not
exist at all. It is merely a name for a collection of men.

You can see easily that Roscelin and the great philo-
sophic tradition were directly opposed to each other. The
result was a long and bitter dispute between the Realists,
or those who believed that universals were real, and the
"Nominalists/* who taught that universals were mere
names and had no real existence. This dispute was very
important since it was a fight over the question as to
whether the things of nature, the objects of the universe,
are real or merely copies of real things. It was an attempt
to answer the question: What is real, the world which we
can experience with our senses or the world which we
think with our minds?

ANSEXM, the Archbishop of Canterbury during a good
bit of the eleventh century, was on the side of the Realists.
He believed that these "reals," ideas or forms, existed in-
dependently of any individual obj'ect. Mankind, for him,
was a real thing which existed over and above any one
man. He, along with PETER ABELARD, BERNARD OF CHAB-
TRES, and other members of the School of Chartres, taught
that universals or general concepts were ideas or forms hav-
ing a separate existence and, in some way, the things which
mould matter into individual objects which we see and ex-

THE NATUBE OF THE UNIVERSE 23

perience through our senses. They were all in the tradition
of the Realists.

These philosophers who attempted to reconcile the be-
liefs of the Christian church and the ideas which had come
down to them from die Greeks,-the philosophies of Plato,
Aristotle, and others, were known as "Schoolmen," and
the philosophies which they developed were in general
called "Scholasticism." In every case the philosopher was
a loyal member of the Christian church and believed the
doctrines of the church without serious question. But most
of them wanted to show that these doctrines were reason-
able and could be justified by the mind of man.

The greatest of these Schoolmen, and the one who
worked out the relationship between Christian beliefs and
forms of Greek philosophy, was THOMAS AQUINAS. Saint
Thomas Aquinas, as he was later called, was born near
Naples and lived during the thirteenth century. His great
ambition was to show that the universe was reasonable.
But he was one of the Realists, and endeavored to show
that universals were real. These universals, he argued, exist
in particular objects, in things, in such a way as to make
them what they are. The real thing about a tree, for ex-
ample, is not its bark, its leaves, its height, and the like.
These are qualities in which each tree differs from other
trees. That which makes a tree a tree is its "treeness," and
this is a universal. This universal exists in each particular
tree.

But, agreeing with the Christian tradition, he held that
all universals existed in the mind of God.

To explain the world which we experience through our
senses, Saint Thomas followed Aristotle in introducing mat-
ter as that upon which universals work. Nature, for him,
was a union of universals and matter. It is matter which
makes one tree different from another. All trees contain the
universal "treeness," but they differ, they are elms, oaks,
spruces, tall, short, green, red, and the like, because of the
different amounts of matter which each contains. All the
universe, then, is a result of the coming together of matter

24 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

and universals, and the many things in the universe differ
in the amount of matter which they contain.

For Saint Thomas, God created the world out of nothing.
He was the cause of both matter and the universals. Fur-
ther, God is continually creating the world as he brings
universals and matter together to produce new objects.
Thus, all creation did not happen at one time, but creation
is going on all the time and all about us.

The Schoolmen, as we have seen, were attempting to
show that the beliefs of the church and the best thought of
the philosophers were in agreement. In this they opened
the door to those who would take a different position, who
would argue that the two were in no real harmony. As soon
as men began to study Christian beliefs and the philosophy
of Aristotle, for example, and put them side by side, there
were some who believed they saw contradictions. Thus
they felt forced to choose sides. In such instances most of
the loyal Christians sided with the church. But there were
those who were not sure that the church was always right*
Gradually they began to question the beliefs of the church
and ta look about for other material which might help
them. In this way there arose a group of thinkers who ac-
cepted the beliefs of the church only if they could be justi-
fied by reason. Those beliefs which they could not justify,
they discarded as false. With the coming of these men the
period known as Scholasticism began to fade and a new
period to dawn.

JOHN DUNS Scorus, a monk of the order of Saint Fran-
cis, attempted to stem this tide of questioning and to main-
tain the doctrines and beliefs of the Church at all cost. He
taught, along with Saint Thomas and others, that univer-
sal existed before things in God's mind, as forms or ideas
in the divine mind. When things came into being, ideas or
universals existed in them, making them what they are.
Further, when things are not present; universals exist in
our minds as concepts or ideas which apply to all things of
the same kind, all trees, for example.

For Scotus the individual object, the tree which you see,
is different from all other trees because of its "individu-

TEDS NATOTE OF THE UNIVERSE ^5

ality/* not because of the amount of matter which it con-
tains, as St. Thomas had argued. Man, argued Scotus, is
different from an animal because there has been added
specific differences, humanity. Both man and animals
have life. When humanity is added to life we have man.
Now Socrates is a man, like all other men in many respects.
He is alive and he is distinguished from animals in that he
has humanity. But Socrates is different from all other men.
This difference is due, Scotus argued, to his individual
character or individual difference. So, all things differ from
all others because of their individuality.

And everything in the universe is a result of the union of
form and matter. Matter is common to all things. God
alone is pure spirit without matter, God is form not touched
by matter. All else is both matter and form combined.

Although there was some opposition, the Realists were
in command of philosophy throughout a good bit of Scho-
lasticism. Near the beginning of the Scholastic movement,
Roscelin, as we have seen, questioned the theory that uni-
versals are real existences. Now, many years later, there
arose a concerted movement to deny the reality of uni-
versals. The leader of this movement was WILLIAM OF OC-
CAM, an English thinker of the thirteenth century.

William taught that particular objects and things were
tie only realities* This world which we see and experience
is real. Ideas, concepts, universals are mere thoughts in the
mind, abstractions which the mind makes. They have no
other reality. It was this position which was called "Nomi-
nalism.*

The universe, for the Nominalists, is composed of indi-
vidual objects, each a thing in itself. We can see how these
objects differ and in what ways they are alike, and can
draw conclusions about them. But these conclusions are
mere ideas in the mind.

Thus, there developed two great theories about the na-
ture of the universe. One, following the tradition which
was begun by Plato and Aristotle, held that forms, ideas,
universals, were real things existing either apart from ob-
jects or in them and in some way determining what they

6 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

are. This tradition taught that the real things of tie uni-
verse are not the individual objects of our experience, but
the universals, the forms which determine likenesses; the
tree which you see is not real, but the universal "tree* of
which all trees are copies is the real thing. The other theory
of the nature of the universe taught that the real things in
the universe are the individual objects which we experi-
ence, and that universals are mere thoughts in the mind.

Hie first tradition has been that in which religion has
flourished. The second tradition is the basis for all modern
science.

MEISTER ECKHART, a German mystic of the thirteenth
century, held that God is the home of eternal ideas just as
the artist is the home of ideas which may later become
works of art. The world which we experience, this world of
creatures and things, is a copy of the ideas which are in
God. This world God created out of nothing. He, of course,
is in the realist tradition but with an emphasis upon mys-
ticism (which is the belief that God is all and man can
find salvation only as he loses himself in God) .

When the Christian church became interested in mak-
ing its beliefs reasonable, it turned to the philosophy of
Plato. Here the doctrine of a world of ideas distinct from
the world of things fitted nicely into the Christian belief in
a God who created the world out of nothing and remained
distinct from the world. Ideas and matter were distinct in
both Plato's philosophy and in the doctrines of the Chris-
tian church. The great Schoolmen, who sought to make
religion reasonable, made much use of Plato.

But, as we have seen, there were thinkers who were not
satisfied. They leaned toward Aristotle in holding that the
form of an object is in some way in the object and not dis-
tinct from it. Matter and form are combined to form things
which we experience. They did attempt to fit God into the
picture, but were never wholly successful. Forms, they
held, were in things and also in the mind of God. But bow
could they be in both places? This they never could answer
clearly.

Thus, there arose philosophers who became interested

THE NATXJBE OF THE UNIVERSE &J

in things and in their study. Some denied that the beliefs
of the church could be made reasonable. They held that
there were two kinds of truth, that of the church and that
of philosophy. One may deny the other, but we should be-
lieve both. We should accept the doctrines of the church
by faith and the doctrines of philosophy by reason. This
was, of course, a denial of the attempt of the Schoolmen to
reconcile the doctrines of the church and philosophy.

As Aristotle became more prominent in the thinking of
Schoolmen, heresies began to develop. Philosophers came
forward to propose that ideas or forms were not existent,
and that the only real things are objects, individuals. Thus
Nominalism grew out of an increasing interest in Aristotle,
but came eventually to deny Aristotle's doctrine of forms.
In this way Aristotle lead to the disintegration of Scholas-
ticism and the growing concern of thinkers with the world
of experience. The world was ready for an entirely new
approach to the problem of the nature of the universe.

The Views of the Forerunners of the Renaissance

But the thinkers who tended toward a new approach
moved slowly. After all, they were children of their times
and the influence of the church was strong upon them.
Thus, the early philosophers of this movement exhibited a
strange mixture of the old and the new.

NICHOLAS OF CUSA taught that the universe is God di-
vided into small bits. If we think of the universe as a
whole, all of it put together, we find that it is God. But
each part is a part of God and God is in each thing.

LUBOVICO VIVES, a Spaniard of this period the sixteenth
century-taught that we should stop trying to learn about
the world by reading what others'in the past had written
and should go out and study nature, observe the world
about us, and make experiments to discover how it is made.
He was typical of those philosophers who wanted to turn
away from the theories of the past and study the universe
as it is experienced. In this way, they believed, man could
learn the real nature of the universe.

As philosophers became more interested in the study of

28 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

nature they sought to understand it and gain power over
it. Of course, they did not have our modern instruments or
our modern knowledge. They stood on the threshold of the
modern world Thus, they sought short cuts to these goals.
The result was a form of magic, a belief that the secrets of
the universe could be understood if one had the right se-
cret word to utter or the correct magical act to perform.
Thus there arose Alchemy, an attempt to make gold out of
baser metals, Astrology, a belief that the movements of
the stars determined man's life and all of nature, and many
other strange doctrines.

PARACELSUS, for example, taught that man possessed
two bodies and a soul. The visible body comes from the
earth, the invisible body comes from the stars, and the soul
comes from God. He believed that there were three basic
substances: sal (the principle of all solids), mercury (the
principle of all liquids), and sulphur (the combustible).
Each of these elements is ruled by spirits. To control na-
ture one must control these spirits. AH nature is the home
of strange spirits which must be handled by magic acts
and words.

Other philosophers followed in this line, seeking to ac-
count for the universe as the home of many spirits. But,
gradually there arose thinkers who threw off this mass of
superstition and began to look at the world as a place
where forces met and opposed each other, BERNARDINO
TELESIO taught that tie universe is made up of matter and
force. Matter is created by God and remains constant all
the time. Heat is a force which expands matter, and cold
is a force which contracts matter. Thus, all objects in the
universe are, for him, a result of either expansion or con-
traction of matter.

In time men were able to move beyond the strange
magical theories of their predecessors and study nature as
the result of moving bodies. As they did this, they saw how
bodies moved in certain definite ways. This observation
lead to the statement of certain laws of the universe.

GALILEO was influenced by the theories of Democritus,
and believed that all change in the universe is due to the

THE NATCBE OF THE "UNIVERSE &Q

movement of parts or atoms. He developed his thinking
along mathematical lines and attempted to show that the
entire tiniverse was mathematical. His work, along with
that of Kepler, established the belief that the sun and not
the earth is the center of the universe. This is known as
the Copemican or heliocentric theory of the universe. With
the coming of SIR ISAAC NEWTON, fhfe theory was proved
beyond tie shadow of a doubt, so that today we recognize
that the sun is the center of our universe and all the
planets move about it in very definite ways.

GIORDANO BRUNO, writing in the spirit of the new age,
conceived the universe as composed of numerous uncaused
and wholly imperishable parts which he called "monads *
These parts unite to form bodies and things in various
ways. Further, the universe is the result of the union of
form and matter, much as Aristotle had held. Change re-
sults from matter taking on new f onru Particular objects,
therefore, may change. But this is only change of parts;
the whole, the universe, remains constant

TOMMASO GAMPANKLLA, another early philosopher of
this new age, held that nature is a revelation of God. The
world is the result of emanations from God. God produced
angels, ideas, spirits, immortal human souls, space, and
bodies. Thus, the universe is a result of God's creative
activity.

The Universe According to the Philosophers
of the Renaissance

FRANCIS BACON lived during the sixteenth and early
part of the seventeenth centuries. Although he did not con-
struct a theory of the universe, as "trumpeter of his time"
he laid the foundation for a modern theory. Bacon com-
pletely separated religion and philosophy. He argued that
the doctrines of religion could not be proved by thinking
and that men should give up the attempt; that to try was
a great waste of time and energy.

Having relegated the doctrines of religion to a realm all
their own, Bacon set about to develop a method of think-
ing which he believed would give mankind true knowledge

30 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

about his universe. This method we speak of as "induc-
tion." By careful study of the likenesses and differences
among things, man could discover the laws, causes, or
"forms" of objects in the universe. In this way he would
come to understand the universe.

For Bacon, nothing exists in the universe save individual
bodies. These act according to fixed laws which, if under-
stood, serve as the keys to unlock the mysteries of the uni-
verse and the levers by which to control this universe. In
this Bacon had turned wholly in the direction of modern
science and put the ancients and the Schoolmen to his back,
He was marching forward toward the world which we
understand today, a world of things and laws. Although he
did not offer a complete theory of the nature of the uni-
verse, he pointed the way which others might take in de-
veloping such a theory.

With THOMAS HOBBES philosophy has entered upon the
new and modern era. Hobbes breaks completely with the
past, with Greek philosophy and with the Schoolmen. Be-
ing a student of mathematics, Hobbes set about to think of
the world in terms comparable to mathematics. As a re-
sult, his philosophy is wholly materialistic concerned with
the material.

Hobbes assumes dogmatically, without trying to prove
it, that the world is a world of bodies in motion. These
bodies are in space and have certain characteristics or "ac-
cidents* such as motion, rest, color, hardness, and the like.
Motion is the continuous giving up of one space by a body
and the assuming of another. When one body affects an-
other, it either generates an accident in the affected body
or destroys an accident For example, let us imagine a body
at rest Hobbes would say that this body had the accident
of rest Now, suppose another body so affects this one that
it is no longer at rest, but is in motion. In this case the sec-
ond body has destroyed the accident of rest and generated
or created the accident of motion. This is what we call the
law of cause and effect, one accident perishes and another
is generated.

All objects are in motion, according to Hobbes. This mo-

THE NATUBE OF TEE UNIVERSE 3^

tion was given to them by God at the creation. As bodies
move about, they influence each other so that accidents
are destroyed or created.

Everything in the universe, even God, is a body (is cor-
poreal) and is moving. Thus, with bodies and motion*
Hobbes conceives the entire universe. This is why his phi-
losophy is spoken of as materialistic.

Descartes 9 Conception of the Universe

REN DESCARTES was also a mathematician. His study
of this subject and his respect for its certainty made him
seek to build a philosophy which would be as certain as
mathematics. He decided very early in his career that
everything in nature must be explained mechanically, with-
out the aid of forms, ideas, universal^. Thus, his whole phi-
losophy is machine-like, mechanistic.

At tie base of everything in the universe, of aH bodies,
is substance, he wrote. Substance is that which exists by
itself and independently of anything else. There are, he
believed, two kinds of substance, mind and body. These
exist independently of each other, but both depend upon
God who is the only absolute substance.

The substance that is body has the attribute of exten-
sionthat is, it has length, breadth, and thickness. This
body substance expresses itself in many modes, many in-
dividual objects in the universe. Therefore, every thing in
the universe is a mode of the substance which is body.
And each thing stems back to God, the absolute substance.

Further, in the universe there is no empty space or vac-
uum. Bodies fill all space. And bodies can be divided in-
finitely, into smaller and smaller particles.

Everything that goes on in the universe, according to
Descartes, is in some way a modification of extension. Ex-
tension may be divided into an infinite number of particles
which may be united into different forms of matter.

Motion causes bodies to pass from one place to another.
Motion, then, is a mode of movable things. All that hap-
pens in the universe is the transference of motion from one
part of space to another. But the motion in the universe

JJ2 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

is constant At the beginning God gave the world a certain
definite amount of motion. Thus motion remains the same
in the universe; it cannot be destroyed. If one object
slows up, another must move faster.

Further, according to Descartes, all change in the world
must take place according to laws. Indeed, all the laws of
nature are, in the philosophy of Descartes, laws of motion.

The universe, then, is composed of bodies created by
God and endowed with motion. These bodies move about
according to fixed and purely mechanical laws. As we
learn these laws, we can understand the universe and come
to control it. This is a purely mechanical theory of organic
nature. It contains no forms or ideas, no universals.

Mind, which we shall discuss in more detail in a later
chapter, is for Descartes also a substance. Its attribute is
thinking, and it expresses itself in many modes. Although
body and mind are both substances, and both stem from
God, they are independent To maintain this complete in-
dependence, Descartes gave himself the most difficult
problem of showing how mind can influence body or body
influence mind. His solution of this problem will be dis-
cussed when we come to the study of mind and matter.

The great merit of Descartes' philosophy was, however,
this extreme separation of body and mind. We may speak
of his thought as emphasizing the "dualism" of mind and
matter; that is, stressing the "two-f old" nature of the uni-
verse. By making these two substances entirely independ-
ent, he left nature free for the mechanical explanations of
natural science. The scientists could busy themselves with
a study of nature without having to worry about mind.
Science could develop along purely mechanical lines with-
out having to make room for purposes, goals, and other
characteristics of mind or spirit. It could busy itself with
the discovery of the laws by which all bodies act and move.
Indeed, in this way modern science was made possible.

This dualism of Descartes brought to the fore the prob-
lem of how we can know anything about the material
world. How can mind, which is absolutely distinct from
matter, know a material world? How can we answer any

THE NATUKE OP THE TOTTVERSE 33

of the questions about the nature of the universe? ABNOLD
GCTXINCX, a successor of Descartes, teaches that God
alone has knowledge of things, and all that we can know
is ourselves* NICOLAS MALEBBANCHE, another thinker of
the period following Descartes, agreed with Guelincx that
we cannot know anything about the universe. However,
we <3o have ideas about the world, we think we see it, and
experience it in many ways. And we act accordingly. But
all we have are ideas which God has put in us. *Tf God,"
he writes, Tiad destroyed the created world, and would
continue to affect me as he now affects me, I should con-
tinue to see what I now see." Thus, the universe which
we experience is a universe of ideas. Whether or not there
is a material world "out there," we cannot know.

Consequently, by making a sharp distinction between
the material and the mental, Descartes opened the door to
complete skepticism as regards the existence of a universe
outside of the human mind. And many thinkers entered
this door and denied the existence of such a world. If
mind and matter are distinct, then neither can influence
the other, and mind cannot know matter, the world of
things.

Spinoza's Theory of the Universe

Descartes, as we have seen, taught that the universe is
made up of two kinds of substance, mind and body. This
dualism did not satisfy BENEDICT SPINOZA. Spinoza taught
that there is only one substance, one basic "stuff* which
constitutes the entire universe. This he called God. For
Spinoza, everything in the universe is God, and all the
individual things are actually one great whole.

We may think of the basic substance as, for example, a
great metal shield, with different designs on each side. If
we look at It from one side we see a definite design, but if
we look at it from the other side we see a wholly different
design. So with substance. If it is seen in one way it is
body. If seen from another position it is mind. Spinoza
called the one extension and the other mind.

Thus, every object in the universe, star, tree, man, ani-

34 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

mal, water, wind, stone, is a part of God, is God. Every
object is also both extension and mind. There is no body
without mind and no mind without body.

Substance, the underlying "stuff" of the universe, is ab-
solutely independent of everything, for it is everything. It
is infinite, self -caused, and self-determined. It has no limits,
was made by itself, and is determined by nothing but it-
self. This God, or Nature, is the world. This unifying con-
ception is known as "pantheism." So thorough is Spinoza
in holding this position that he has been referred to as
"God-intoxicated."

This substance, God, expresses itself in an infinite num-
ber of attributes, but man can grasp only two, extension
and thought. God, or Nature, is both body and mind. Fur-
ther, these attributes are absolutely independent of each
other. Body does not affect mind nor does mind affect
body. But both are manifestations of one and the same
universal reality, God.

These attributes appear to man in specific ways or
"modes.** There are many bodies and many ideas. The
particular body, a tree, is a mode .of extension which is an
attribute of God, My particular thought at this moment
is a mode of mind which is an attribute of God.

All the bodies in the universe and all the ideas grouped
together form a totality which is God or substance. This
constitutes the "face of the whole universe." The individual
objects or ideas may change, but the whole, the "face of
the whole universe," does not change.

Further, all the bodies in the universe form a chain of
causes. The tree you see was caused by something else,
which in turn was caused by something else, and so on.
Thus tiiis particular tree owes its existence to some other
physical object. It is not necessary that God create this
tree; but, having it present, he is the underlying substance
of it. If, for example, we have a triangle, we know im-
mediately that certain things must be true of it. It has
certain properties, and all triangles will have these prop-
erties. However, we cannot tell from the concept of a
triangle the number, size, and shape of different triangles.

THE NATUBJE CF THE UNIVEBSE 35

In the same way, from substance we can state the prop-
erties of bodies, but we cannot state the properties of the
different objects in the universe.

For Spinoza, then, the entire universe is one substance,
which he called God or Nature. This substance has at
least two attributes, extension and mind. And there are
many modes of each attribute. Thus, God is the universe
and the universe is God. But bodies are independent of
mind and mind is independent of body. However, when
something happens in body, it also happens in mind. This
is called "psycho-physical parallelism"; that is, body and
mind are always parallel, for they are two aspects of one
and the same substance.

The Positions of Locke, Berkeley, and Hume

JOHN LOCKE, admirer of Descartes but thinker who gave
to the modern world a new interpretation of man, began
his thinking with the question: How does man know? His
conclusion, after a long and painstaking investigation, was
that all knowledge comes from sense impressions. This
point of view made it necessary for him to account for the
universe as the source of these impressions.

Is there a real world which corresponds to our ideas? If
there is such a world, how can we, having only ideas,
prove its existence? Locke's answer was to the effect that
there is such a world. Our senses, he said, tell us of this
world. We do experience this world and are justified in
saying that it exists. Though we may not be able to say
much about the source of our sensations, we are able to
say that the sensations are caused. Thus, the real world is
the cause of our sensations. This much we can say. For
example, we have an idea of white. This idea is not born in
us, but is caused. From this we can reason that the real
world contains something which causes in us an idea of
white.

However, even of this we cannot be absolutely certain.
Our knowledge of this world is probable. We can be more
certain of the existence in the universe of ourselves and of

36 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

God. But all else is only probable. Therefore, Locke ar-
gued, we can never have a perfect natural science.

At tiiis point Locke follows fairly closely the position of
Descartes, which we have outlined. The world, he holds,
is composed of substances. These are the bases, the sup-
ports, of all qualities. We experience, for example, white.
This quality just does not float around in space, but is the
whiteness of something. This something is a substance.

Further, there are two kinds of substances, bodies and
souls. Bodies have the attributes of extension, solidity, and
impenetrability. They fill space, are solid, and cannot be
penetrated. Souls are spiritual substances, are immaterial.
Souls, mincfe, and bodies act upon each other. The body
can cause happenings in the soul, and what happens to
the soul may affect the body. For example, bodies act
upon the mind so that we have experiences of color, sound,
touch, and the like. Despite his belief in interaction,
Locke's theory of the universe is dualistic. There are minds
and there are bodies. While both are substances, they are
different kinds of substances.

Here it is evident that, with some changes, Locke follows
in the footsteps of Descartes in holding that bodies and
mind are two kinds of substances, or bearers of qualities.
The universe is made up of these substances. However, we
can know only the ideas which these substances produce in
us through sensations.

If, however, the basis of knowledge is sensation and re-
flection upon sensations, how can we know that a world
of bodies distinct from our ideas of bodies exists? GEORGE
BERKELEY asked this question. John Locke had taught that,
actually, all we can know are our Ideas, and had presup-
posed a world which causes our sensations. But Berkeley
recognized immediately that he could not prove the exist-
ence of such a world on the basis of his philosophy. Fur-
ther, Berkeley, being a deeply religious man and seeing
so much atheism or disbelief in God in the world, was
convinced that atheism would be abolished if one could
disprove belief in matter.

Consequently, Berkeley carried Locke's philosophy to its

THE NATDBE OF THE UNIVERSE 37

logical conclusion as he saw it, and taught that there can
be no universe of material objects. All we can prove, he
argued, is that we have ideas.

But what about the source of these ideas? Do we create
our own ideas? Berkeley answered, "No/* The cause of
sensations, and thus the cause of all ideas, is God. We
cannot perceive God but can perceive the effects of his
work, ideas.

Berkeley held consistently, as he believed, to the position
that nothing in the universe existed unless it was perceived.
I am sitting in my room. I look about and see chairs, a
table, books, and other objects. These are not real in the
sense that they are material objects. They are ideas in my
mind. But, if I leave the room, do these objects vanish?
Do I carry them out of the room in my mind? Berkeley
taught that they might still exist in some other mind. If
other people are in the room, they may exist in their minds.
If there are no other people in the room, they may still
exist in the mind of God. But, all the time, they are ideas
and not material objects.

The material universe, which Descartes, Spinoza, and
Locke had taught existed, was denied by Berkeley. For
him, all that exists are ideas in the mind. If they are not in
my mind, they may be in your mind or in God's mind. Of
course, they seem to be material, but actually they are not.
Berkeley was simply following the ideas of Locke to their
logical conclusion, to a denial of the existence of a material
universe.

DAVID HUME, a Scot of the eighteenth century, felt that
Berkeley had not gone far enough. Not only must we
abandon the idea of substance, he taught, but we must
also abandon the idea of a God in whose mind all ideas
exist. Hume could find no good argument for the existence
of God.

Then, all that we have is a succession of ideas. These
are caused by impressions. Hume agreed with Berkeley
that only those things exist which are perceived. My table
exists only when it is perceived. I may perceive it, my
friend may perceive it, or God may perceive it. Thus, "to

38 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

be is to be perceived.* However, we cannot prove fiat
God exists. Therefore, if I am in a room alone and per-
ceive a table, the table exists as I perceive it When I
leave the room, the table no longer exists.

There is, then, in Hume's view, no substance. All that
we have is a succession, a stream of ideas, one following
the other. We cannot prove the cause, of these ideas. It is
foolish to say that there is a substance "out there" in space
causing our ideas. No one can prove this. Whenever we
look, we find ideas following each other, ideas of chairs,
tables, people, trees, stars, and the like. Thus we have no
evidence of the existence of a world of nature or of God.

Hume carried Locke's theory to its logical and final con-
clusion in skepticism* Locke had taught that we have ideas
which are caused by an outer world, Hume admitted the
existence of ideas, but showed that, if this is all we have,
we are shut up |n our own minds and cannot prove the
existence of an outside world. All we can be sure of is a
parade of individual ideas, one following the other. Their
cause, their connection, even the place where they are
parading is unknown. We have come in Hume to a dead-
end street.

It is natural that man would not remain satisfied with
the skepticism of Hume. THOMAS KEID, another Scot, led
the opposition. He taught that Hume had reached an im-
possible position. Common sense tells us that a real world
exists as the cause of our sensations and ideas. We may
speculate all we want, but we will not be contented to deny
what common sense tells us. Therefore, he argues, those
things which we perceive distinctly by our senses exist,
and they exist as we perceive them. There is a world "out
there** corresponding to our ideas. Tables, chairs, and the
like do exist independently of our ideas of them. Common
sense tells us that this is so, and we cannot deny common
sense.

German thought took a different road from that of Eng-
land or Scotland. It was concerned with the then develop-
ing natural sciences, but found itself believing in the values
of Christian beliefs. Consequently, it sought to reconcile

THE NATURE OF THE UNIVERSE 39

science and these valuable elements in Christian specu-
lation.

Leibnittf Theory of the Universe

GOTTFBIED WILHELM LEIBNITZ, one of the leaders of
German thought in the seventeenth century, became con-
vinced after much careful study and investigation that the
essential attribute of the bodies in the universe is force.
By force he meant "the tendency of the body to move or
continue its motion.* The entire universe is, for "him, built
out of units of force. Each body consists of a number of
these units of force, and all nature consists of an infinite
number of such units. These units of force Leibnitz called
"monads/' or force-atoms. Each monad is eternal, it cannot
be destroyed or changed.

But monads have different degrees of clearness. The
most obscure, vague, cloudy monads form plants. Those
less cloudy form animals. The monads which form man
are still clearer. And the clearest of all monads is God.
The universe is composed of an infinite number of monads
extending all the way from the most cloudy monad to
God, There is no break in this series. At one extreme is
inorganic matter, rocks and the like. And at the other ex-
treme is God.

Each monad contains within itself the entire universe.
Thus, since the monad has no "windows," all that it be-
comes is contained within it from the beginning. Each
monad realizes its nature with an inner necessity. Nothing
can be in a monad but what has been there from the
beginning.

The organic bodies, living beings, contain a "queen
monad" or soul which is the guiding principle of all the
monads which make up the body. No monad can influence
another. God created monads in the beginning so that they
operate together in harmony. When one monad does some-
thing, it does not influence another monad. But, because
the other monad is so created, it acts as though the one
had influenced it. Thus all monads act together just as do
the various parts of an organism.

40 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

Leibnitzf universe, then, is not mechanical, but is dy-
namic, alive. It is composed of an infinite number of mon*
ads of various degrees of clearness. Here we sense the old
theory of Democritus, the atomistic theory. But the atoms
of Leibnitz are not all alike, nor are they pure mechanical
units. They are units of force and differ in clearness. And
God is the clearest monad.

By means of this theory, Leibnitz believed that he had
reconciled the science of his day with the values of the
Christian doctrine. He had a scientific universe in which
God was the supreme being or monad.

Kant's Conception of the Universe

German philosophy reached its height in the worlc of
IMMANCEL KANT, one of the great philosophic system-
builders of all times. His fundamental problem lay in the
question, What is knowledge, and how is it possible? What
can we really know, and how? His conclusion was that we
can know only our experiences* We have sensations. We
see a chair. Because our minds are such as they are, we
receive this sensation in a definite way. But we cannot
know the cause of the sensation.

On this theory, we cannot know the universe which
exists outside of our fhtiVlrfng, Our ?nfnj$ receive sensa-
tions and shape them into ideas because they are what
they are. What the world is without our minds, it is im-
possible for us to know.

But, by Reason we can form an Idea of this world, this
universe. As we experience the world in our minds, we
find that the world has no beginning in time, that bodies
in the world cannot be divided infinitely, that everything
in the world takes place according to the laws of nature,
and that there is no absolutely necessary Being who causes
the world to -be. We must accept this theory of the world
of experience because we cannot experience it otherwise.

However, Reason can construct a world of Idea which
has no beginning in time, in which bodies can be divided
infinitely, in which there is freedom, and in which there is
an absolutely necessary Being, God, who is the cause of

THE NATUBE OF THE UNIVERSE 4!

everything. Although we cannot know such a universe
through experience, we can reason its existence and we can
act as though it were real. Indeed, Kant believed that man
must act as though this kind of a world existed if he would
preserve his moral integrity. For, on the basis of such a
world Kant reasoned to the existence of God, freedom, and
immortality. Further, he showed that all goodness, all mo-
rality, was dependent upon acting as if this land of a world
existed. The Idea of this world, he held, is regulative, it
directs man to certain goals. Believing in the eixstence of
such a universe, man strives to be good.

Thus, for Kant, there are two universes: one of experi-
ence, the "phenomenal" world, and one of reason, the
"noumenal" world. The one is scientific, the other is
practical.

Kant taught that the fundamental principle of the prac-
tical world is a moral law which may be stated: "Always
act so that you can will the maxim or determining principle
of your action to become universal law; act so that you can
will that everybody shall follow the principle of your ac-
tion." This he called the "categorical imperative."

If one is to act so that the principle of his action shall be-
come a law for all men, he must be free to act in this way.
Therefore, Kant placed freedom at the center of his prac-
tical world. We shall discuss Kant's view of the practical
world more fully in our chapter on "What Is Good and
.WhatlsEvil?"

Fickte, Schetting, and Hegel

JOHANN GOTTLIEB FICHTE took this principle of freedom
and made it fundamental to his whole philosophical posi-
tion. He took the stand that the self, the "ego," is a free,
self-determining activity.

The starting-point of Fichte's thinking is this ego or
creative, free principle. It is God, and is the creator of all
that is. It creates each individual person, you and me and
all the individuals in the universe. It also creates the entire
world of things.

But, we and all things are not matter, material. There is

42 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

no material in the sense of lifeless matter such as the
older philosophers taught Everything in the universe is
spirit The tree and your mind are both the universal, ab-
solute ego or God. Thus, the real world is a world of mind
or spirit and not a world of dead matter. Everything is the
ego, God. But the ego creates a limit to itself so that it
may contend against this limit and grow to perfection.
Thus, the world of objects, the so-called "material" world,
is produced by the ego to furnish an arena in which it may
exercise its freedom.

Freedom would mean nothing if there were not some-
thing hindering the exercise of freedom. Therefore, the
eternal ego, God, has created the world, the "non-ego," as
a limit to itself, a world of opposition in which it can
struggle, in which it can become conscious of itself. This
is a world of law, a world in which things happen ac-
cording to set rules.

My reason, your reason, our minds are also creations or
parts of this universal ego. We do not create our world of
things, but are creations of the same ego which has created
this world. Since the universal ego is the universal active
reason, the same in all persons, we all see the world alike.

This point of view is called "Idealism." It is based upon
the belief that there is no matter in the universe, but every-
thing is mind or spirit, idea. Descartes, Locke, and even
Kant had taught that there are two principles in the uni-
verse, mind and matter. Fichte denied this recognition of
two principles. He eliminated matter, and held that every-
thing in the universe is mind or spirit The world only
seems to be material. If we understand aright, we shall
realize that even this is spirit. The universe is mind, spirit,
ego, God. Thus, though the universe is a reality outside of
individual personal minds, it is not made of a different ma-
terial, it is not a world of dead things. But, it is "the revela-
tion in human consciousness of the absolute principle/' Na-
ture is spirit, mind, and can be nothing else.

Thus, for Fichte, the moral law of Kant implies freedom,
freedom implies deliverance from obstacles. There must be
obstacles. Therefore, the universal self or ego created out

THE NATURE OF THE TXNIVEBSE 43

of itself the world of sensible things to serve as its op-
ponent. The world of experience is deduced from the moral
law. Because this concept of Kant's influenced Fichte and
many other thinkers, we speak of Kant as the father of
modern Idealism*

Following in this same idealistic tradition was FKDEDBICH
Wn.HFXM JOSEPH SCHELUNG, brilliant German philoso-
pher and student of religion. For hfm, as for Fichte, the
ground of all the universe was one all-pervading world
spirit or ego. However, he taught that this spirit as found
in nature was not conscious of itself, and that it became
fully self-conscious only in man.

Thus there is a development in consciousness from na-
ture through man. Nature and thinking are steps or stages
in the development of the absolute mind. God is nature and
God is mind. The one is God asleep while the other is God
fully awake. But, in either, or throughout the whole de-
velopment, God remains the same.

All the universe, including man, is a whole. The parts,
the objects and individuals are all parts of the whole. Thus
nature is alive, dynamic, creative. Wherever one may stop
to investigate, he will find spirit striving to realize itself
fully, to become wholly self-conscious. Inorganic nature,
the trees, rocks, earth, and the like, are of tie same ma-
terial as is the human mind. But the former are blind,
"unripe," unconscious.

This doctrine is pantheism. The universe is conceived as
a living, growing, moving system. God is the universe and
the universe is God. In plants and rocks, God is blind,
unconscious impulse. Move upward to man and God be-
comes conscious or seeing, he comes to knowledge of him-
self.

GEORG WILHELM FBIEDBICH HEGEL attempted to bring
the philosophical positions of Kant, Fichte, and Schelling
into a whole which would be complete and satisfying.
Thus, he taught that the entire universe is an evolution of
mind from nature to God.

Everywhere, in the natural world or in the mind of man,
we find a process of unfolding. This he called the dialec-

44 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

tical process or the principle of contradiction. Everything
tends to pass over to its opposite. The seed tends to become
a flower. However, nature does not stop with these con-
tradictions, hut strives to overcome them, to reconcile them
in a whole or unity.

The entire universe is a whole. In it this principle is
working, a principle which is rational. Mind is everywhere.
Within this whole there is development. And this develop-
ment proceeds by the dialectical process. First we discover
a thing, a "thesis." Then we discover its opposite or con-
tradiction, an "antithesis/* These two are at last reconciled
in a "synthesis" which becomes another "thesis'* and the
process starts again.

All the universe is a continuation of this process within
the whole. Reality then is a process of evolution, a develop-
ing from a less dear to a more clear.

This process is the process of thought. Therefore, the
universe is thought and is subject to the laws of thought.
As we think, so the universe develops. But this is all a
process of a thinking whole. Nature and man are one
within this whole. The same processes which are found in
man's mind are also found in nature. In nature this move-
ment proceeds unconsciously. The seed grows into a plant,
and into a flower. But it is not conscious of its growth. In
man the process becomes conscious and man knows that he
is developing. This same process is discovered everywhere.

For Hegel, then, the universe is a whole or totality.
This .whole is a thinking process and it develops as does all
thought, thesis, antithesis, and synthesis. This is Ideal-
ism worked out completely and to the last degree.

The Views of the Later German Philosophers

The idealistic philosophy of Hegel certainly could not go
unchallenged. It contradicted so much of common sense
that it was inevitable that a thinker, or group of thinkers,
would arise to present the other side of the picture.
JOHANN FRIEDRICH HERBART was such a thinker. He took
issue with every phase of Hegel's philosophy and sought to

THE NATURE OF THK TXNIVEBSE 45

show that the idealistic philosophy was full of impossible
theories.

For Herbart the universe consists of a great number of
unchangeable principles or substances which he called
"reals." Each real is a simple thing, Is changeless, absolute,
indivisible, not extended in time or in space. In the world
of reals there is no change, no growth; it is static.

Our bodies are aggregates of these reals, and each soul
is a real. Each real strives to maintain itself against any-
thing that would affect it. In this striving for self-preserva-
tion, each real will behave differently in the presence of
different reals.

We relate reals together into aggregates and thus create
the universe which we experience. For example, I come
into relationship with many reals and bring them together
into a red apple. Then, by bringing other reals into the
situation and rejecting some which I had there first, the
apple becomes a peeled apple. Thus, the real world is ab-
solutely static. Nothing happens in it. AH happenings are
phenomena in consciousness. As consciousness arranges
and rearranges reals, things appear, change, and dis-
appear.

The entire uiSverse, then, is, for Herbart, made up of
these spaceless, timeless, units which never change, but
which exert activity in preserving themselves against other
reals. As We arrange and rearrange reals we produce the
world of experience.

This theory of the universe is known as "Realism," and
its basic idea is that the universe is real and is not a crea-
tion of mind. Although experience reveals only phenom-
ena, an appearance must always be the appearance of
something. There is a reality which causes the appear-
ance. Kant had called this reality the "thing-in-itself."
Hegel had argued that there is no such "thing." Herbart
agreed with Kant and sought to describe this real cause
of appearances.

ARTHUR SCHOPENHAUER attacked the problem from an-
other angle. He agreed with. Kant that the world of ex-
perience is a world of phenomena; but he disagreed with

46 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

him in holding that we can become aware of the thing-in-
itself. He noted that when man wants something he sets
about to build or create it. I want a table, and I get boards,
tools, nails, and build one. Or I work to make the money
to buy one.

From this, he argued that will is the cause of all things
in the universe. The thing-in-itself, for him, is will, the
cause of everything. The universe is a result of will.

In organic and inorganic life the fact is the same. In a
rock, will is blind, but it is the creative principle which
brings the rock into being. As we move up to man, will
becomes conscious. Man may direct his will by intelligence
in getting what he wills* The universe, then, is a result of
will, a primal will which continues to work regardless of
the coming or going of individuals.

RUDOLF HERMANN LOTZE sought to interpret Kant's
thing-in-itself in terms of mind. He taught that the physical
world is to be understood as purely mechanical, as a mat-
ter of physical and chemical laws. But, this is the world of
perception. The cause of this world is comparable to soul
or mind.

Thus, there are various degrees of reality. In the case of
matter mental life is present but clouded. In man this
mental life is conscious and dear. The universe, then, is
alive and is mind. Here again we encounter Idealism.

The work of Lotze and other Idealists made a profound
impression on the thinking of their age. GUSTAV THEODOR
FECHNER conceived the universe as similar to human in-
dividuals. The material world is the body of the universe.
But this body has a soul or a mental life. This mental life
is to be found in descending degrees in animals, plants,
and lastly in organic matter. God is the soul of the uni-
verse, just as the human body has a soul. FRIEDRICH PAUL-
SEN and WILHELM WUNDT followed in the same tradition.
Wundt taught that the external world is "the outer husk
behind which lies concealed a spiritual creation, a striving
and feeling reality resembling that which we experience
in ourselves."

By admitting the existence of a material world they met

THE NATUBE OF THE "UNIVERSE 47

the objections of those who felt that the Idealists had
denied common sense* But, hy holding that mind or spirit
is the creative spirit in this world, that the world is alive,
they believed tibat they had conserved the values of Ideal-
ism. Their philosophies were attempts to meet the de-
mands of the then growing natural sciences while at the
same time to escape the crass materialism which threat-
ened philosophy as science became stronger. They be-
lieved that the values of mind, spirit, or soul should not
be covered up and lost completely in the landslide of
modern science.

The Positions of John Stuart Mitt and Herbert Spencer

JOHN STCJART MILL taught that actually our ideas are all
that we can know. We find these ideas following each other
in consistent ways and so often that we can be reasonably
sure that they will continue to do so. For example, the idea
of being burned always follows the idea of sticking one's
hand into a fire.

Mill holds that law and order reign in the universe and
that there are invariable sequences of events upon which
we can depend. Further, he teaches that the law of cause
and effect is universal. We find a certain set of ideas being
followed in every case by the same idea. This leads us to
recognize that the effect is caused by the set of preceding
ideas.

But, as is evident, up to this point Mill is discussing
phenomena, experiences, ideas. What of the cause of these?
Is there an external universe? Mill believes that there is
such a universe which is the cause of our sensations. I see
a piece of white paper in a room. Then I leave the room
and remember that the paper was experienced under cer-
tain conditions. I return to the room and again experience
the paper. After I have done this several times with the
same results, the paper is always experienced upon my re-
turn to the room, I generalize that the paper is there in the
external world and causes my experience. I form the no-
tion of something permanent, persisting. Thus "the so-
called external world is simply the possibility that certain

48 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

sensations will recur in the same order in which they have
occurred/*

It is evident that Mill, although he thinks largely in the
Idealistic tradition, believes that there is a cause of our
sensations, experiences, a "thing-in-itself ." There is a uni-
verse distinct from our sensations and experiences, the
cause of ideas which we have.

But we cannot know with absolute certainty anything
about this world. From our experiences of it, we can be
reasonably certain about some things in it, and not so sure
about others. However, all that we know about it is based
on experience, and no one has had every possible experi-
ence so as to be able to make a generalization which will
be without exception. There is still the possibility that some
exception, some new experience, will arise to prove the gen-
eralization applicable only to certain sets of conditions and
not to others.

HERBERT SPENCER is the great philosopher of evolution.
He sought to develop a philosophic theory based on the
findings of Darwin and other biologists; build a system of
thought which would embody the important ideas of the
doctrine of evolution.

He began his philosophy with the recognition that phe-
nomena, things as presented to us, are all that we can
know. The cause of these phenomena is unknowable. But
there is a cause, an Absolute Being behind all phenomena.
Of course, we do make judgments about it. We conceive it
as a force or power causing all that we know. Further, we
think of it as both mental and physical. It is the cause of
our thoughts and of the universe. But, all these ideas are
mere symbols, ways which we have invented of thinking of
the Absolute. Actually we can know nothing about it. It is
the Unknowable. All that we can know are the inner and
outer expressions of the Absolute.

And these expressions obey the law of evolution. We see
them becoming groups and these groups organizing into
wholes. As the groups are organized, various forms of life
evolve. The human individual is a result of the formation
of groups of atoms into hands, arms, heart, lungs, feet, and

THE NATUBE OF THE UNIVERSE 49

the like, and the organization of all these into a body in
which each part does its duty as part of the whole body.
The legs walk, the hands grasp, the heart beats, eta

Thus, Spencer believes in the existence of a world ex-
ternal to our consciousness* This world we infer because it
is impossible for us to do otherwise. Because we have im-
pressions, we reason that there must be a cause of these
impressions, an external world* But the impressions are not
pictures, copies of the external world. As far as we can
know, they may be as unlike the external world as letters
of a word are unlike the idea which the word means,
"H-o-r-s-e"-~ the letters themselves do not suggest the idea
of a horse which the whole word calls before us. Likewise,
our impressions and the actual external world may be
wholly unlike one another. All that we can say with cer-
tainty, Spencer believes, is that there is something beyond
consciousness which is the cause of our impressions, the
Unknowable, the Absolute.

Josidh Royce, William James, and John Dewey

JOSIAH ROYCE, leader of the Idealistic school of thought
in the United States, began his thinking from the nature of
man. We are conscious beings and organize our experiences
into wholes or a system. Likewise, he teaches, the universe
is a conscious Being, a whole. My thinking, your thinking,
the thinking of everyone are parts of the whole thinking
universe.

I have an idea of a table. I do not create this idea or the
table. The table is there. But it is not matter. Rather, the
cause of my idea of a table is the idea of a table in the
mind of the Absolute. It is, therefore, an idea which causes
my idea, but is God's idea. The whole universe, then, is
similar to my own ideas. This universe is a self-conscious
organism idealized. It is all the ideas of all mankind and
the causes of these ideas. The outer world is mental just
as is the inner world of my experience.

These thinkers, the Idealists, have attempted to inter-
pret the universe in terms of the thinking individual in or-
der to conserve the values of spiritual life. They have rde-

50 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GRKAT PHILOSOPHERS

gated science to a secondary or lower position, but have
taken it into account For them, the laws of science are ac-
tually the laws of thinking. But, the real world is not to be
limited to the unchanging laws of material things. Above
these laws are the laws of man's spirit. By this belief, they
escape strict determinism and make possible freedom and
morality. If man is subject to the inevitable laws of science,
he cannot be free and it is futile to hold him to account
for his actions. He cannot be blamed. But freedom and
moral responsibility are too valuable to be lost in this way.
Consequently, the Idealists hold on to them by arguing
that the world is actually spiritual rather than physical.
Modern science seems to them to destroy all that makes
human life human.

Recent philosophy is characterized by this attempt to
take account of the whole realm of modern science with its
laws and consistencies and at the same time preserve those
things which men have found of value. The Idealists lay
emphasis upon these values and think of a universe in
which they are dominant.

WILLIAM JAMES, one of the first Pragmatists, found that
a "block-universe" in which everything was governed by
the laws of science was not satisfying. He wrote, "If every-
thing, man included, is the mere effect of the primitive
nebula or the infinite substance, what becomes of moral re-
sponsibility, freedom of action, individual effort, and aspira-
tion?" He believed that the test of any theory or belief
should be its practical consequences. This is the pragmatic
test. And he was certain that only a theory of the universe
which took into account moral responsibility, freedom of
action, and the like, and made room for them, would have
consequences that were good.

The real world, for him, was the world of human experi-
ence. Here we find science and human values all included.
Beyond this he believed it impossible for a thinker to go.
Although he did not doubt the existence of a world outside
of experience, a world that caused experiences, he believed
that we could not experience it and therefore could know
nothing about it.

THE NATURE OF THE "UNIVERSE 51

JOHN DEWEY, one of the leaders of present-day Pragma-
tism, held that the universe is a changing, growing, devel-
oping thing. He concentrates his attention upon experience,
which he finds is ever becoming, changing, being enriched.
The philosopher, he argues, must cease to spend his time
with questions of beginnings, of what lies outside of experi-
ence, of a world "out there." It makes no difference for us
whether or not there is such a world. For us it is the experi-
ences which we have that are the important things, and the
explanation of how they come, grow, change, and influ-
ence other experiences. The universe of our experience is
uncertain, doubtful, full of surprises, but is also character-
ized by consistencies upon which we can depend. This is
the only world in which Dewey was interested.

The Views of Henri Bergson and George Santayana

HENRI BERGSON, who was the leader of another attempt
to conserve values in a world of science, taught that a uni-
verse as described by science would not be adequate. It
leaves out too much. To know the universe in its fullness,
one must live in it and apprehend it by "intuition." A man
cannot know a river by merely sitting on its banks; he must
jump into it and swim with its current. We must immerse
ourselves in the universe to understand it

The universe for Bergson is a moving, growing, becom-
ing, living thing. Science cuts a slice out of it and tells us
that this slice is the universe. For Bergson, the slice by it-
self is dead, unreal. The true universe is living, rich, con-
taining the slice, but more than the slice. He characterized
the universe as a process of "creative evolution," a becom-
ing in which new things appear. The cause of this is the
creative nature of the universe. "The whole evolution of
life on our planet is an effort of this essentially creative
force to arrive, by traversing matter, at something which
is only realized in man and which, even in man, is realized
only imperfectly.'* In seeking to organize matter, this crea-
tive force has been trapped. La man, creativity is seen to be
breaking away from matter and becoming free.

Another modern philosopher who deals with this prob-

52 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

lem of science and values is GEORGE SANTAYANA. His real
universe is the universe of human experience in all its rich-
ness and fullness. That there is a substance causing such
experience he does not doubt, but rather seeks to justify its
existence. He writes that Herbert Spencer was correct in
maintaining the existence of such a substance, but believes
that it is knowable through experience. We are certain of
this world of experience. We find in it the kws of science
and all the beauty, truth, and goodness for which we long,
It is a real world in any true sense of tihie term real.

Thus, modern science will not permit us to deny that the
real world is as the scientist finds it, a thing upon which
we can depend and the laws of which men can discover
and act upon with a high degree of certainty. We can
trust the universe as explained by the scientists. But phi-
losophers are keenly conscious that this universe of the
scientists is not all. They discover in the universe the hu-
man mind, human hopes and fears, love and hate, dreams
and defeats. Here they find men acting as though they
were free and others holding them responsible for their ac-
tions. The universe for them is also a place of struggle,
planning and realization, willing and creating. It is this that
the philosophers will not give up.

Consequently, the universe of modern philosophy is one
in which both science and human values are accounted for.
Today no thinker can daim recognition unless he has in
some way at least accounted for the discoveries of the labo-
ratories and those of the inner man. This whole universe is
real, and any other is but a part, and no one must hold
that the part, any part, is the whole and the rest unreal.
All the universe, the outer and the inner, is real, and the
philosopher must find place for it all in his system. This is
the problem of modern philosophy, the problem of the
nature of the universe as seen by philosophers now writing
and teaching.

Chapter II
MAN'S PLACE IN THE UNIVERSE

PROTAGORAS SOCRATES PLATO ARISTOTLE

AUGUSTINE ABELARD AQUINAS
SPINOZA LOCKE LEIBNITZ ROUSSEAU

KANT NIEIZSCHE COMTE
SPENCER JAMES DEWEY RUSSELL

Is man the destined master of the universe, or Is he a
"worm of the dust"? What is the relation between
man and the universe? Is man the center of the tini-
verse, the god of aU creation, or is he a mere inci-
dent of no more significance to the universe than a
speck of dust? Is the universe friendly or unfriendly to
man, or is it merely unconcerned?

I consider thy heavens, the work of thy fingers,
the moon and the stars, which thou hast ordained; what is
man, that thou art mindful of him?" wrote the ancient
Hebrew Psalmist many centuries ago. And his answer re-
vealed a high opinion of the dignity of man. Thou hast
made him but little lower than God, and crowned him with
glory and honor. Thou makest hi to have dominion over
the works of thy hands; thou hast put all things under his
feet"

This is one attitude toward the problem of man's place
in the universe. It is the belief that man is the crowning
creation of the entire creative process, and that he may

54 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

rule over everything in the universe. Man is "but little
lower than God."

Another belief about man's place in nature is expressed
by the Biblical author o "Ecclesiastes." This skeptical in-
dividual teaches, **For that which befaHeth the sons o
men befalleth beasts ... as tihe one dieth, so dieth the
other . . . man hath no pre-eminence above tie beasts.
... AH go unto one place, all are of the dust, and all re-
turn to dust."

Here is extreme pessimism about man. He is nothing but
dust, a miserable worm with no pre-eminence or power.
He suffers, struggles, is beaten down by the forces of the
universe which are mighty and powerful* His life is a "way
of suffering," a "vale of tears and sorrows/*

As the early wise men of Judaism thought about tfng
problem, so thought those of other races and peoples. The
Egyptians, Babylonians, Assyrians, Phoenicians, and other
early peoples strove to understand man in relation to his
universe. And there were among them optimists who
placed man above all else in the universe, and pessimists
who saw him as nothing more than an insignificant sec-
ond in time.

Marts Importance According to the
Early Greek Philosophers

While tie very early Greeks did not deal directly with
the problem of man's place in the universe, their theories
of the nature of the universe left man, by implication, as a
part of this universe. For THALES, for example, man, as
everything else in the universe, was made of water. Man,
like all else in nature, came to be by a natural process and
in due time returns to the original stuff of tie universe.

In the thinking of all these early Greeks, nature is su-
preme, and man is a part of nature. HERACUTOS taught
that man is part of the universal fire, he is subject to the
law of the universe. He wrote, This one order of things
neither any one of the gods nor of men has made, but it
always was, is, and ever shall be, an ever-living fire,
kindling according to fixed measure and extinguished ao-

MAN'S PLACE IN THE UNIVERSE 55

cording to fixed measure." Here is a definite idea of the ab-
solute supremacy of the universe, of nature. Man, as every-
thing else including the gods, is subject to this universe and
can do nothing to change it or to escape.

According to EMPEDOCLES, man, like all other things in
the universe, is composed of the elements of the universe:
earth, air, fire, and water. All things in the universe are
alive and have the power of thought Man differs from all
else in that he has more of this power.

The Atomiste taught that man was the result of a min-
gling of atoms just as was a tree, a star, or anything else.
The human individual has an abundance of "soul atoms"
which he breathes in and out throughout life. When this
process ceases, he dies and the soul atoms are scattered.

All the Greek thinkers before the time of the Sophists
thought of man as a part of the universe, composed of the
same elements as everything else in the universe, and sub-
ject to the same laws of the universe. In man some of the
elements were a little more refined than those in other
bodies, but that was all the difference. Man, for them, was
a product of the universe, and had to meet the require-
ments of the universe or be destroyed.

The Sophists took the opposite position as regards man.
They thought of man as the center of the universe. "Man,"
said PROTAGORAS, the most noted of the Sophists, "is the
measure of all things." Protagoras, along with the other
Sophists, turned from the study of nature to the study of
man and his relationships. For them, man was no longer
tied to the universe and subject to its inevitable laws.
Rather, he was thought of as free, as able to determine his
own fate, to mould the universe, or at least that part which
was of most importance to him, in such a way that his de-
sires would be satisfied. The Sophists tore man loose from
natural law and attempted to make him the master of his
fate.

Thus the Sophists opened up the problem of man's place
in nature. They became skeptical of man's power to under-
stand this universe and concentrated upon a study of man
himself and man's relationship to other men.

56 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

The Positions of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle

SOCRATES agreed with the Sophists in turning his
thoughts away from problems of the universe. "He set his
face against all discussions of such high matters as the na-
ture of the universe; how the 'cosmos/ as the savants phrase
it, came into being; or by what forces tie celestial phe-
nomena arise. To trouble one's brain about such matters
was, he argued, to play the fool.* His interest was in man
and man's problems. To know what is rigiht and to live by
the right is more important than to know how the universe
came into being. Man, for Socrates, is the center, the pivot,
of all that is worth thinking about.

PLATO felt that the Sophists had gone to the extreme in
making man the center of the universe. He saw value in
this point of view, but he realized that it was not com-
plete. He also recognized that the tibinkers of early Greece
had something to contribute. Therefore, he attempted to
find a solution to the problem of man's place in the uni-
verse which would satisfy the best in the thought of both
the early Greeks and the Sophists.

Man, Plato taught, is truly the measure of all things, be-
cause there lie in him certain universal principles, notions,
concepts, or ideas which are basic to all knowing. These
ideas correspond to reality, the real world. Man, in his
thinking, is able to grasp tie true nature of things.

The true universe, as we have seen in the previous chap-
ter, is, for Plato, a universe of changeless, pure, eternal
ideas. Man can rise to a state in which he can contem-
plate, can know these ideas. Man can know the "univer-
sals."

Further, man is, Plato believed, a creation of the uni-
verse. Pure idea is impressed upon matter and the universe
which we experience is created. We experience other in-
dividuals. We also experience ourselves, our bodies. All
these have come into being as ideas have been impressed
upon matter. But man is the only creation which can come
to know these ideas and to understand the process by

MAN'S PLACE IN THE UNIVERSE 57

which things of nature came into being. In this way Plato
emphasizes the unique place of man in the universe. Man
is not like the animals, although his creation took place in
somewhat the same way as theirs. His *souT is part of the
divine reason which has entered the body and which is
capable of knowing the eternally real things of the universe.

When this rational part of man comes into the body, it
is hindered, held down, clouded by the body which is mat-
ter. Its task is to overcome this disadvantage and rise above
the body. The Philosopher, as Plato sees him, does rise
above the body and dwells in a realm of mind in which he
can know that which is real, ideas.

For ARISTOTLE, likewise, man is a creation in the same
way as are all other objects in the universe. In fa' we find
matter and form. But man is to be distinguished from all
other objects in nature by the fact that he possesses reason.
Like all lower forms of life, plants for example, man has
vital functions. Also, like all animals, he has the power to
imagine, remember, to experience desire, pain, pleasure,
and the like. But unlike either plants or animals, man has
the power to think. His reason is creative. This is the spark
of the divine in man.

Thus, although the Sophists and both Pkto and Aristotle
were primarily interested in man, each had to think of man
as living in an environment. The Sophists concentrated
upon man's, social environment and the problems involved.
Plato and Aristotle saw man not only as a member of this
environment, but also as an individual in a universe. In the
case of both philosophers, man is thought of as the highest
creation, a being who in some way partakes of that which
is divine in the universe. Although man is of nature, a crea-
ture in which is to be found matter, he is also of the divine,
able to approach the divine because he is of the same na-
ture as the divine. Man has within him that which rises
above matter and approaches that which is most ideal in
the universe. Thus, man is not lost in the jumble of sense-
less matter, but can overcome matter and reach out to-
ward the divine.

58 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

The Views of the Later Greek Thinkers

To the Stoic, man is a part of the universal order. In-
deed, in man is to be found the entire universe in minia-
ture. His nature is the same as that of the All. Thus, in man
as in the universe, reason should rule and he should subor-
dinate himself to the law of the universe. Each man has a
prescribed place in the divine order. He should discover
this place and fit himself into it. Thus, man should live ac-
cording to nature, as the divine reason directs.

It is evident that the Stoic philosophy subordinates man
to that which is the universal ideal. Being a unit in the
whole and subject to its demands, man is happy when he
understands these demands and obeys them gladly.

Man's Importance According to the
Early Christian Thinkers

Although all these Greek philosophers recognized the
fact that man is both matter and spirit, they emphasized
the spirit, and were optimistic in the belief that man could
overcome the disadvantages of matter. Christianity had no
such optimism. For it, matter loomed large and foreboding
and life was a constant struggle to escape its implications.
Indeed, for Christianity, God, or the divine, was so pure
and matter so far from God that pessimism was the only
possible outcome.

Matter, for the Christian thinkers, was the principle of
evil. So long as man was in part matter he was evil and
needed redemption. When the soul became attached to
matter, it fell from divine grace, and the only way back
was through some special act of the divine which would
negate matter and release man from its clutches.

The Apologists taught that the whole world was made
by God for man, to serve as an arena in which man might
win eternal salvation. Further, man was given a dominant
place in the universe. He was the ruler of all He was put
in the world to tend and govern it.

But some men chose to disobey God, and fell into sin.
They turned from God to matter. Through divine grace

PLACE IN THE TO4TVEKSE 59

they may regain their lost divinity and live eternally with
God,

The creative principle of the universe, God, made man
his masterpiece, but made it possible for this masterpiece
to destroy itself. Nevertheless, God is thought of as desir-
ing and striving for man's redemption and as having made
this possible through Jesus Christ.

This point of view was developed by SAINT AXJGUSTINE.
For him God is the cause of everything, the universe and
man. But man is God's highest creation, a union of body
and soul. Man's life on earth is a pilgrimage to God. In-
deed, in comparison to what awaits man after death, this
life is actually not life but death. Here is the typical Chris-
tian contempt for the world and hope for another world
beyond the grave.

Augustine believed that the first man, Adam, set the pat-
tern for all future life of men. Adam, he taught, com-
mitted sin and thus handed on to all men the effects of this
sin. He corrupted the entire human race, so that all men are
condemned to sin for all times. Adam's sin, therefore, is
hereditary. But God can reform corrupted man by his
grace. And God has chosen certain men for salvation and
certain others for eternal punishment. This is the doctrine
known as "predestination."

Thus man, a creation of the all-ruling power of the uni-
verse, created out of nothing, inherits the weaknesses and
sins of the first man. He must pay the price for this sin.
But the all-ruling power can and does select some men for
forgiveness and leaves others to the natural results of
Adam's sin. Man is lost forever unless the Creator of the
universe chooses to save him.

The Views of the Medieval Christian Thinkers
This general idea was carried over into the period of
Christian thought known as Scholasticism, from the ninth
to the thirteenth centuries. The first of the great Scholastics,
or philosophers of this period, was JOHN Scorus ERIGENA.
He taught that man is a revelation of the divine principle
which created the entire universe and is that universe. But

6O BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

man is also a living spirit responsible for his fall away
from God. He is a creation of God, but is able to draw
away from God, to sin.

This attempt to exalt God as the creator of the universe
and yet give to man some dignity reached its fullness in the
great dispute regarding the relationship between "univer-
sals" and individuals. If the universals are all supreme,
then the individual man can count for little in the universe.
He is but a mere incident, unimportant The really impor-
tant things are these universals. Mankind is important, the
particular man is not. God is the most important, and all
else is secondary. Thus, philosophers began to ask, What
part does the individual play in things? Is he a mere pup-
pet on wires pulled here and there by a divine creator? Or
do his actions, his desires, his struggles actually mean
something in the scheme of things?

WILLIAM OF CHAMPEAUX taugjit that the universal is
completely present in every individual so that each in-
dividual differs from another only in accidental properties.

PETER ABELABD held that universals cannot be entities
apart from things but are in some way in things. God is in
his creatures.

This reasoning led, on the part of some philosophers of
this period, to a definite pantheism. They argued that uni-
versals are real and that God is the highest universal. Thus
he is the most real thing in the universe and all else is an
expression of his divine essence. Man, then, is God, and
will eventually return to the totality, the whole, from which
he has come.

This Scholastic movement, with its problems and difficul-
ties, reaches its climax in THOMAS AQTJINAS. This thinker set
himself the task of showing that the universe as a revelation
of God is rational He taught that the universals exist in
particular objects as the essence of things. But matter is the
material in which these universals are implanted. Man,
then, is the universal "mankind" and matter.

God created the universe, including man, out of nothing,
according to Aquinas. Man is both matter and spirit, one

PLACE IN" THE UNIVERSE 6l

person in which are to be found two principles, mind and
body. He is dragged down by matter, the body, and must
seek redemption from his inherited sin.

Throughout this period of human thinking, the so-called
Middle Ages, man is thought of as a creation of the divine,
and, in some way, a being in which is a spark of the divine.
But man is also of the earth. He is material, and through
this material part he inherits the sin of the first man, Adam.
Thus man is debased and must' seek salvation from the
Creator. The universe is both matter and spirit. Man par-
takes of both. Therefore part of the universe is thought of
as pulling man upward toward the divine and another part
is pulling him down.

This fact led to the doctrine of "contempt for the world,"
At the extreme was the belief that everything in this world
was evil and that man should attempt to escape from it.
Life was thought of as a pilgrimage, a testing period, a time
of trial and tribulation. Either by good deeds, prayer and
fasting, or by the grace of God man might escape the conse-
quences of his material part and come eventually into the
realm of pure spirit

Thus, for many thinkers of the period there were actu-
ally two universes, one of matter and the other of the spirit
The material universe was the cause of man's sin, and actu-
ally sought his eternal destruction. It was his enemy. But
the spiritual universe sought his salvation and eternal bless-
edness. This Was the abode of all that is good, the home of
the divine.

In their attempt to conserve the spiritual values of the
universe, Christian philosophers leaned heavily in the direc-
tion of complete contempt for the physical, material uni-
verse. However, some of these men were not willing to go
to this extreme. They saw that such a solution would actu-
ally be no solution at all. It was dimly apparent to them
that some way had to be found to reconcile the physical
and the spiritual in man and in the universe.

During the Middle Ages the Christian Church was the
dominant factor in human thinking and living. Its doctrine
of man's relationship to the Creator and ruling power of

62 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHTT.OSOPHEBS

the universe was supreme. Whatever philosophers thought,
it was not allowed that they seriously question the doctrine
that the Creator was supreme, and that man, one of his
creation, was subordinate to his laws and will.

But the thinking mind of man would not rest contented
with this situation. There were many philosophers who
rebelled against the complete dominance of the Church.
Although they did not state directly that man's dignity
could not he maintained under such restrictions, their think-
ing gradually led them to emphasize the power of the hu-
man. The whole trend of thought known as Nominalism
stressed the belief that man, the individual, was of most
importance, and general ideas, universals, reals, were mere
ideas in man's mind. WILLIAM OF OCCAM, for example,
taught that universals exist only as ideas or thoughts in the
human mind and have no other reality.

As Seen by the Forerunners of the Renaissance

This growing stress upon man and his power and dignity
was symbolic of a trend in human thought. It was the stir-
ling of a giant who had been asleep and during his sleep
had been tied and fettered until he could no longer move,
Slowly the giant broke his bonds, stood up, and proclaimed
his power to the world. Man dared to assert his ability to
control the world, to know its innermost secrets and, by the
power of his intellect, to master its ways and turn them to
his desires. Of such was the Renaissance of the human
spirit. It was an emphasis upon the human in the universe,
and, therefore, has been called "Humanism/*

In the philosophies of Luixmco VIVES, PETRXJS RAMUS,
PABACELSUS, and BERNARDINO TELESIO this belief in man's
power to force the universe to his desiring is evident. These
men were among the pioneers of this rebellion against the
forces which would crush man down, subordinate him to
the universe. Although their ideas were crude, magical,
and full of superstitions in which we cannot believe today,
they were seeking to free man and place in his hands the
tools for his mastery of the universe. What modern scien-
tists have done for us, these men attempted to do for their

PLACE IN THE UNIVERSE 63

age. They attempted to study and control nature with the
knowledge and understanding which they possessed, and
as such were forerunners of modern, science*

As more and more investigations were made into the
nature of the universe, this understanding and control grew.
Copernicus, Galileo, Kepler, and Newton studied the uni-
verse and told their fellows how it worked. Of course the
Church saw what was happening, and strove earnestly to
root out these new forces. But the spirit of man had caught
a faint glimpse of the future and would not be denied en-
trance into this promised land. Never again would man be
satisfied to bow in utter subjection to the powers of the uni-
verse. He would stand erect and demand the right to chal-
lenge the universe and master its secrets. This was indeed a
new day for man and the birth of a new conception of man's
place in the universe.

The Positions of Bacon and Hobbes

The opening guns of this new period, the period of mod-
ern philosophic thought, were fired by those philosophers
who emphasized the necessity for a careful and accurate
study of the universe. FRANCIS BACON "gave conscious ex-
pression to this new scientific spirit.* He would have man
dear his mind of all the old and untrue ideas of the past
and study the universe in an unprejudiced manner. As man
observes and brings the fruits of his observations together,
he will discover likenesses and differences among events
and objects of the universe. In this way he will establish
laws or consistencies among happenings upon which he can
depend in all subsequent action.

Bacon laid great stress upon the value of accurate un-
derstanding of the universe, but he was unwilling to aban-
don completely the religious ideas of the past. He recog-
nized, as it was inevitable that he should, that sometimes
religious ideas and the discoveries of careful observation
were contradictory. But he argued that man must believe
both. "As we are obliged to obey the divine law, though our
wills murmur against it, so we are obliged to believe in the
word of God, though our reason is shocked by it"

64 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

Bacon was on the fence. He saw the necessity of study-
ing the universe and mastering its secrets. But he could not
go over completely to this as a source of knowledge. It was
he, however, who laid the groundwork for man's gradual
swing to science and away from religion.

THOMAS HOBBES was not troubled about this division.
He went over completely to the scientific position and de-
veloped a purely materialistic philosophy. Everything in
the universe, including man, is, for Hobbes, material in mo-
tion. Thus man's task is to understand the laws of motion
and thereby to understand the universe. Having gained this
understanding of the immutable and eternal laws of nature,
man can adjust them to his will.

The Views of Descartes and Spinoza

REN DESCARTES held that everything in nature must be
explained mechanically and that anything spiritual must
be reconciled with this. His theory began with one absolute
substance, God, and two relative substances, mind and mat-
ter. In man we find both mind and matter. Although
these two are united in imn, they do not influence each
other. The body operates by purely mechanical laws while
mind is spiritual.

Man, then, partakes of the two relative substances of
which all else in the universe is made. Man is of the uni-
verse, for Descartes. As part of nature, he is mechanical
to the extreme, he is a machine which operates by natural
laws just as a watch might operate. Mind is distinct from
body and is thus eliminated from nature. But man is com-
posed of both.

For SPINOZA, everything in the universe is actually sub-
stance or God. The two attributes of God, extension and
thought, are found in man. Man is a form of God or the
universal substance or reality. Each individual man is a
mode of extension, or body, and a mode of thought. In-
deed, everything in the universe is both a mode of matter
and a mode of mind. But, while in all objects save man
these two modes are fairly simple, in man they are com-

PLACE IN THE TOUVERSE 65

plex, composed of many parts. Further, in man, mind is
conscious of its own actions, is self-conscious.

But there is no relation between man's mind and his
body. Neither can influence the other. Nevertheless both
mind and body are so constructed that what happens in
one is accompanied by a similar happening in the other.
Thus we seem to be affected by what happens in the
body.

For Spinoza, then, aH the universe is God or substance
in the form of both mind and body. Man is a unit in this
whole. He is both mind and body,

Man's Place as Seen ly Locke, 'Berkeley, and Hume

A somewhat different conception of man's place in the
universe is held by JOHN LOCKE. For him man is a part of
the world, but a part which is sensitive to the world round
about Being sensitive, man has ideas about the world
which come through the sense organs, through experience,
Although man is both mind and body, the mental part is
influenced by the body and the body by the mental. There
is, then, interaction between the two parts which make up
man.

For Locke, besides these two substances of mind and
body, there is another spiritual substance, God, God has
made the universe out of nothing and has arranged it so
that it acts as we find it acting through our experiences.

With Locke, man's reason is established as the ultimate
test of everything in the universe, Locke agrees that an
outer world exists and that God exists and has created the
world. But he attempts to prove all this in such a way
that it will be reasonable, that it will satisfy man's mind.
Human reason, for him, becomes the final test of revela-
tion. Locke's followers sought to carry this line of reason-
ing further and seek the true revelations of God in the laws
of nature. With them, Christianity becomes a rational re-
ligion and loses its mystery.

Thus, the individual man is coming into his own. He is
to be the judge of the universe. His reason is the court of

66 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

last appeal. He must understand before he accepts a thing
as true.

GEORGE BERKELEY carries this idea further by eliminat-
ing the material universe and making man the seat of
everything in the universe. For him there is no universe
outside of mind, either the human mind or the mind of
God. Existence is that which is perceived, and nothing ex-
ists when there is no mind to perceive it. Bodies, the uni-
verse, have no existence outside of mind. Thus the theory
of a substance outside of mind which causes the ideas in
mind must be given up as wholly meaningless. Our sensa-
tions come to us not from material objects but from the
mind of God.

The complete, logical outcome of this position is devel-
oped by DAVID HUME. He makes man, and man alone, the
center and whole of the universe. Since all that we can
know, he argues, is our own ideas, there can be no material
or spiritual substance causing them. The universe, all the
universe tibat we can prove, is our ideas in succession. These
ideas arise from unknown causes, and we are not correct
in supposing them to be caused. We may believe in a cause
of our ideas, or we may believe in the existence of God and
a world outside of us, but we cannot prove either by any
rational method known to man.

Hume had led men to the point where he must distrust
himself. That fervent enthusiasm for mastery of the uni-
verse here had cold water thrown upon it. Man had at-
tempted to understand the universe and thereby control
it. Philosophers had abandoned gradually the idea of rev-
elation and set up the human mind as the source of all
knowledge. They seemed to be making remarkable head-
way when Locke brought them up quick with his insist-
ence that they stop to examine the powers of the human
mind. Berkeley and Hume began where Locke left off and
carried the examination further, to what they believed to
be the logical conclusion of the position taken. Hume left
man standing alone, his universe within his mind, and un-
able to prove by the method long cherished that there was
a universe, a cause of his ideas, or even that he himself

PLACE IN THE UNIVERSE 6/

existed. Does man stand alone, isolated? Is it necessary that
we think of a mere succession of ideas traveling through
space as the end-all? This was the problem which Hume
left to those thinkers who followed hfay

The Views of Leibnitz

While this advance toward isolation was progressing in
England, a somewhat different movement was evident in
Germany. It stemmed from the work of Spinoza and was
developed by the German thinker GOTTFRIED WJT.HET,M
LEIBNITZ. It will be remembered that Spinoza had thought
of everything in the universe, including man, as both ma-
terial and spiritual, and that these were attributes of the
one substance, God. Leibnitz broke substance up into an
infinite number of small bits or monads. His world was
built out of these self-contained units, these building blocks
of the universe.

Man, for Leibnitz, was a construct of monads, but dif-
fered from the inorganic in that he had a central, control-
ling monad or souL God had so arranged the universe that
every monad acted in harmony with every other monad.
Thus, though God was there in the beginning to start the
universe going, he was in no way a part of the universe after
the start. He could withdraw and let the monads unite
and separate according to their nature. Thus, Leibnitz's
universe is wholly mechanical Man, and all nature, is sub-
ject to law, order, uniformity.

Here is a mechanical universe driven onward to creation
and dissolution by inexorable laws which are of the nature
of the universe. Man, as part of this process, is driven
along with all the rest of die universe. Although man is,
in some way, the goal of the divine creative will and is,
therefore, contained in the universe from the beginning, he
is part of the natural whole and subject to its pre-estab-
lished laws.

Although this point of view differed in many respects
from that of Locke and his successors, both streams of
thought led in the direction of a mechanical interpretation
of the universe and of man within it. Descartes had moved

68 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

in this direction. Man, to Mm, was a machine. Leibnitz re^
duced matter to force. Thus, a mechanistic world view
gradually became popular throughout the philosophic
world. As a result, the dominant point of view in many
quarters was to the effect that all nature was governed by
kw and that everything in the universe was a product of
nature. This led, naturally, to great interest in the sciences
and intense study of them. Science seemed to offer great
hope for man.

The Position of Rousseau

It was JEAN JACQUES ROTOSEATJ who shocked the philo-
sophic world and shook its faith in this process. For Rous-
seau, man was not a machine, part of the mechanical uni-
verse. Rather, he was a thing of feeling, sentiment. Science,
culture, Rousseau taught, had bound man in chains which
were destroying all that was really human* Rousseau pro-
posed to cast off this shell of civilization and free man for
the full development of all his capacities. Indeed, Rousseau
believed that science had isolated man from nature and
that man's salvation lay in an escape from the bonds of
science and a return to nature.

Kant; 8 View of Man's Importance

This bold challenging of the trend of the age, this plea
for a return to nature in all its richness and fullness, in-
fluenced perhaps the greatest of all modern philosophers,
IMMANTJEL KANT.

Kant undertook the task of restoring man to his dominant
place in the universe. This necessitated the answering of
questions raised by the philosophers who had preceded
him. It was his task to limit Hume's skepticism on the one
hand, and the old dogmatism on the other, and to refute
and destroy materialism, fatalism, atheism, as well as senti-
mentalism and superstition." It was no small undertaking,
and one that waited for the coming of a mind of the great-
ness of Kant's.

Man, Kant taught, is part of the universe of objects and

PLACE IN THE TJNIVEBSE 69

things. But actually, although he can be certain of the ex-
istence of this world apart from himself, he cannot know it.
All that he can know is that world which his mind, because
of its nature, constructs from the sensations received by
contact with this outer universe. Here he is in agreement
with the essential positions of Locke, Berkeley, and Hume.
Knowledge is confined to ideas.

But this is not alL Man is able to reason and, on the basis
of this, he can form ideas of the outer world, of God, free-
dom, and immortality* Thus man, by virtue of reason, can
act as though there is an outer world, as though this world
and himself were created by a Creator, as though he is free
and possessor of a soul which cannot perish.

Thus, while Kant acknowledges that from the point of
view of knowledge, man is caught in the clutches of his
own ideas, this is only part of the picture. The other side
is that there are factors within man which justify his as-
suming the existence of all for which Rousseau was fight-
ing and more. Herein the dignity of man in the universe is
restored. Kant believed that he had solved the problems
left by his predecessors and that he had solved them well.
He believed that man could again stand up and face the
universe, confident in his power to understand it and con-
trol it to his destiny. He was certain that he had restored to
man the dignity which the skepticism of Hume had virtu-
ally destroyed.

Kant gave to the philosophic world the due to all that
seemed of value to men. He had suggested with strong and
appealing arguments that there is a higher kind of truth
than that offered by human intelligence, the moral law
within us which guarantees the world of values. This clue
fascinated Kant's immediate followers. Consequently, they
set about to develop it to the fullest and, by so doing, to
give man assurance of his power and dignity in the uni-
verse.

Fichte, ScheUing, Schletermacher, and Hegel

JOHANN GOTTLIEB FICHTE made the principle of freedom
central to his whole philospphy. Man, for him, is funda-

70 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

mentally a free agent, not a mere link in a predetexmined
cham of material events. Self-determining activity is the
supreme characteristic of man* Fichte sought to prove this
thesis by a method similar to that of Kant* He argued that,
although theoretical reason cannot prove the primacy of
freedom, we must accept such a principle as ultimate be-
cause only by so doing can we satisfy the demands of our
moral nature, give to life value and meaning.

Further, the fundamental principle of the universe for
Fichte is a universal, free, self-deterinining activity. This
he called the Absolute ego. It is a reality above all in-
dividual beings, a universal active reason which is, like-
wise, in every individual. Man, then, is part of the uni-
versal ego. He partakes of the nature of the universe. He is
dominated by this universal life process.

This ego, this universal activity, expresses itself in man
and in nature. The tree, the table, the beast, and man are
ell expressions of this fundamental principle. Man is the
highest expression of the creative ego which is the universe.

In making this free, creative principle, this spirit or mind,
the fundamental factor of the universe, and in thereby de-
livering man from the deadly mechanism into the clutches
of which earlier philosophers had tended to condemn him,
both Kant and Fichte were answering a deep-seated desire
of mankind to find in the nature of the universe Justification!
for its deepest yearnings and highest hopes* FRJEDBICH
WTT.HET.M JOSEPH SCHELUNG was fascinated by the possi-
bilities of this theory. Being of a poetic and artistic temper^
ament, he carried Fichte's conception further and taught
that the universe was a work of art created by the great
artist of the universe. The universe, including man, is, for
Schelling, a living, evolving system, an organism in which
each part has its place, just as each color of a work of art
fits into the whole to make a masterpiece.

Naturally this point of view fitted into the thought and
temperament of the poets, artists, and creative geniuses of
the period. Lessing, Herder, and Goethe, only to mention a
few, felt that here was philosophic expression of that which
was deepest in their natures. Here was the artist's universe,

MAN^S PLACE IN THE UGNIVEBSE 71

and in it was a place where the artist would feel at home
and contented.

FRIEDRICH EBNST DANIEL SCHLEIEHMACHER identified
God with the universal creative principle of the universe,
the source of all life. God is in the world, but is more than
the world. Men, individual egos, are self -determining prin-
ciples, each with his own specific talent and nook in the
scheme of things. Each individual is necessary to the
whole. If the universe is to realize itself to the fullest, is to
create to the limit of its ability, each unit, each ego, must
create to its limit. Man is necessary to the complete self-
realization of the universe.

The whole Idealistic movement in philosophy, of which
both Fichte and Schelling are representatives, interpreted
the universe from the point of view of man. GEORG Wn>
HELM FRIEDBICH HEGEL employed the same method. A
study of man reveals certain facts and factors. As man, so
the universe of which man is a part. So reasoned the
Idealists.

In man, Hegel found certain logical processes operating.
He recognized that the human mind naturally moves from
the statement of a fact to a statement of its opposite. For
example, war is evil. But, it is evident that good can and
has come of war. Thus, war must also be good. Having
recognized both these contradictory facts, the human mind
moves on to discover some basis for reconciling them. Hegel
believed that this was the way in which all thinking takes
place. First, we propose a thesis: war is evil Then, we pro-
pose the antithesis: war is good. The final proposition is the
synthesis: despite the evils that come from war, there are
certain values which men realize in war.

As with the human mind, so with the universal mind,
reasoned HegeL The universe is like man and the processes
in the universe are the same processes, on a larger scale of
course, which we find in the mind of man. Reality is, for
Hegel, a logical process of evolution. It, too, has its thesis,
antithesis, and eventual synthesis. Man is the pattern of
which the universe is the complete realization. Man is the
universe in miniature. Man is a microcosm of the great

72 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GKEAT PHILOSOPHERS

macrocosm; that is, man is a little universe which is a
miniature of the whole universe.

For Hegel, then, it makes no difference where we begin
in our studies, the result will be the same. If we begin with
man and move out to nature, we find like processes at
work. If we study the universe first, and move to man, we
shall find an equal similarity.

In the approach of the Idealists we recognize the hand of
the Sophists, Socrates, and Plato at least* The interest of
these Greek thinkers, as we have seen, was primarily in
man. They were not interested in the universe except as it
affected man and his relations with his fellows. They began
with a study of man. But inevitably they arrived at a theory
of the universe. However, in each case, the universe was
interpreted in terms of man. Take Plato, for example. He
found that the highest in man was idea. He saw man at-
tempting to mould the world to fit bis ideas just as the
artist moulds day to give concreteness to an idea. From
this he reasoned that the supreme thing in the universe was
idea, pure and untouched by matter. But, as man used
ideas to mould matter, so the divine creative principle of
the universe used ideas to mould the universe.

So, down the ages has come this approach to the uni-
verse, the approach through man and his nature. As man,
so the universe, they reasoned.

The Views of Later German Thinkers

But there has been another, likewise powerful, tradition
in philosophy. The leaders of this tradition, as we have
seen, study first the universe, the material universe. Having
discovered its laws and nature, they place man in the chain
of inevitable causes and effects. If the universe is a machine
governed by unchangeable laws, so is man a machine.

JOHANN FRIEDRICH HERBART is representative of this lat-
ter approach, as indicated in our first chapter. Both nature
and man, he taught, are constituted by the coining and go-
ing, the mingling and separating of units which he called
"reals." The universe of reals is absolute. In it there is no
change, growth, decay. The only change lies in our own

MAN'S PI-ACE IN THE UNIVERSE 73

habit of relating reals in such a way as to form objects or
patterns.

You have undoubtedly seen drawings which, if looked
at steadily for a while, seem to change before your very
eyes. Actually we know that the drawing does not change,
but our eyes relate parts of it in different ways so that the
picture seems to change. So, Herbart thought, must we
think of the universe and our experiencing of it It never
changes, but we relate the various reals in such diverse
ways that the universe seems to change.

Man, likewise, is a result of the organization of reals.
His mental life is a fusion, organization of ideas which re-
sult from the interaction of reals. And, Herbart believed, all
this can be stated in purely mechanical terms. For him,
psychology was nothing other than the mechanics of the
mind. As Herbart saw the universe operating in terms of
dependable laws, he reasoned that man, in all his actions,
can be explained in the same terms. Everything in mind
follows fixed kws. Man is part of the natural universe, is
governed by the same kws, and can be understood and
controlled if we know the laws.

ARTHUR SCHOPENHAUER thought in the Idealistic tradi-
tion. He interpreted the world, the universe, in terms of the
human individual. In man he found the will supreme. Man
wishes, wills to do, make, or have something. This will
drives him into action and may result in a changed en-
vironment As with man, so the universe. Will is the funda-
mental principle of the creative universe. All nature is an
expression of will. In the stone, wifl is blind; in man, it is
conscious of itself.

Man, then, is a pattern of the universe, a pattern in
miniature. Man is the universe greatly reduced.

RUDOLF HERMANN LOTZE is in this same tradition. The
universe, for him, must be understood in terms of the hu-
man mind since the mind is the only true reality we can
know. Mental life is present throughout nature, even to
rocks and dirt. The human mind is the highest stage, that
upon which mind becomes self-conscious. Man is the truest

74 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

representation of the universe, the highest creation of the
great creative mind which is the universe.

Man as the model of the universe is exploited by FRIED-
RICH NIETZSCHE. In man he finds the will to power, and be-
lieves that this is dominant. Therefore, he reasons that this
will to power is the fundamental factor in the universe.
But, this universal will to power takes on, for Nietzsche, a
sinister appearance. The universe cares nothing for man, his
dreams and hopes.

Since the will of man drives hfm on regardless of the
consequences to others, so the will of the universe drives on
despite its consequences to us. It crushes man in the storm
and destroys hfrn in the flood. It cares not for his existence
and knows nothing of his plans or struggles. The universe
is not friendly to man. Life is terrible. There is no way out.
We struggle to realize our wills only to be crashed in the
end, to be devoured by death*

The optimism of the Idealists has been turned against
them by Nietzsche. They believed that the universe should
be interpreted in terms of man if his values were to be
preserved. Thus, as mind was the essence of man for them,
they reasoned that the essence of the universe was mind,
and that such a mind would be friendly to man's values.
Nietzsche uses the same method, but finds the essence of
man to be a will to power. When he translates this into
universal terms, when he makes the will to power the es-
sence of the universe, he reaches the pessimistic conclusion
that the universe cares nothing for man and his values.

Man's Place According to Comte

A most radical attempt to interpret the universe in terms
of man is to be found in the movement of philosophic en-
deavor known as "Positivism.* The early leader of this
movement was AUGUSTE COMTE. He took the position that
the only source of knowledge was observation and experi-
ence. From this we get only uniform relations between
phenomena. As far as inner essences are concerned, we can
know nothing.

Consequently, we cannot know the inner essence of the

MAN'S PLACE IN THE "UNIVERSE 75

universe or of man. As man looks at the universe, he finds it
operating in certain ways. This is aH he knows, and all that
he needs to know. Thus, the universe and man's place in it
are interpreted in terms of what man can see and experi-
ence.

Man finds people getting in draughts, catching cold, and
suffering. In so far draughts are enemies of man. But he
also finds that by regulating draughts he can keep a fire
burning with which he can heat his house or cook his food.
In so far draughts are friendly to rngn. All that man needs
to know, and indeed all that he can know are these rela-
tionships. Whether there is a basic unity behind these phe-
nomena, man can never know and, in fact, he does not
need to know since the fact would not change his life one
bit. He would still stay out of certain draughts and use
others to regulate his fire.

Man, for Comte, is in the universe, is affected by its parts
In various ways and is able to affect the universe in many
other ways. As man finds regularities in the relationships
between parts of the universe and between himself and
these parts, he is able to foresee consequences of his actions
and happenings among the parts, and to govern his actions,
to a degree at least, in the light of these relationships.

The "Positions of Mitt and Spencer

JOHN STUART MILL contributed to this position by show-
ing how men may discover regularities within the universe.
His logical method of induction was a guide to assurance.
We see many events in which there are similarities. We
study these and discover consistencies. Experience is evi-
dence that we can depend upon these consistencies. There-
fore, we take the position that a certain situation will be
followed by a certain phenomenon. We can act on this,
Mill believed, with a high degree of assurance that we will
not be wrong.

As Mill found order, uniformity, inevitable sequence in
the world which we experience, he reasoned that these
same factors are to be found within man, since man is
part of the universe. But, in man we find that the factors

76 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

which must be taken into consideration are so numerous
that it is impossible for us to predict with any bigh degree
of certainty. Man is a very complex being. Every action of
man is the result of a vast number of factors. Thus, al-
though the same fundamental principles apply both in the
universe and in man, recognition of them is easier in the
universe since here the factors are simpler.

For example, it is possible for an astronomer, on the
basis of observation and experience, to predict with abso-
lute accuracy the appearance of a comet many hundreds of
years from now. But, to predict whether a newborn baby
will be a doctor, lawyer, beggar, or thief, is practically im-
possible. In the one case the factors involved are fairly
simple, in the other they are highly complex. But, and this
is the significant thing for our present study, Mill believed
that, should it be possible for one to know all the factors and
their proper weight, man would find equal certainty, uni-
formity, and inevitableness in both cases. Indeed, in his
treatment of social and political problems, he attempted to
show that certain uniformities do exist and can be experi-
enced.

Although HERBERT SPENCER took the position that man
can know only his experiences, he was certain that these ex-
periences must have a cause, that there must be a universe
outside of our experiences to cause us to experience as we
do. Although he called this the Unknowable,'* he inter-
preted it in terms of what he found in man.

Since, he reasoned, man has the subjective feeling of ac-
tivity, muscular strain, force, the Unknowable is of the
same nature. It is activity, force. Thus the fundamental
principle of the universe is also the fundamental principle
of man. Man is of the universe.

As this force is creative and active according to definite
laws of development, so we find man a result of this crea-
tive development. Man is a result of the evolutionary proc-
esses which are to be found in the universe. And, further,
as man develops, he follows these evolutionary processes.
The law of evolution, then, is the universal law of things.
It is the law of the development of the universe, the law

MAN'S PI-ACE IN THE tJNIVERSE 77

which accounts for the coming of man, and the law which
is in man and by which he develops*

Just as, Spencer reasoned, all things in the universe are
results of the adaptation of the unit to the environment, so
all that is in man is a result of a similar adaptation. Con-
sciousness, for example, has resulted from the necessity to
adapt to the environment Man is what he is because his
universe, his environment, makes certain consistent and
definite demands upon him* Thus, the law which is funda-
mental to the universe is also fundamental to man. Man is
part, a stage, of the on-going process which is evolution.

The Views of James, Dewey, and Russell

The Positivistic point of view, as developed by Comte, is
evident in the thought of WmrjAM JAMES. He, too, places
man at the center of the universe. For him, whatever is
experienced is real. For him, reality is pure experience.
Therefore, on the basis of our experience we construct a
theory of the universe. But this theory is determined by
what we experience. It is egocentric; that is, centered in
man's ego.

For James, whatever satisfies man is true; and what-
ever does not satisfy him is false. Man finds certain con-
sistencies in his experience. These, he reasons, are true of
the universe. We act upon them, and the results which we
anticipate follow. They are true. The universe, then, is the
universe of -human experience. We interpret it in terms of
our experience, and all the ideas we have of it result from
our experience.

Likewise, JOHN DEWEY thinks of man as the measure of
the universe. The universe is that which man experiences.
To try to go beyond this to absolute origins and finalities is
foolishness. Man cannot get beyond his experiences.

Reality, in the thinking of Dewey, is growing, changing,
developing according to kws which are the laws of human
experience. Man is part of this process. Man is in the uni-
verse, a creation of the evolutionary process which we find
everywhere. In him the universe comes to self-conscious-
ness.

78 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

As in man we find uncertainty, doubt, and a degree of
certainty, so in the universe. Man's experience is the meas-
ure of the universe, the only possible measure which we
can have, for no man can get outside of his experience.

BERTBANB RUSSELL expresses the same general position
in his little book, A "Free Man's Worship. However, his
conclusion, though similar in consequences to that of Nietz-
sche, is not arrived at by the same method. Russell sees the
universe as a great mathematical machine. It is governed
by scientific laws which are inexorable, unchanging. Man
is part of this system, a very small and insignificant part

Thus, for Russell, man is caught in the enrolling of die
great universal machine. Its laws are inevitable, and its
nulls grind on regardless of what is thrown into the hopper.
Man rises for a moment, thinks that he amounts to some-
thing, but his time of exaltation is short After a brief life,
he drops out of the scheme of things, and the universe
moves on uncaring and unknowing. In the eternity of a
machine universe, one individual with his values amounts
to nothing.

Mankind, says Russell, is like a group of shipwrecked
sailors on a raft in a vast sea at night There is darkness all
around. One by one they fall off the raft into the waters
and disappear. When the last man has fallen off, the sea
will roll on and the holes made in the water by their bodies
will be covered over. Nature cares not for man.

Thus, throughout the history of human thought man has
endeavored to understand the universe as related to him-
self. Some philosophers have arisen to tell hi that the uni-
verse is like h and is his friend; that in the universe are
forces which are concerned with his welfare. Indeed, the
philosophic God is very often a being whose concern is
for man. But there are those other philosophers who find
the universe, and man included, a vast system of laws and
consistencies in which human values have little or no place.
Man lives his little day and is forgotten.

At the extremes we have both the religious and the
scientific positions. Religious philosophies have attempted
fairly consistently to construct a universe that is friendly

PLACE IN THE UNIVERSE 79

to man and his values. They recognize the factors which
seem to belie this position: death, sin, suffering, hopes un-
realized. But they strive to fit these into a whole so that
they lose their sting. God and heaven are often offered as
the final solution of the problem.

Scientific philosophies, on the other hand, take the uni-
verse as they find it in the laboratory or under strict
scientific investigation. They find only laws and inevitable
consistencies, a great machine rolling on, a machine that
can be depended upon to act in certain ways but which
is unconcerned with human values.

And there are those philosophers who try to reconcile
both extremes. The Pragmatists are of this group, as are
many others. But it too often happens that the mediator
simply brings the two extremes together in an inconsistent
mixture.

Still the question haunts philosophy: Is the universe
man's friend or man's enemy?

Chapter III
WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL?

HERACLTTUS DEMOOEUTUS SOCRATES PLATO

ARISTOTLE AQUINAS ABELARD
HOBBES SPINOZA LOCKE LEEBNTTZ

KANT FICHTE SCHOPENHAUER
MILL BENTHAM SPENCER DEWEY

What is the measure of good and evil in the world?
How can we know whether or not an act is good or
bad? Is there in the very nature of the universe a code
of laws which determines good and bad? Or, is good-
ness and badness a matter of the relation of an act to
other acts?

Open the book of the story of mankind anywhere and
you will find the question being asked over and over again:
What is good and what is evil? This has been, without
doubt, one of the most persistent problems of philosophers
throughout the ages. Answers have been given in abun-
dance, answers which appeared to the particular philoso-
pher giving the particular answer to solve the problem
for all times, but in a very few years the problem bas arisen
again in the thinking of others.

Is there an absolute, ultimate, and unquestioned measure
of good and evil, one that was established at the beginning
of time and that will stand until time is no more? A great
number of people have believed in such a measure, and
there have been thinkers who have attempted to state it in

WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL? 8l

a code of commandments or basic principles of conduct
for all times. The Ten Commandments of the ancient He-
brews is an example of this trend in human thinking. Here
is a code of conduct which is believed by many to have
been handed down from the seat of divine authority and
which has authority at all times and in all places.

At the other extreme are thinkers who have believed that
both good and evil are relative to the conditions of the
time and place, and that an act which is good in one place
and time will be evil in another. For example, a maniac is
chasing a man with intent to loll him. The man passes me
and turns to the right and disappears. Then the maniac
comes up and asks which way his intended victim went.
I say that he turned left, and thereby save the life of an
innocent man. This untruth is good, they argue in an at-
tempt to prove that truth is not always good.

Between these two extremes are many theories of good
and evil. Philosophers desiring to prove the absolute good-
ness of God have difficulty at times explaining the exist-
ence in the universe of death, suffering, and ill will. How
can an all-good God create a world in which there are these
apparent evils, they ask? And they have offered many in-
genious arguments to reconcile a good God and an evil
world.

And so, throughout the history of man's thought we dis-
cover the problem of good and evil (which we speak of as
"ethics** or "the ethical problem**) persistently challenging
each philosopher.

Good and Evil According to the Early Greek Philosophers

HERACLITUS, the Greek philosopher of change, believed
that good and evil were two notes in a harmony. He found
many things changing into their opposites. Ice, which is
hard, changes into water, which is soft This led him to be-
lieve that the combination of opposites resulted in a whole
in which there is harmony. Just as in music harmony re-
sults from the combination of low and high notes, so in the
universe harmony results from the combination of oppo-
sites, good and evil.

82 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

We, he taught, see only the opposites, the good and the
evil. But God sees the harmony, so that for him all things
are fair and just in that they are parts of a great universal
harmony. Thus, the good life for man is that life lived in
harmony with the universal reason, the law which per-
vades all things. Man should seek to understand this har-
mony in the universe and to fit into it so that his actions
are in accord with the principle governing the whole uni-
verse.

The early Greek philosophers, interested primarily as we
have seen in the problem of the nature of the universe,
taught that there were all-pervasive laws controlling the
entire universe. Therefore, goodness for them was to be
found in harmony with these laws. Further, they were so
enchanted by this idea of law that even evil did not bother
them much. Evil, for them, was but a phase, a note in the
universal harmony and, thus, was not really evil but was
another kind of good, a necessary part of the good whole.

As philosophers turned from their interest in the universe
to a new interest in man, they began to ask most seriously
the question: What kind of a life is good for man to live?
How can one so regulate his life among his fellows that it
is good?

DEMOCRTTUS, the leading figure of the Greek Atomists,
taught that the goal of life is happiness. At all times man
should seek happiness. For him, happiness was an inner
condition or state of tranquillity which depended upon
harmony of the soul. He taught that one should not de-
pend for happiness upon things of the world since these
come and go and a lack of them causes unhappiness.
Rather, happiness should be a state of the inner man, a
balance of life, an attitude which combines reflection and
reason.

Goodness, for him, was not only a matter of action, but
depended upon man's inner desire. The good man is not
one who does good, but one who wants to do good at all
times. "You can tell the man who rings true from the man
who rings false," he said, "not by his deeds alone, but
also by his desires." Such goodness brings happiness, the
goal of Me.

"WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL? 83

\Vitb the coming of the Sophists thinking on this problem
of good and evil entered a period of confusion. If, as Protag-
oras held, "Man is the measure of all things," then man is
the measure of good and evil. And, by man, the Sophists
meant the individual man, you, me, your neighbor. Each
one has the right to determine for himself what is good and
what is evil. The end of this practice is, of course, chaos.
What I consider evil, you may consider good. The Sophists
let the matter rest here.

As a result, each man had his own code of good and bad.
He defied others to prove hi-m wrong or to justify their
condemnation of him. Many representative Sophists, such
as EUTHYDEMUS, THRASYMACHUS, and CAULICLES, taught
that morality was mere convention, habit. That actually
there are no moral laws, no all-inclusive principles of right
and wrong. These men sought to justify the principle that
each man should live as he desired, get what he wanted by
any means possible, and frame his own code of good and
evil.

The result of this position was moral anarchy, pure indi-
vidualism, and the ultimate in selfishness. Nevertheless, a
closer study of this position reveals a tendency which is rich
in possibilities. The Sophists were making their appeal to
the independent human mind. They were rebelling against
arbitrary authority in matters of morals and were arguing
that the human mind must think for itself and in thinking
discover a code of rigjit and wrong. The Sophists were
champions of the individual and his independence. True,
they went to the extreme and lost the forest by concentra-
ting attention upon the trees. Nevertheless, they had hold of
a thing which is very precious to modern man, freedom
to think and to arrive at conclusions about the good and the
evil. The Sophists challenged moral theory to justify itself
before the bar of human reason.

The Ethical Views of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle

SOCRATES was stimulated by the Sophists but was un-
willing to go all the way with them. He, too, was most in-
terested in the problems related to living a good life. Thus a

84 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

great deal of his teaching dealt with the meaning of right
and wrong.

It was Socrates' firm belief that there must be a basic
principle of right and wrong, a measure which would apply
far beyond the beliefs of any one individual. Thus, he asked
time and again: What is the good? What is the highest
good by which all else in the universe is measured? And
his answer was that knowledge is the highest good.

If one knows what is right, he argued, he will do it "No
man,** he said, "is voluntarily bad." When one knows that
a thing is good he will choose to do that thing. Therefore
the most important endeavor of man is to discover what is
good. Socrates spent his life trying to help men discover
what is good. Thus, for him, a life which is always in-
quiring and trying to discover what is good is the best kind
of life, the only life worth living.

PLATO took up the problem of good and evil where Soc-
rates left it. For him, goodness is tied up with his theory of
the nature of the universe. The world of sense, he taught,
is unreal, fleeting, changing. This is evil. The real world of
pure, unchanging ideas is the world of good. Man can
know this real world only through his reason. Therefore>
reason is the highest good for man. The end or goal of life
is release of the soul from the body so that it can con-
template the true world of ideas.

But man may live a just life even though he is held
down by the body and remains in a world of changing
shadows of real things. This can be done, Plato believed, so
long as the rational part of man rules his every action. Plato
thought of man as consisting of three parts. The appetites
are concerned with bodily functions and desires. The will,
or spiritual part of man, is concerned with action, courage,
bravery. And the reason is concerned with the highest and
best in man. A man is living a good life when reason rules
the will and the appetites, and when, as a result, he is wise,
brave, and temperate.

Thus, a life of reason is the highest good for man, a life
noted for wisdom, courage, and self-control. And, Plato
taught, this kind of life will be the happy life. Happiness

WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL? 85

and goodness go together. However, one should not seek
pleasure as the end of life. Pleasure comes when one has
attained the good life, a life in which the highest, reason,
rules the lower, wifl and appetites.

AHISTOTLB pointed out that every action of man has
some end in view and that these ends seem to he an endless
chain. One acts in order to get something, but this some-
thing is obtained in order to get something else, and so on.
What, he asked, is the highest good, the good for which
all else is done? He reached an answer to this question by
pointing out that the aim of everything in the universe
is to realize itself to the fullest. Each thing is different from
all others. It has certain talents, abilities. Thus, it is good
when it has realized these talents and abilities to the full-
est. Thus, self-realization is for Aristotle the highest good,
the goal of all else that is done.

Now, the distinguishing feature of man is his reason. No
other entity in the universe possesses reason. Man alone has
this characteristic, ability. Therefore, the highest good of
man is the complete realization of his reason. This, Aristotle
believed, brings happiness. Pleasure accompanies the full
realization of man's reason; it is a natural result of such
realization.

But, as Plato also taught, reason is only a part of man.
He also has feelings, desires, appetites. Therefore, a good
life is one in which all these factors are realized in perfect
harmony, in which reason rules and the feelings and desires
obey. The goal of human life is a rational attitude toward
the feelings and desires.

What is this rational attitude? Aristotle taught that it
consisted of the "golden mean." For example, courage is to
be thought of as a mean between cowardice and f oolhardi-
ness. The good man is one who lives a life according to
this golden mean, who does not go to extremes in action
but balances one extreme over against another.

Thus, the good life for Aristotle is one in which man re-
alizes to the fullest the supreme part of his nature, reason.
Such a man will be noble, just, honest, considerate, and
will give evidence of all the other virtues of life. And he

88 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHDLOSOPHEES

wise, the spiritual part of man, his mind or soul, is the seat
of good; and his body, which is thought of as matter, is
the seat of evil. Consequently, when the soul is incor-
porated in the body it suffers a fall from divine perfection
and becomes predisposed to evil. Thus, the goal of man is
freedom from the body and all its sin, and return to God
and perfect goodness. The position of PLOTINUS was very
similar. Matter is the source of evil and God the source of
good.

The Ethical Views of the Early Christian Thinkers

Thus a definite dualism is to be seen throughout the
Western religious tradition, a dualism borrowed in sub-
stance from the religions of the early East. Christianity
accepted this dualism and made it basic to its treatment of
the whole problem of sin and redemption.

The Apologists taught that God had created man good,
but he turned from God to the flesh, the body. By this,
sin came into the world. The Christian interpretation of the
story of Adam, the first man, is a picture in symbolic terms
of the coining of sin, a sin which was then transmitted to
all men as original sin. Because man is man, a descendant
of the first man, he is harassed by evil and must seek sal-
vation through the divine grace of God.

SAINT AUGUSTINE found that the presence of evil in the
universe gave him no end of trouble, God, for him, was all
good, all perfection. And God created the universe out of
nothing. If this be true, how could a good God, all power-
ful, create a universe in which there was evil? How account
for evil in a world created by an all-good God?

To solve this problem,- Augustine taught that everything
in the universe is good. Even that which appears to be
evil to us is actually good in that it fits into the whole
pattern of the universe. Shadows, dark spots, are necessary
to the beauty of a painting. If seen by themselves, broken
away from the whole picture, they appear bad. But when
seen in the picture they make possible the beauty of the
whole.

Evil, then, is relative for Augustine, and is actually an

WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL? 89

absence of good just as darkness is absence of light The
evil which we find in the universe is put there by God to
make the whole universe good.

Further, for Augustine, the goal o all mankind is com-
plete union with God and escape from the world. Man
should turn his back on the pleasures of tfn's world which
are thin and pale, and direct his attention wholly to God
who is perfect goodness. This union with God is to be at-
tained through love of God as opposed to love of the world.

The Views of the Medieval Christian Thinkers

The position of Augustine is also held very largely by the
philosophers of Scholasticism. Believing in an all-good God
who created everything, they had to explain apparent evil
as actually a part of the good whole and thus actually good.

ABELARD added a new note when he taught that the
Tightness or wrongness of an act does not lie in the act it-
self but in the intention of the actor. If one steals from an-
other, the act itself is neutral. If the thief intended it as
something good, it was thereby good. "God," he wrote,
"considers not what is done, but in what spirit it is done;
and the merit or praise of the agent lies not in the deed, but
in the intention."

If one acts in terms of what he thinks is right, if he be-
lieves he is doing good and seeks to do good, he may err,
but he does not siru Goodness, morality, then becomes a
matter of conscience. The truly sinful man is one who acts
with a desire to do wrong. He is sinful because he shows in
his action a deliberate contempt for God.

The greatest of the Scholastics was THOMAS AQUINAS. In
his theory of good and evil we find the philosophy of Aris-
totle joined with the basic principles of Christianity. God
made everything, including man, for a purpose, and the
highest good of all things is the realization of this purpose.
As one realizes the purpose for which he was created, he
reveals God's goodness. Therefore, the highest good is the
realization of oneself as God has ordained.

Further, the highest form of action is the contemplation
of God. This may be done through reason or faith, but it

go BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHEBS

reaches its height in what Aquinas called "intuition," a
coining to God which can be completed only in the world
to come, in heaven.

Aquinas follows Augustine, also, in holding that the
goodness or badness of a particular action depends upon
the ft* or purpose of the actor. An act may have good
consequences, but it is not good unless the actor intended
it to have these consequences and knew that they would
result. However, Aquinas does not hold with Augustine
that an evil act may be good if the actor intended it to be
so. Intention will not make a bad act good, but it is the
only thing that will make a good act truly good.

The Christian doctrine of "contempt for the world" is
prominent in Aquinasf teaching. The best way to attain
goodness is to abandon worldly goods and seek the life of
God. Thus, the life of the saint in a monastery devoting
himself entirely to service to God is ideal.

Evil, for Aquinas, is privation, a lack of the good. All
things, created by a good God, aim at goodness. When they
fail, evil results.

Hie mystic teachings of MEKTER ECKHABT emphasize
the unity of God and the individuality of man. Since God
is the pure unity of the world, the universe, any individu-
ality must be a breaking away from God and therefore evil.
Consequently, the good life is one which strives to return to
the divine unity and become one with God. "Whoever
would see God," he writes, "must be dead to himself and
buried in God, in the unrevealed desert Godhead, to be-
come again what he was before he was.*

The good life for Eckhart, then, is not one of deeds but
one of being. We do not attain goodness by striving to do
good. We reach that which is perfect goodness by losing
ourselves in the unity of God.

Christianity, and the whole Western religious movement,
emphasized the great gulf between God and all that is less
than God. Goodness is created by God and is to be found
in adjustment to God's plan or purpose. Evil is in some
way attached to matter, the body, or the world. But God,
being the sole Creator of the universe, would not create

WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL? Ql

evil. Therefore, evil must not actually be evil, but must be
part of the great good. Not all the Christian philosophers
held to this explanation consistently. They were confronted
with the fact of human degradation, actions which were
evil in intention or in consequences, by deliberate acts on
the part of many which caused evil. Consequently, they
had to tie this up with the body, the sinful will of man
which was in some way inherited from Adam, or the per-
versity of matter.

Christianity has never been able to solve the problem of
evil and sin. Eastern religions were more realistic in this
matter. They did not make their gods the creators of the
whole universe. Rather they had at least two gods, one the
god of goodness and the other the god of evil. In traditional
Christianity we find these two beings functioning. God is
thought of as the source of all good, and the Devil is the
evil principle, But, to the question TDid God create the
Devil?" there is no answer. A dualism of good and evil
works well until the attempt is made to account for the
creation of the universe; but that presents difficulties which
have not been solved.

Hobbes, Spinoza, Locke, and Leibnitz

Modern philosophy wrestles with the same problem, but
has introduced many new elements in its attempt either to
meet the original difficulty or to put the whole matter on a
different level.

THOMAS HOBBES was concerned, as we have seen, with
interpreting the entire universe on a materialistic basis.
Motion was, for him, the fundamental factor in the universe.
Thus, good and evil were for him matters of motion. When
motion is successful it generates pleasure, and when it is
unsuccessful pain results.

That which pleases a man is good, and that which causes
pain or discomfort is evil. Thus, good and evil are, as
Hobbes sees it, relative to the particular man. That which
pleases one man may not please another. Consequently,
there can be no absolute good or evil. Both depend upon

gZ BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PfflLOSOPHEBS

the nature of the individual at the time, and as he changes
good things may become evil and evil things good.

The relation of a philosopher's general view to his at-
titude toward the question of good and evil is well
illustrated by DESCARTES. For him, God is perfect, and in-
capable of causing us to err. But we do fall into error and
suffer from our mistakes. This is explained on the theory
that the power which God has given man to distinguish
the true from the false is not complete. Thus, man is often
guilty of making judgments when he does not have enough
understanding to judge accurately. In such cases he may
choose that which is wrong, evil, rather than the good. For
Descartes, error lies not in God's action but in ours. We
make up our minds and act before we have sufficient evi-
dence.

The theory of SPINOZA is much in the same vein. Error
is lack of knowledge. Action without knowledge will pro-
duce results which are not desired, and pain will follow.

As he studied the individual, Spinoza came to the con-
clusion that the fundamental striving of everyone is to pre-
serve himself. This striving is good. Thus, anything which
tends to block this striving is bad, and everything which
helps man to reach the goal of his striving is good.

But man's striving must be rational. Merely to strive is
not enough; he must strive intelligently, realizing what he
is doing and its consequences. The highest happiness of
man lies in the perfect understanding of what he is doing,
his striving. As we come to understand our own strivings
we recognize that, since we are modes of God, our striving
is in truth the striving of God, for we are God. The highest
good of man is this complete realization. In it he sees that
by loving himself he actually loves God, Spinoza calls this
the "intellectual love of God."

The basic philosophic theory of JOHN LOCKE gives rise to
his theory of good and evil. Just as all our ideas come from
the outside and are written on the mind as one might write
on a blank sheet of paper, so our conceptions of what is
good and what is evil are produced. The fact is, many peo-
ple have the same experiences and come to the same con-

WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL? 93

elusions. They agree that certain things are good and others
are bad. Further, our parents have impressed upon us ideas
of right and wrong from the first days of our lives. Later
we come to believe that they are innate, inborn. For Locke,
human conscience is nothing more than these ideas which
we have had so long that they seem to be given by some
divine power.

Further, Locke taught that pleasure and pain are native
to man. Nature has made it so that we enjoy happiness and
seek to avoid pain. Therefore, those things which bring hap-
piness are called good, and those which bring pain are
called evil.

But it is not always true that the same act will bring hap-
piness to everyone. Consequently there are laws which we
must obey under penalty of being unhappy if we refuse to
obey. Locke believed that three groups of laws existed.
Divine laws are those set by God to determine duty and
sin. If we break these laws we suffer greatly. Then, there
are civil laws established by the group as a constituted
civil unit. These determine crime and innocence. Disobedi-
ence is punishable by the group making the laws. The
third group of laws are those of opinion or reputation.
These are by far the greatest in number and are enforced
by the mere fact that men cherish their reputations and
do not desire the condemnation of their companions and
friends.

But, we learn what is good and bad by experience, by
the experience of pain if we do evil and pleasure if we do
good. Thus, Locke was in the ethical tradition of Hobbes
and others who made morality largely a matter of enlight-
ened self-interest: that is, one is good because being good
pays the highest dividends in individual pleasure.

Thinkers who followed Locke sought to expand this po-
sition so as to include others, and to make morality de-
pendent upon the happiness of others as well as upon tie
happiness of tie individual. RICHARD CUMBEKLAND,
founder of the Utilitarian school of thought, argued that
man is not wholly selfish, but is basically sympathetic.
Thus, the welfare of the group, of society, determines the

94 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

good and the bad. LOBD SHAFTESBURY taught that man is
interested in the welfare of both himself and society and
that good actions result when both of these interests are
properly balanced. FRANCIS HXJTCHESON, of this same gen-
eral opinion, coined the phrase **the greatest good for the
greatest number,* and made it the criterion of a good act.

LEIBNITZ encountered the same difficulty as did many
of his predecessors when he came to the problem of good
and evil. In a universe of monads, how is evil possible?
His answer was similar to that of earlier philosophers. This
world, he taught, is "the best possible world," but it is not
perfect. God limited himself when he expressed himself in
finite beings. These limits result in suffering and sin. Fur-
ther, evil serves to make good really good. It is like the
shadows in a picture, shadows which serve to bring the
colors into bolder relief and greater beauty.

Further, in the human soul, he suggested, there are cer-
tain innate princi^es which, if followed logically, lead to
criteria of good and bad. One of these principles is that we
should seek pleasi^re and avoid pain. Reasoning from this
principle, we can prove that certain acts are good and
others are bad.

Often men do not obey these innate principles because
of their passions and impulses, but this does not prove that
they do not exist, Leibnitz held. Afl that this proves is that
such men are ignorant of the principles.

The Ethical Philosophy of Kant

The basic problem of KANT was to discover the meaning
of right and wrong, good and bad. He asked, How is duty
to be defined, and what are the implications of the defini-
tion? In attacking the problem, Kant accepted as funda-
mental the principle, laid down by Rousseau, that the only
absolutely good thing in the universe is the human will
governed by respect for the moral law or the consciousness
of duty. A moral act is one which is done out of respect for
the moral law rather than for selfish gain or sympathy for
others.

Thus, for Kant, consequences are not to be taken as de-
termining the rightness or wrongness of an act. Whether

WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL? 9g

the results of an act are productive of happiness or of pain
is not the matter of greatest concern. If the actor performs
the act with good intentions, out of respect for the moral
law, it is thereby good.

This moral law, in the thinking of Kant, is inherent in
reason itself. It is a priori, before experience, in the very
nature of human thinking. Stated in a sentence, it reads:
"Always act in such a way that the Tna-rfm detennining your
conduct might wefl become a universal law; act so that
you can will that everybody shall follow the principle of
your action.* In every instance, Kant believed, this rule,
this "categorical imperative, 1 ' is a sure criterion of what
is right and what is wrong. An act which you would be
willing that anyone or everyone should perform would be
a good act.

This law, if thoroughly understood, is in everyone. It
may not be recognized in the terms stated, but anyone who
stops to think will discover that human life is possible only
on this moral basis. Should man attempt to act contrary
to this principle, human association would be chaotic.

Another law, an implication of the categorical imperative,
is stated by Kant; "Act so as to treat humanity, whether
in thine own person or in that of another, in every case as
an end and never as a means.** Here the fundamental worth
of every individual is affirmed. Our actions should not bo
such as to use individuals as means for our ends, but rather
to serve others as ends in themselves.

Thus, for Kant, there is imbedded in the human reason
itself a law which is so basic and fundamental that it directs
all moral activity. It demands that everyone act at all times
as though he were the ruling monarch of the universe and
the principle of his action would automatically become the
principle of the action of everyone. If each individual meas-
ures a proposed act by this categorical imperative, he wiH
be able to say without question whether it is right or wrong.

The Views of Fichte and Schopenhauer
FICHTE based his entire philosophic theory upon Kantfs
idea of a moral nature in man which has the right to make
certain definite demands. Starting with the moral nature of

96 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

man, he built a philosophy which would satisfy the de-
mands of this nature.

This moral law, likewise, implies, Fichte taught, the
existence of a moral world order in which man can trust.
Having the moral law within himself, man is justified in
assuming that the world is such that the demands of this
law can be met

Therefore, man must become intelligent, must know what
is right and do it because it is right. The ignorant man can-
not be good. Being free, not forced by some outside au-
thority, man must know the moral law and its implica-
tions, and must at aH times govern himself accordingly.
Mere respect for the moral law is not enough. Man must
act. Therefore morality, goodness, is not a state to be at-
tained once and for all, a condition of eternal blessedness,
but is a continuous struggle of the intelligent individual to
act in every situation so as to meet the requirements of the
moral law. Knowledge is a necessary part of morality for
Fichte.

SCHOPENHAUER begins with an affirmation of the will as
fundamental to the universe. Kanfs thing-in-itself, the
source of all our impressions, is will, Schopenhauer says.
This will to be, will to live, is the cause of all the struggle in
the world and thus of all evil and suffering. A world where
blind wiUs are straggling with each other to live, where the
more powerful fall and devour the less powerful that they
may live, is a world of evil. Will to live begets selfishness.
Each individual will struggle to preserve himself despite
what happens to others.

Thus, for Schopenhauer, sympathy or pity is basic to
morality. To the degree that one has sympathy for others,
he will act not for himself but for them, and thus be good.
The way to this good life is through denial of the in-
dividual will; self-sacrifice brings happiness and peace. And
this can be attained if we stop to realize that every in-
dividual is actually part of the whole, the universal will.
The one against whom we struggle is actually part of the
whole of which we are also members. When we reach this

WHAT IS GOOD AND WHAT IS EVIL? 97

understanding, we will stop struggling and will develop
sympathetic understanding.

According to Mitt, Bentham> and Spencer

Recent philosophic thought regarding the problem of
good and evil has been concerned with man's social re-
lationships. It has been an ethics of the human group
rather than that of divine laws. Consequently, it has taken
on the tinge of relativity. Goodness and evil become quali-
ties of acts relative to the situation in which they are per-
formed.

JOHJST STUART MILL is a good representative of the
Utilitarian school in his contention that the measure of
good is in terms of "the greatest good of the greatest num-
ber." One must ask of an act, Will it bring much good to a
great number of individuals? This eliminates selfishness
and makes the criterion of good the social consequences
of the proposed act.

Further, Mill holds that "goods* differ in quality and
that the goods of the intellect are better than the goods of
the senses. Therefore, not only is the social factor empha-
sized, but also emphasis is placed upon the nature of the
act

JEBEMY BENTHAM is very dose to Mill in his thinking
about good and evil. He too bases good upon the Utili-
tarian principle of "the greatest good of the greatest num-
ber.* But he does not admit that goods differ in quality.
His only criterion is the number of individuals affected by
the act Bentham justifies this position on the basis of self-
interest, holding that to so act will actually bring the great-
est good to the one acting.

In this modern treatment of the subject, good and bad
are not written in the nature of the universe, but are deter-
mined by social factors. The emphasis is placed upon the
consequences of one's act in the experiences of others. The
idea of a God setting down absolutely defined moral laws
is gone. Also the idea that an evil act angers God while a
good act makes Him happy is missing. Here is a relative
morality, and the determiner of good and bad is the effect

98 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

of the act upon the lives of other human individuals now
living or to live in the future.

HERBERT SPENCER attacks the problem from the point of
view of the scientist and seeks to discover a scientific basis
for right and wrong in conduct at large. From the point of
view of evolution, conduct is a developing, evolving thing,
a matter of adjustment of acts to ends. For him, the most
highly developed conduct, and therefore the best, is that
which makes living richer for the individual and for those
among whom he lives and those who will come after him.

The social group, for Spencer, is the ultimate end of
morality. Goodness is to be determined in those terms. But
he distinguishes between conduct that is absolutely right
and that which is relatively right. Absolutely right conduct
is that which is immediately pleasurable and at the same
time produces future happiness for the individual and the
group. Relative right is productive of future happiness, but
is not immediately pleasurable. The goal is, of course, ab-
solute right

The Ethical Views of James and Dewey

The social and individual consequences of activity are
emphasized by philosophers of the Pragmatic school as
criteria of good and evil. Both WILLIAM JAMES and JOHN
DEWEY, especially Dewey, are emphatic at this point. The
good is that which serves the ends of the group and the
individual in the group. A good act is one which considers
the individual as an end in himself and not as a means. But,
by so considering each individual, we consider the welfare
of the group. The human individual, as a social unit, is the
ultimate measure of good and evil. That which enriches his
life must necessarily enrich the lives of all. Here the indi-
vidual and the group are tied together, since, it was argued
by Dewey, individuality is. a social product and no one
has true individuality save as a member of the group.

Thus, a survey of the thinking of men down the ages
about good and evil reveals two fundamental positions and
many shades of both. On the one hand measures of good
and evil are thought to be inherent in the nature of the

WHAT IS GOOD AND "WHAT IS EVIL? Q9

universe. Man is to discover them by coming to an under-
standing of the universe and its nature. Whether the uni-
verse speak to man with its own voice, or whether the
voice be that of the Creator of the universe, the position
is fundamentally the same. Good and bad are absolute,
having been established from the beginning of time, and
apply in all situations and at all times. When the criteria
have been discovered, either by rational searching of the
universe or by revelation, they are forever true, never
changing.

The other position is that good and bad are relative
terms, and that the measures, the criteria, are to be dis-
covered by a study of the particular situation involved.
Time and place are determiners of good and evil. For a
sick man, certain foods are evil, but for a well man they
are good. In a modern social group, preservation of the
aged and weak is good, but in a primitive group which is
beset by enemies and must be on the move to escape de-
struction, to preserve the aged and infirm is bad since it
slows down the group and may result in disaster. This
position looks at the consequences of the particular act in
terms of the life of society and determines the ethical
quality of the act in terms of the good of the whole.

Man's thought on matters of ethics has taken these two
lines throughout history, the absolute and the relative.
And, among present-day thinkers both positions are to be
discovered, although the relative point of view is the most
pronounced. It is difficult for modern man, possessed of
great respect for science and human reason, to find ade-
quate ground for an absolute theory of right and wrong.
All the evidence which commands his respect seems to
point away from this to a relative position.

Chapter IV
THE NATURE OF GOD

HESIOD XENOPHANES PLATO AJUSTOTLE

PL01TNUS AUGUSTINE AQUINAS
ECKHABT BKUNO BOEKME BACON
SPINOZA LOCKE BERKELEY HUME
KANT SCHELLING SCHLE1ERMACHER
SPENCEH BRADLEY JAMES DEWEY

What is the nature of God, and how is he related to
the universe? Is God a person, like man but more
ideal? Or is God a name for the force or forces which
have brought the universe into being and sustain it?
Can the human mind know God, or is God so far
above man that nothing can be known about him?
What is God's relation to us?

The idea of gods came before the idea of God. The
earliest peoples known did not think of* there being only
one god but rather believed in numerous gods: gods of
trees, rivers, winds, the sky, the earth, and hundreds of
others. In some cases one god was more powerful than the
others, but he was one of many.

As mankind developed, belief centered on a few power-
ful gods who were looked upon as ruling the more impor-
tant areas of life. The other gods were reduced to the state
of lesser spirits, elves, or beings very much like men but
with more power than men.

The early Hebrews were among the first to conceive of

THE NATOBE OF GOD 1O1

there being one god and to eliminate all other gods. But
this conception was not won easily. We are told in the
Bible that Moses introduced the Hebrews to this one god
when he delivered the Ten Commandments to his people
from Mount Sinai Gradually the people came to believe
in this god, whom they called Jehovah, and to ascribe to
him all the power and influence which had belonged to the
many gods of their early history.

When we first hear of tie Greeks they were believers in
many gods. As they became more civilized, some of the
gods of their fathers were forgotten and the few who were
left were thought of as constituting a community very
much like the human community except that it was more
ideal.

At the head of this community was Zeus who ruled as a
sort of super king. On his throne with. him, sat his wife,
Hera. Zeus was a glorified man with all the weaknesses of
men* all human passions and defects, but also with many
human virtues. Among the other gods were individuals
with specific duties and specific areas of power. There were
Apollo, Hermes, Aphrodite, and many others, principally
offspring of Zeus. The divine community was full of jeal-
ousies, bickerings, intrigue, and other human frailties. But
the early Greeks feared and worshiped these divinities.

This is known as the period of mythology in Greek his-
tory. Behind it the record is dim and uncertain. No one
knows where these ideas about the gods came from. It is
believed, however, that they were originally conceived as
forces or spirits concerned with various phases of life in
the environment of the ancient Greeks and their ancestors.

HESIOD, a Greek writer about whom we know very little,
wrote a Theogony or book of the gods in which he at-
tempted to account for things and the coining of the gods.
He taught that in the beginning was Chaos who gave birth
to Gaea, the earth, and Eros, love. Then Chaos gave birth
to Erebos, darkness, and Nyx, night. These two were
united and gave birth to Aether, light, and Hemera, day.
The earth begot Pontus, the sea, and, in union with the
heaven, Uranos, begot Chronos, time.

Chapter IV
THE NATURE OF GOD

HESIOB XENOPHANES PLATO ARISTOTLE

PLOTINUS AUGUSTINE AQUINAS
ECKHART BRUNO BOEHME BACON
SPINOZA LOCKE BERKELEY HUME
KANT SOTDELLING SCBOLEIERMACHER
SPENCER BRADLEY JAMES DEWEY

What is the nature of God, and how is he related to
the universe? Is God a person, like man but more
ideal? Of is God a name for the force or forces which
have brought the universe into being and sustain it?
Can the human mind know God 9 or is God so far
above man that nothing can be known about him?
What is Gods relation to us?

The idea of gods came before the idea of God. The
earliest peoples known did not think of there being only
one god but rather believed in numerous gods: gods of
trees, rivers, winds, the sky, the earth, and hundreds of
others. In some cases one god was more powerful than the
others, but he was one of many.

As mankind developed, belief centered on a few power-
ful gods who were looked upon as ruling the more impor-
tant areas of life. The other gods were reduced to the state
of lesser spirits, elves, or beings very much like men but
with more power than men.

The early Hebrews were among the first to conceive of

THE NATDBE OF GOD 1O1

there being one god and to eliminate aH other gods. But
this conception was not won easily. We are told in the
Bible that Moses introduced the Hebrews to this one god
when he delivered the Ten Commandments to his people
from Mount Sinai. Gradually the people came to believe
in this god, whom they called Jehovah, and to ascribe to
hi all the power and influence which had belonged to the
many gods of their early history.

When we first hear of the Greeks they were believers in
many gods. As they became more civilized, some of the
gods of their fathers were forgotten and the few who were
left were thought of as constituting a community very
much like the human community except that it was more
ideal.

At the head of this community was Zeus who ruled as a
sort of super king. On his throne with him, sat his wife,
Hera. Zeus was a glorified man with all the weaknesses of
men, all human passions and defects, but also with many
human virtues. Among the other gods were individuals
with specific duties and specific areas of power. There were
Apollo, Hermes, Aphrodite, and many others, principally
offspring of Zeus* The divine community was full of jeal-
ousies, bickerings, intrigue, and other human frailties. But
the early Greeks feared and worshiped these divinities.

This is known as the period of mythology in Greek his-
tory. Behind it the record is dfm and uncertain. No one
knows where these ideas about the gods came from. It is
believed, however, that they were originally conceived as
forces or spirits concerned with various phases of life in
the environment of the ancient Greeks and their ancestors.

HESIOD, a Greek writer about whom we know very little,
wrote a Theogony or book of the gods in which he at-
tempted to account for things and the coming of the gods.
He taught that in the beginning was Chaos who gave birth
to Gaea, the earth, and Eros, love. Then Chaos gave birth
to Erebos, darkness, and Nyx, night. These two were
united and gave birth to Aether, light, and Hemera, day.
The earth begot Pontus, the sea, and, in union with the
heaven, Uranos, begot Chronos, time.

102 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CTEAT PHILOSOPHERS

If we are to believe Hesiod, the early Greek gods were
things of the universe conceived of as alive, as beings very
much like humans* By the time of the first Greek philoso-
phers these ideas had been organized into the Greek re-
ligion in which the vast majority of the people believed
completely. Temples were erected to the gods and there
had grown up a whole class of people devoted to conduct-
ing worship before the altars of these gods. They claimed
to understand the gods better than the laymen and gave
advice to the people as to how they might keep the
gods happy and win their favor and help in various
undertakings*

The Views of ike Early Greek TMosophers

When the Greek philosophers began to write and teach,
they did not attempt to overthrow the gods or to question
them directly. Most of the early philosophers believed in
the gods as the popular mind and tradition conceived
them. However, they did seek to account for the existence
of diings in ways different from the gods. TBALES, for ex-
ample, sought to explain the coming of the world and all
other things in natural ways and without appeal to divine
beings. Although ANAXEMANDEH taught that the original
substance from which everything came was *the infinite,*
he did not tie this idea up with the popular belief about
the gods.

Nevertheless, there was always in the back of the think-
ing of these early philosophers the hovering belief that the
original creation and the ordering of the universe were re-
sults of the working of God. We find them often referring
to God as the source of the original stuff of the universe
and as the power which in some way established the order
of the universe. However, these philosophers are never very
clear about this point It is highly possible that most of
these men were deeply religious and were attempting to
carry their religion in one basket and their philosophy in
another and often getting the contents of the two baskets
mixed up in their thinking.
HERACLITUS, however, had a deep contempt for the re-

THE NATURE OF GOD 1O3

ligion of the masses and did not hesitate to write, ~And to
these images they pray, just as if one were to converse
with men's houses, for they know not what gods and heroes
are." No doubt Heraelitus believed that he did know what
gods and heroes were.

XENOPHANES, a rhapsodist and philosophical poet of the
sixth century B.C., attacked the popular religious beliefe
of his day and countered them by proclaiming that God
was one and unchangeable. He was extremely bitter in
condemning the popular idea that the gods were like mor-
tals. "Yes/* he wrote, *and if oxen or lions had hands, and
could paint with their hands and produce works of art as
men do, horses would paint the forms of gods like horses
and oxen like oxen* Each would represent them with bodies
according to the form of each* 3 * And in another place he
says, "So the Ethiopians make their gods black and snub-
nosed; the Thracians give theirs red hair and blue eyes."

In place of these beliefs about gods, which seemed crude
to him, Xenophanes taught that God is unlike human be-
ings in every way. God is one who governs the universe
without any effort He lives in one place and never moves.
He is a whole, without beginning or ending, an eternal
unity. As a whole, God does not move; but his parts do
move.

For Xenophanes, God is thought of as the fundamental
principle of tie universe. God is the world, the whole of
living nature. Thus Xenophanes holds to a dear pantheism,
a belief that everything in the universe is God, and God is
everything in the universe. God is the "One and All." For
him there is only one God, and this God is the universe. As
the universe, God is a whole, a unity, One. But within the
universe, within God, there are many parts which change
place with each other while the whole changes not. Xe-
nophanes discards the popular polytheism or belief in the
existence of many gods for a more advanced monotheism
or belief in one god.

Thus, it is dear that during the pre-Sophist period of
Greek philosophy the popular religion with its many gods
was being countered with a more philosophic conception

104 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CTEAT FffiELOSOPHEBS

of one god, the source in some way of the entire universe
and the power behind aH the phenomena o the universe.
Further, the popular idea of the gods and beings much like
men had been challenged by the idea that the one God
was very different from man ia every respect.

This spirit of challenge reached a high point during the
period of the Sophists. These practical teachers of young
men made it their business to attack and challenge every-
thing, and belief fa the gods did not escape. They appealed
to reason and pointed out constantly that the popular be-
lief in many gods was not reasonable. Although their work
was destructive of the generally accepted beliefs, it was
most valuable, since it made men think seriously about
their beliefs in an effort to meet the objections offered by
the Sophists. It became necessary for thinkers to ask them-
selves the question, What is the true conception of God?
And out of this qpiestioning there arose a more consistent
and purer conception of the nature of God.

The Concept of Godfathe Thought of Socrates,
Plato, and Aristotle

One of those who sought to develop a more consistent
and purer conception of God was SOCRATES, but he paid
the price of a pioneer in that the masses misunderstood
him, thought he was destroying belief fa the gods, and
condemned him to death for his impiety.

His pupil, PLATO, uses the word God, but in a very con-
fused way. Often one feels that he is fhfaVfng of the gods
just as the masses think of the***!, as beings governing
different areas of the universe. Indeed, the popular con-
ceptions of the gods are strewn through his works. At other
times Plato seems to teach the existence of one supreme
God who is master and ruler of the entire universe. La his
book, the Tisnaeus, he accounts for the creation of the uni-
verse by using a Demiurge, or sort of architect, who takes
already-created ideas and matter and moulds the universe.
In another place we find him speaking of the Creator as
the source of souls.

This leads us to conclude that Plato believed in the ex-

THE NATUBK OF GOD 10$

istence of many gods, each of which he thought to be
much like a human souL Among these gods are the idea
of the Good, the whole world of ideas, the Demiurge, the
world soul, souls of the planets, and aH tie gods of the
popular religion. However, on this matter of gods Plato is
never clear. Perhaps Plato was attempting to xrse the pop-
ular beliefs to teach more profound truths. In some pas-
sages we are led to believe that he did not attempt to
account for the coming into being of either the world of
ideas or matter, but takes them as existing from the be-
ginning. Nor does he seek to explain the source of the
Demiurge* He also existed from the beginning. Given the
Demiurge, ideas, and matter, Plato goes on to teach that
the Demiurge, using ideas and matter, created aH the gods
in whom the masses believed.

In other passages, however, Plato speaks of God as the
creator of everything in the universe and the goal of all
human life as well as the life of all nature. Holding that the
spirit of man is like God and that the body is a prison of
the soul, he writes that *we ought to fly away from earth
as quickly as we can, and to fly away is to become like
God.** Here he seems to border on mysticism.

The thinking of ARISTOTLE is much clearer on this point
than is that of Plato. You wiH remember from our previous
discussions that Aristotle believed that there were two
causes in the universe, form and matter. For him forms
are forces which realize themselves in the world of matter
just as the idea of the artist realizes itself in marble. Hence
the form is the cause of motion. Matter moves because of
form.

Indeed, Aristotle shows traces of the old Greek idea that
matter was alive. Not only does form, which is within mat-
ter, move matter, but matter seeks to become or realize the
form. For example, the oak tree is the f onn and the acorn
is the matter. The acorn grows into the oak tree, it realizes
the form "oak tree* which was in it as an acorn but un-
realized. As it is growing, according to Aristotle, it is striv-
ing to become an oak tree. This is its motion.

But, before the acorn there was matter and an idea or

1O6 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

form "acorn." This form was in matter, and matter was
striving to become an acofn because of the presence of the
form in it One might go on tracing this series of events
from the crudest matter, each step through the oak tree
and beyond, realizing that at each point there is matter
and form, and matter striving to become form, being
moved by form. Is this series continuous forever?

Aristotle said, "No." At the end there is pure form, form
without matter, and he called this an eternal "unmoved
mover, 5 * the ultimate cause of all motion, of all becoming
in the universe. This "God" is the cause of motion, but does
not move himself. How is this possible?

We have all had the experience of knowing a person, a
hero to us, whom we wanted to be like. We have fash-
ioned our lives after him and have grown into his likeness.
Hawthorne's immortal story, The Great Stone Face, is il-
lustrative of this experience. The little boy looked at the
face so much that he came to be like it But the face was
not moved. It did not change. So with Aristotle's "un-
moved mover," it moves men, it draws matter, but does not
move itself, is not affected.

All the universe, every object and being in it, desires to
realize itself because of God. His existence is the ultimate
cause of their striving. Thus, God is the center toward
which all things strive, and therefore he is the unifying
principle of the universe. Every possibility, form, is realized
in him.

Aristotle's God is the ideal of the philosopher, since he is
all that the philosopher strives to be, pure intelligence.

The Position of the Later Greek Thinkers

While Aristotle was a monist, a believer in one God, the
Epicureans were polytheists, believers in many gods. They
believed that the gods existed and were shaped like men,
but were far more beautiful. Their bodies were believed
to be fine bodies of light. The Epicureans also believed
that the gods differed in sex, needed food, and spoke the
Greek language.

But the gods of the Epicureans were very different from

1HE NATDBE OF GOD 1O7

what the masses thought. The gods did not create the
world, were not interested in men, were perfect, did not
interfere with the world at all. They lived a peaceful,
happy, contented life, free from all the cares and worries
which men know.

For the Stoics there is one God, related to the world just
as the soul is related to the human body. God is corporeal,
bodily, but a body of extraordinary fineness. The Stoics be-
lieved that all the forces in the universe were united into
one force which penetrated everything, the soul of the
universe. All life, all movement stems from this soul. This
is God. This doctrine, of course, is pantheism, the belief
that everything in the universe is God. In God is to be
found the whole universe, just as all of the flower is con-
tained in the seed.

This God of the Stoics is very different from the gods of
the Epicureans. He is the father of aH things, is one, and
is not divided; he loves man and knows all that is going to
happen, he punishes the evil and rewards the good. The
Stoic God is very interested in the world of men. God lives
at the farthest circle of the universe, and, from there, per-
vades the whole universe, the Stoics believed, just as the
soul is situated in a particular place in the body but per-
vades the whole of the body.

CABNEADES, one of the Skeptics, attacked this Stoic idea
of God, showing its inconsistencies. He denied that the
human reason is able to know God at all, and cannot even,
know that God exists. We must be skeptical about the
matter, he argued.

The Greco-Religions Ideas About God

When PHILO, and his Jewish-Greek contemporaries, ap-
peared on the philosophical scene, the conception of God
became paramount in philosophy. Philo, for example, came
from the great Hebrew religious tradition, a tradition at the
center of which was the idea of one all-good and all-
powerful God. He brought this tradition into contact with
Greek philosophy, and sought to show that it was consist-
ent with the best in Greek thought

108 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

For Philo, God is so far above man in greatness, good-
ness, power, and perfection that we cannot know what he
is. But we can be certain that he exists. Philo taught that
God is the source of everything, is absolutely good, per-
fect, blessed. Being so exalted, God cannot come in contact
with matter. But he gives off, as light from a candle, be-
ings or powers which combine in one power which he
called the ""Logos" or divine Wisdom. This Logos created
the universe, and is the intermediary between God and the
world. Here God is separated from the world, a sharp dis-
tinction being made between the all-pure God and the im-
pure world of matter, the world in which we live.

For PLOTTNUS, who attempted very much the same
things as did Philo, God is the source of everything in the
universe. But, God is so perfect that we cannot affinn any-
thing about htm. We can say what he is not, but can
never say what be is. Anything that we think about him is
too poor to be true of hfrn- He is far above anything we
can think.

Further, as with Philo, God created the world not di-
rectly, but by means of emanations, beings coming from
him but not him. God, for Plotinus, is like an infinite stream
which flows out but is never exhausted. The world de-
pends upon God, but God does not need the world.

Creation, for Plotinus, is a fall from God. At the bottom
of creation is pure matter, the farthest thing from God.
Here, again, we note the shaip division between God and
the world, pure God and impure world.

The Early and Medieval Christian Conception of Cod

Christianity, as we have already seen, began very early
in its history to feel the effects of Greek philosophy. The
Gospel of John, written about 100 AJX, shows very defi-
nitely this influence. The book begins with a distinctly
Greek doctrine, the doctrine of the Logos or world spirit
which emanates from God and creates the world.

As Christianity grew and influenced more and more tibe
Greek and Roman world, it became necessary to bring in a
great deal of Greek philosophy. Thus, the Apologists arose

THE NATUBE OF GOD ICQ

to attempt a joining of Christianity and Greek thought
They taught that the order and reason in the universe
point to the existence of a First Cause, a being who is the
source of everything, is good, and is eternal. This First
Cause, or God, is the eternal principle in all changing
things. He emits the Logos as the sun emits light, and
through the Logos created the universe.

God, for the Apologists, is pure reason personified,
thought of as a person. Thus, for them, Reason is the un-
derlying principle of the universe, its cause and directing
and controlling force.

In the teaching of SAINT AUGUSTINE the vast difference
between God and the world is emphasized. God is eternal,
is transcendent, all good, all wise, absolute in every way.
He is the cause of everything, the creator of the universe
out of nothing. Further, Augustine taught that God, in the
beginning, predetermined everything, so that he knew from
the first what would happen to all his creatures throughout
eternity.

The God of Augustine is the idealization of everything
that man considers good and worthy. He is absolute power,
perfect goodness, the source and creator of everything. He
knows everything and has so controlled the universe that
everything is determined by him forever.

For several centuries the idea of God held by the Chris-
tian Church remained very much like that of Saint Augus-
tine. JOHN SCOTUS EKIGENA taught that God was the source
of all things, but went somewhat further than Augustine
when he took the position that God and his creation are
one. For him, God is in the world, the world is God, but
God is also more than the world; he is the world plus. The
world, Erigena held, is only a slight revelation of God who
is far more than all the universe.

By this view, Erigena is able to hold with the Church
that God is perfect goodness, power, wisdom, and is never
wholly known by men. Man may know something about
God from looking at his universe, but this is only a small,
insignificant part of God. Indeed, for this early thinker,
God is in reality unknowable and ^indefinable. Man cannot

11O BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHEBS

expect, with his little brain, to understand God or to com-
prehend his ways.

As Christianity developed during the first centuries of the
Christian era, a very difficult problem came to the fore*
God, as we have seen, was conceived as pure, holy, per-
fect. Thus ft became necessary to introduce an intermediate
being, the Logos, to account for the creation of the trai*
verse* Many thinkers identified this being with Christ. Fur-
ther, Christian thinkers held that there was a Spirit or
power of divine origin permeating the universe, the Holy
Spirit

As philosophers straggjed with the problem of the na-
ture of God, they found it necessary to account for the ex-
istence of the Logos, Christ, and the Holy Spirit Some
theory of their relationship with each other and with God
had to be developed. Out of the thinking on this problem
came the conception of the Trinity. God is thought of as
One, a Unity, a Whole. But he is also Three: God, the
Logos or Christ, and the Holy Spirit

The Apologists taught that both the Logos and the Holy
Spirit were emanations from God and that Jesus Christ was
the Logos in the form of a man. Consequently, they held
that although God is One, he is also Three Persons. The
Godhead is a Unity, but expresses itself in the world as
the creative Logos or Christ and as divine reason which
permeates everything*

A little later there came into prominence a group of
thinkers, the Medalists, .who maintained that all three per-
sons or the Trinity are actually God in three forms or
modes. The Logos is actually God creating; the Holy Spirit
is actually God reasoning; and God is actually God being.
This led to a prolonged discussion as to whether the Logos
was of like nature with God or was of the same substance
as God. Is the Logos an emanation from God or is it God
in another form?

Augustine held to the orthodox conception of the Trinity.
He believed that God was One, but expressed himself in
the universe as three persons, emanations. This was known
as the Athanasian position from the fact that ATHANASIUS,

THE NATURE OF GOD 111

the leader of a group of early Christian thinkers, developed
the point of view. According to Athanasius, Christ is the
principle of salvation and was begotten, not made, by the
Father, God. He is eternal with the Father, and is of the
same substance as the Father. Further, He shares the full
nature of the Father. la Jesus this Logos or Christ was
united with a human body. The Holy Ghost, he main-
tained, was a third being. Thus the one Godhead was con-
ceived to be a Trinity of the same substance, three persons
of the same nature: Father, Son, and Holy Ghost.

ROSCELBST, one of the first Nominalists, applied the doc-
trine of Nominalism to the Trinity. He argued that single
things were the only realities and that universal, or gen-
eral concepts, were mere names or words. Consequently,
he held that there could be no reality corresponding to the
name God. But there are only three different substances or
persons equal in power. Thus, for him, the Trinity is not
One in Three, but is three distinct beings.

This was a denial of the orthodox official doctrine and
drew great opposition from the Church. It became evident
to the Church officials that preservation of the Trinity as a
doctrine of the Church rested upon adoption of the Realist
position, the position that Universals are the only reals and
that individuals are forms of the universal Thus, this posi-
tion became the dominant one among the Scholastics, the
foundation upon which was built a great deal of the intel-
lectual and ecclesiastical structure of the Middle Ages.

The work of ANSELM hinged largely on the idea that
universals exist independently of particular objects. On the
basis of this idea he argued for the existence of God. He
taught that the idea of God as a being who exists implies
that God must exist. If God did not exist, the idea would
not be the idea of the greatest thing thinkable. Man could
still think of something greater, something that did exist
Thus, the perfection of God, the idea of a perfect being,
he held, implies the existence of God, because perfection
must include existence.

This argument, of course, could not be made to hold up,
as many thinkers have shown. The mere idea of a thing>

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHELOSOPHEBS

an idea which includes the concept of existence, does not
guarantee that there is an object which exists. GAUOTLO,
a theologian of the times, showed that one might have an
idea of a peri ect island without any proof that the island
existed.

In his Theology,* ABEXABD taught that the Trinity con-
sists of the Father, who is One or Goodness, the Holy
Ghost or World Soul, and the Logos or the mind of God.
He also taught that tibe three persons of the Trinity are the
power, good will, and wisdom of God.

While these thinkers were attempting to make religion a
rational system, and God, at least in part, understandable,
there was another movement which despaired of under-
standing God. This was known as Mysticism. For Mysti-
cism, God is not so much to be known as experienced. We
do not understand Him with our minds, but we come into
direct contact with Him through a mystical experience.
God is reached by contemplation. This approach to God
gives one an understanding of Him which no amount of
reasoning can ever reach, so argued BICHABD OF ST. Vic-
TOB* Hie goal of the mystic is "the mysterious ascension of
the soul to heaven, tibe sweet home-coming from the land
of bodies to the region of spirit, the surrender of the self in
and to God/* But, this absorption into God is not some-
tiling which man can attain of his own will All a man can
do is to prepare through certain exercises for this "plunge
into the ocean of infinite truth/* Then he must wait. If God
favors him, He wiH permit him to make the plunge.

THOMAS AQUINAS was influenced greatly by the thinking
of Aristotle, and he sought to adjust Aristotle and Christian
theology to each other without destroying the fundamental
doctrines of the Church. Indeed, he believed that the
teachings of Aristotle could be made to support these doc-
trines.

God, said Aquinas, is pure form. We infer His existence
from the facts of His creation. For example, everything
that moves must have a mover. We find movement in the
universe. Therefore, the ultimate source of this movement
must be an unmoved principle, the Unmoved Mover of

SHE NATUIUS OF GOD 113

Aristotle, or GodL Further, the universe reveals that things
are related in a graduated scale of existence from the low-
est forms of existence upward toward more or less perfect
objects* This leads one to infer that there must be some
thing that is perfect at the very summit^ God.

God, for Aquinas, is the first and final cause of the uni-
verse pure form or energy. He is absolutely perfect He is
the source, the Creator of everything out of nothing. In
this creation he has revealed Himself . Further, God rules
the universe through his perfect will

Aquinas, in developing this iheory of the nature of God,
set the pattern for Catholic belief about God for all times.
Even to the present the Catholic Church follows this posi-
tion practically as outlined by Aquinas.

The teaching of JOHN DXJNS Scores is very similar to
that of Aquinas. God is pure form or pure energy. He is the
cause of the universe, a cause that is conscious and has a
purpose in creating and ruling the universe. He is infinite
will which is completely free, so free that he can will or not
will just as he wants. All this, Scotus argues, is to be proven
from the experience which we have of the world about us.

MEISTER ECEBAB.T, a mystic of the thirteenth and four-
teenth centuries, taught that God is inconceivable, an in-
definable spiritual substance, a something in which all
things are United. As such, God cannot reveal himself but
becomes known only through the Trinity. Constantly the
Three Persons of the Trinity flow out of God and back into
him. He is the ground of the universe. All things are in
God, and God is in all things. I am God communicating
himself. I am immanent in the essence of God. He works
through me. As I return to God in the mystic experience, I
become one with God again.

Bruno, Boehme, and Other Forerunners of the "Renaissance
As the Renaissance began to dawn, and men undertook
to think themselves free from the long dominance of the
Church and its doctrines, they became aware of the nu-
merous inconsistencies in the doctrines of the Scholastics.
They saw that some of the ideas about God held by these

114 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

philosophers would not stand up under the impact of
searching reason. However, although they attacked the
reasoning of the Scholastics, they were unwilling to aban-
don the idea of God.

NICHOLAS OF CUSA, for example, held that man could
have an immediate intuition of God, something resembling
the mystic's experience. This experience solves the many
contradictions and inconsistencies which appear in any at-
tempt to think about God. Through reason we cannot
Icnow God, but beyond reason is this Earned ignorance,"
this supersensible experience of God.

GIORDANO BRUNO, fascinated by the immensity of the
universe which the astronomy of his day was revealing,
held that God is immanent in *hfo infinite universe, the
principle of activity. He taugjit that he is the unity of all
opposites in the universe, a unity without opposites, which
the human mind cannot grasp.

In this same tradition was the uneducated German mys-
tic, JACOB BQEHMB, who taught that since God is the
ground of everything, he is the union of all the opposites
in the universe, the original source of all things. Through
the objects of the universe God becomes conscious of him-
self. A divine blind craving gives rise to the universe with
aH its opposites. But in God all these opposites are united.

The Position of Bacon, Hobbes, Descartes, and Pascal

This despair of reason on the part of many as a means
for reaching understanding of God was part of the trend
toward freeing mankind from the bonds of the Church so
that he could devote himself to the study of the world in a
scientific manner. Theology and science were gradually
separated, each taking its place in the scheme of things.
Nevertheless, the endeavor to understand God continued,
though the interpretations of God were in many instances
very different from those of the Middle Ages. It became
obvious that reason's God was very different from faith's
God. Consequently, it happened many times that the phi-
losopher's God was not the theologian's God.

The position of FRANCIS BACON is a clear illustration of

THE NATUBE OF GOD 11$

this development. He divided theology into the natural and
the revealed. Natural theology, he taught, is that knowl-
edge of God which we can get from the study of nature
and the creatures of God. It gives convincing proof of the
existence of God, but nothing more. Anything else must
come from revealed theology. Here we must "quit the small
vessel of human reason and put ourselves on board the
ship of the church, which alone possesses the divine needle
for justly shaping the course. The stars of philosophy will
be of no further service to us. As we are obliged to obey
the divine law, though our will murmurs against it, so we
are obliged to believe in the word of God, though our rea-
son is shocked at it/*

THOMAS HOBBES, interpreting God in terms of his ma-
terialistic philosophy, tells us that at the creation God gave
motion to all things. Further, he suggests, God is body, a
corporeal being, but of this he cannot be certain since he
doubts that we can know what God is. We must limit our-
selves to the assurance that God exists. However, Hobbes
does speak of God as starting the universe in motion and of
Him as ruling the world through the human rulers of the
world.

DESCABTES, through his method of reasoning, seeks to
prove the existence of God and tell us a great deal about
Him. He found the idea of God among his ideas, an idea
of an absolutely real, perfect, infinite being. The cause of
this idea, he argued, must be as real as the idea. There-
fore God exists. The idea had to be placed in him by God,
he held. This God is self-caused, is eternal, all-knowing,
all-powerful, perfect goodness and truth, and the creator of
all things. Nor will God deceive man. Whatever he has
put into man is real, even the ideas which man finds in his
thinking.

Further, for Descartes, God is the basic substance of the
universe and the two relative substances, mind and body,
depend upon him. God gives motion to body. "God," he
wrote, "originally created matter along with motion and
rest, and now by his concourse alone preserves in the whole

Il6 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

the same amount of motion that he then placed in it. 7 * God
is the "prime mover" o the universe,

Descartes* conception o God is highly confusing and
confused. He made God independent of Nature, thus rais-
ing the problem of how God can impress himself upon
Nature so that man can know anything about God. Fur-
ther, how can God, as pure spirit, give motion to matter?
This problem, among many others, was left to Descartes*
followers- It was the problem of harmonizing the mechani-
cal theory of the new science of the times with the the-
ology of Christianity.

BLAISE PASCAL attacked the problem and suggested that
it was impossible for man to demonstrate the existence of
God, that philosophic proofs were of no real value as re-
gards God. We know God, he taught, only through reli-
gious feeling. God is pure spirit and we can know him only
through a spiritual experience.

The Nature of God According to Spinoza

It was SPINOZA who worked out what seemed then a
masterful solution of the problem left by Descartes. For
him God is the sole independent substance of the universe.
Outside of God there can be no substance. Mind and body,
thought and extension, are attributes of God and not inde-
pendent of him. God is the cause of everything in the uni-
verse. He is both thinking and extended substance. God
is a thought in the human mind and he is a tree in the
forest. Thus, God is all, and all is God. There is nothing
outside of or independent of God. God is a single, eternal,
infinite, self-caused principle of nature and of all things,
God and the world are one. Here is clear pantheism.

We can perceive only two attributes of God, thought
and extension. We know God, then, through ideas and
bodies. But this does not exhaust God. He is far more than
this, and we can never know God completely.

God, for Spinoza, is neither personality nor conscious-
ness. He is not characterized by intelligence, feeling, or
will. His actions are not directed by purpose; but all things
follow from his nature according to strict law. All the ideas

THE NATUBE OF GOD ll/

in the universe added together constitute the thinking of
God. My thoughts and your thoughts, and the thoughts of
everyone in the world, make up God's thoughts.

Spinoza had sought to solve Descartes' problem by mak-
ing God everything and more than everything. Mind and
body are not two wholly different things, but are God seen
in two different ways. Thus, God can influence both the
world of thought and the world of things because actually
he is both and is thus being himself.

The Views of Locke, Berkeley, Hume, and Leibnitz

With JOHN LOCKE a new attack was made on the prob-
lem of the nature of God. True to his belief that we can
have no innate ideas, Locke had to take the position that
we cannot have an innate idea of God. However, he held
that we may know about God if we use our natural abili-
ties correctly. We can build the idea of God, he taught,
out of other ideas which we have. If we take, for example,
our ideas of existence, duration, power, pleasure, happi-
ness, and the like, and think of these as extending to infin-
ity and being gathered together, we will have an idea of
God. God is, then, certain ideas which we have gathered
from experience and extended to infinity.

God, said Locke, most certainly exists. Man studies him-
self and realizes that he must have been produced by some
being who is greater than he. Thus, God is "real being,*
thinks, is all-knowing, powerful, and just For Locke, God
is spiritual substance, 1 a third substance in addition to mind
and body.

As creator of the world and man, God has established
certain divine laws which man may discover through
studying nature or through revelation. Further, God can
enforce these laws either by punishments or rewards in
this and in the next world even to eternity. Morality is
based upon the will and laws of God, and only by know-
ing his will and laws can one say whether or not a thing
is right or wrong.

GEOKGE BEBKEUSY, Bishop of Cloyne near the middle of
the eighteenth century, took the position that God is the
Supreme Spirit and the source of everything in the uni-

Il8 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

verse. He argued that, on the basis of Locke's theory, one
must admit that things exist only when they are perceived.
But, to say that a table exists only when he perceived it,
did not satisfy him. Consequently, he reasoned that al-
though he might not be at the moment perceiving the
table, God is perceiving it. Therefore, the table continues
to exist as a thought in God's mind even though he left the
room. The natural world is a creation of God's mind, is
mental, and impresses our senses so that we have ideas,
just as Locke had argued. God, then, is the cause of the
natural world; however, this world is not material, it is
spiritual, mental.

In this way Berkeley believed he had solved the problem
of Descartes and Spinoza. Both of those philosophers had
struggled with the two things, mind and matter. Descartes
taught that mind and matter were two secondary sub-
stances coming in some way from the primary substance^
God. Spinoza argued that mind and matter were two as-
pects, two ways of looking at the same substance, God.
Berkeley eliminated matter by holding that God, spiritual
substance, is all there is. That which we have thought to
be matter is actually an idea in the mind of God.

God, thus, is spiritual, the creator of everything in the
universe through his own mind. The dualism of mind and
matter which had worried philosophers since the begin-
ning was eliminated. Matter is gone, and only mind re-
mains. And we can operate on the principle that this
Author of Nature will always act uniformly, although we
cannot prove this since God is free to change his way of
acting at any time he chooses.

DAVID HUME was a skeptic. Consequently he sought to
show that human reason cannot demonstrate the nature of
God. All the arguments which past philosophers had used
to prove the existence of God and his attributes were ex-
amined by Hume and held to be faulty. Human reason,
he held, is far too weak, blind, and limited to construct
any adequate conception of God.

However, Hume felt that one must believe in the exist-
ence of God since such a belief is the basis of all human

THE NATUBE OF GOD H9

hopes, of morality, and of society. Since we find nothing
in the universe existing without a cause, Hume argued, we
may go on to the position that the cause of the universe
must be God, a being of absolute perfection. But this can-
not be proven by reason. Nor can we say anything about
the nature or characteristics of God.

Nevertheless, Hume suggests a probable way of think-
ing of GodL It is possible, he said, that God is related to the
world somewhat as the soul is related to the body, and is
the active principle of the universe. But, he hastened to say,
this is purely a probability. There is no proof of it which
man can substantiate.

Belief in God, Hume taught, does not come from man's
reasoning but from human desire for happiness, fear of
death and future misery, and the thirst on the part of
many for revenge. Because we have these emotional and
impulsive characteristics as human beings, we construct a
belief in God and then seek to prove that such belief is
justified by reason. Hume writes at length in his attempt
to show that while, from the point of view of reason, we
must be skeptical about God, from the fact of our impul-
sive and emotional nature we do believe in God and con-
struct a theory about God which is necessary for us. This
approach to the problem of the nature of God was, as we
shall see later, the part of Hume's philosophy which stimu-
lated Immanuel Kant to make a distinction between pure
reason and practical reason.

In developing his theory of monads, LEIBNITZ took the
position that these self-contained units of the universe are
arranged in a continuous series of increasing clearness. At
one extreme is the dullest monad, and at the other ex-
treme is God, the highest and most perfect monad, pure
activity, the "monad of monads."

Further, God, for him, is the ultimate cause of every-
thing. Although monads are shut off from everything and
can in no way influence each other, God has so constructed
the universe that each monad acts as though it were in-
fluenced and were influencing.

Man is unable to form a clear idea of God, since God is

12O BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHELOSOPHEKS

the highest, most perfect monad and man is lower and less
perfect Only another perfect monad could know God.
However, man can have an idea of God by taking those
qualities which he finds in himself, goodness, power,
knowledge, and raising them to infinity. The result is the
idea that God is infinite goodness, power, knowledge, and
the like.

Again, since God is perfect and complete, he cannot un-
dergo change or development as do all other monads, He
comprehends all things and all time at a glance and com-
pletely. He created the world which is "the best of all
possible worlds."

The Concept of God in the Thought of Kant

God, for IMMANCEL KANT, is the notion or highest Idea
which man can have, the idea of the highest unity, of the
one Absolute Whole including and encompassing every-
thing. This idea transcends experience and cannot be ob-
tained from experience. It is one of the results of reason
which brings under one head all happenings.

Kant insists that we must never forget that we have
formed the idea of the whole of experience. It is nothing
that we can know as we do one of our ideas arrived at
through experience, for we cannot experience the whole
universe. After we have formed this idea, we make an en-
tity of this whole and personify it. Thus, for us it becomes
God.

Kant attacks the arguments for the existence of God ad-
vanced by philosophers before Ttfm t seeking to prove that
each one is full of inconsistencies and logical fallacies. But,
although it is impossible for one to prove the existence of
God by reason, belief in His existence is necessary for the
moral life. We need this Idea of the Whole, this tran-
scendent theology, as a foundation for our ethical prin-
ciples.

Although Kant criticizes the arguments of others for the
existence of God, he offers his own argument, or proof,
which he believes to be on a truer philosophical founda-
tion than the others. He believed that each individual

THE NATUEE OF GOD

found inherent in reason itself the categorical imperative:
"Always act so that you can will the maxim or determining
principle of your action to become universal law; act so
that you can will that everybody shall follow the principle
of your action*'* This is a command that one live according
to an absolutely good will Further, to live so is deserving
of happiness. Thus, happiness and the good life should go
together in the world. But they often do not We see good
people very unhappy and very evil people happy.

Consequently, there must be a God who is perfectly
wise, good, and powerful to join happiness and goodness.
God, for Kant, is able to know everything, is a Being who
possesses our moral ideals, and has absolute power.

Kant's theory, as you will recognize, is a further develop-
ment of Hume's position. We cannot know by our reason
that God exists or what he might be if he did exist No one
can prove anything about God by argument or reasoning.
But, we can, on the basis of our meager experiences, form
an idea of the Whole of the universe and can personify it
Further, we need the idea of God to serve as a foundation
of our moral life. Kant called this idea of God "transcend-
ent** since it transcends, goes beyond, experience. It is also
a necessary idea, necessary for the living of the good life,
for morality.

This point of view is Kant's answer to skepticism. The
philosophers, led by John Locke, had argued earnestly that
man can know only that which he experiences. But man
cannot experience God. At best, he can blow up or inflate
his meager and small ideas to infinity and call that God-
Kant agreed with those who held that we cannot know
God through reason. But, he added, we need God. There-
fore, reason can bring God back as a necessary unknown.

Fichte, Schelling, Schleiermacher, Hegel,
and Later German Thinkers

Kant's influence reached deep into the thinking of those
who followed. FICHTE came to the conclusion that the
source of the universe was universal reason, intelligence
alone, pure "ego." This ego is distinct from the self of each

BASIC TEACHINGS OF CTEAT PHTLOSOPHEKS

individual human being. It is the universal active reason
which has created and cannot be kept from creating. This
he called God. It is to be thought of as a "universal life-
process" dominating the consciousness of every individual.

Further, this universal ego or God is, for Fichte, the
universal purpose of the universe and its existence is to be
proven, as with Kant, by the moral law. Morality demands
such a being, therefore God exists.

The conception of God held by SCHEUJNG is very simi-
lar to that of Fichte. Schefling teaches that God is to be
understood as the creative energy which is the absolute
ground of everything. This force or principle is the soul of
the universe and is realized through the universe. Indeed*
the theory held by Schelling is pure pantheism. The world
is alive and it is alive because it is God and he is, of course,,
alive.

FRTFDRICH EBNST DANIEL SCHUEIERMACHER took the po-
sition that God, the Absolute, and the world are one. For
htm God has never in all time or eternity been without the
world. Whenever God has been, the world has also been.
Further, the world cannot be without God. Nevertheless,
there is an important distinction to be made between God
and the world.

While God, for Schleiermacher, is to be thought of as a
unity, a one, without space and time, the world is, as we
conceive it, many things in space and in time. Thus, while
this philosopher was in that school of thinking which we
have called pantheism, he did make a distinction between
God and the world.

Further, he held that it is impossible to ascribe to God
the usual attributes of personality, thought, will, and the
like. For him, God is to be thought of as the universal
creative force in the universe, the source of all life. He is
such that man can know frfrn only through religious feeling,
a feeling of absolute dependence. Man does, he argued,
come to this feeling of dependence and recognizes that the
thing upon which he is dependent for all that he is must
be a "world ground," God.

The theory of God as held by HEGEL is part of his

THE NATURE OF GOD 123

whole theory of evolution to which we have referred pre-
viously. God, Hegel tells us, is Idea. By this he means that
God must be thought of as the entire process of evolution,
past, present, and future. The dialectical process which is
unfolding in evolution is contained within God. (By "dia-
lectic" or the "dialectical process" we mean the reasoning
process.)

Thus, God is the creative reason of the universe and re-
veals himself in the world and as the world develops
through evolution, he becomes self-conscious, comes to
know himself more fully. In man he reaches the clearest
self-consciousness. It is evident that Hegel's God is not
complete, but is developing with the world. His is a de-
veloping God.

The world which RUDOLF HERMANN LOTZE believed in,
a world of spiritual realities, could not, Lotze held, be
thought of unless one admitted the existence of a universal
substance of which all the spiritual units are modes or
expressions. In this world of many interrelated units he saw
the expression of some absolute will which unified these
parts, which kept them from being all tangled up in endless
confusion. All nature, then, is in some way controlled by
the Absolute, a substance of which all the processes of
nature are states. This, of course, is pantheism.

We interpret this Absolute in terms of what we conceive
as the highest and best possible. Thus, we think of it as
a personality that is absolutely good, as a God of love.

GUSTAV THEODOR FECHNER taught that God is to be
thought of as the highest soul, a world soul, which is re-
lated to the world just as the human soul is related to the
human body. For Fechner, nature is the body of God.
Fechner began his thinking from the fact of mental proc-
esses which he discovered in men. The human individual
thinks, he engages in what are called psychic processes.
Also, according to Fechner, there are higher forms of
psychic processes in the universe. All of these, united, are
the world soul or God.

This group of philosophers thought of God as the under-
lying source or cause of the universe. He is, in some way,

124 BASIC 'TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

that which is behind the universe. Some have told us that
we can know fomi through our reason while others have
held that reason is unable to penetrate behind the universe
to its cause. A few Lave held that we can know God only
through feeling.

The Position of Comte, Spencer, and Bradley

The later philosophers have tended to abandon the at-
tempt to know God and turned the matter over to the
theologians or religionists. AUGUSTS COMTE, as representa-
tive of the Positivists, held that all attempts to get at the
essence of things were symptoms of immature develop-
ment of the human mind. When one reaches the stage of
positivism he gives up all attempt to discover God and
busies himself with discovering the relations which exist
between things, phenomena.

SIB WILLIAM HAMILTON held that one might believe in
God if he wanted to do so, but that it is impossible for one
to know anything about God since the ultimate must be
unconditioned and the human mind can know only that
which is conditioned by something else.

HERBERT SPENCER argued that all we can know is that
which is finite and limited. But we can relate things to an
Absolute or something unrelated. However, we cannot
know this Absolute, the substance which underlies all that
we know. Therefore, the Absolute is, according to Spencer,
the Unknowable. It exists. This he would not deny. But
what it is, he argued that no one can know.

F. H. BRADLEY disagrees with Spencer and maintains
that the Absolute is knowable. Further, he holds tibat this
Absolute is a harmonious system, a Whole which is in some
way in every part of the universe.

The Views of James and Dewey

WILLIAM JAMES, true to his Pragmatism, holds that a
belief in a God is necessary for the satisfaction of man's
nature. We cannot prove that God exists, nor can we
prove anything about him, but we have a will to believe
in God, and we must satisfy this wilL

THE NATUBE OF GOD

The God in which James holds that man must believe is
part of the universe, not divorced from it He is worldng
with man in the realization of man's ideals, James speaks
of him as man's great Companion, his helper. Often he
speaks of God as a being very much like man,-~consciou$,
personal, and good,-but somewhat more powerful than
man.

JOHN DEWEY would not use the term God without de-
fining it in such a way that it ceases to have any real
meaning. He recognizes that the universe exists and that
men do have certain experiences which they have inter-
preted in terms of God Dewey holds that such an inter-
pretation carries with it too much that cannot be proven
and, therefore, should not be made.

Thus, man, in his thinking, has found himself within a
universe which he does not understand and which deals
out to him much that is evil in his sight. Man has at-
tempted to account for this world and, at the same time,
to save himself from the evil of the world. The result is
many theories of God, the source of the universe and the
salvation of man.

From the earliest of men to the present we discover
theories of how the universe came into being and con-
tinues to function. Many of these theories are centered
about a God or powerful being, very much like man but
far greater, who created the universe, usually out of noth-
ing. This God is often thought of as the force, principle,
or power, which is working within the universe to keep it
going.

In many philosophies, as we have seen, this God is also
more or less concerned about man. He offers man salva-
tion from the world and its evils. He cares especially about
man.

The religious tradition has, with only a few exceptions,
held to a more or less personal God who cares for man
and who, at the same time, is the creator of the universe.
Another tradition, the scientific, has not been so sure that
there is anything in the universe which cares for man or
that the creative force of the universe is anything like

126 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHTLOSOPHEBS

personality. Science knows forces, drives, energies in the
universe, working and creating, and destroying. It sees
man, with his values and hopes, coming into being as
these forces operate and going to pieces as they continue
to operate. Scientists will not dispute if someone wishes to
give these forces a name and uses the name "God." But
they are quick to state that the word ~God* must not be
applied here with all its traditional connotations.

Modern philosophy has been moving in the Direction of
the scientists. Either it denies directly the existence of God
and insists that the name be saved for the phenomenon in
history to which it has been given originally, or it redefines
the term so that it loses all its original meaning and be-
comes merely a name for the forces of which the scientists
speak Although there is a vast body of people who hold
to a belief in the God as developed by Saint Augustine and
Thomas Aquinas, and although there are some philoso-
phers who hold to that position, the bulk of modern and
present-day philosophy has abandoned the traditional
Christian conception of God and put in its place a theory
of the -Absolute either as the ground of the universe or the
unity of the universe, a substance of which all else is
created or just the universe taken as a whole and with its
consistencies and likenesses emphasized.

You and I are left to make our own choice from among
these many theories. We may follow the tradition, or we
may accept the scientific approach.

Chapter V
FATE VERSUS FREE WILL

PYTHAGORAS SOCRATES PLATO ARISTOTLE

BACON DESCARTES SPINOZA

LOCKE HUME VOLTAIRE ROUSSEAU

KANT SCHELLING HERBART SCHOPENHAUER

MILL JAMES DEWEY

Is- man free to mould Ms own destiny, or is Tie a mere
straw in the wind of fate? Do our ideals, hopes, acts,
end wills mean anything in the universe? Is it true, as
some hold, that we come from the unknown, are buf-
feted around by forces of which we have no control,
and at last return to the unknown?

The generally accepted belief that the life of the primi-
tive man was free and happy is not supported by what is
known about the ideas and thoughts of the earliest of
men. The most general belief found among the most an-
cient peoples is called "animism/* This is the belief that
every object in the universe is actually a person very much
like man himself but far more powerful. Further, early
man was certain that many of these living objects were not
friendly to him.

This early man believed that the river, the mountain*
each tree, the sun, moon, and each star, in fact everything
in the universe was either a living being or else the home
of a spirit. Each being or spirit was thought to be very
powerful, jealous of this power, easily offended, and

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHEBS

mighty in anger. Therefore the primitive man was con-
stantly afraid lest he unwittingly offend and anger one of
these beings or spirits and staffer the most fearful punish-
ment.

These beings and spirits ruled him at all times along
with numerous other spirits which might be loose in the
universe and rrnghfr enter frim at any time. Disease, mad-
ness, and all the other disasters which might come to man
were the workings of spirits within him, Thus primitive
man's world, both inside and outside of himself, was
swarming with beings and spirits who determined every-
thing which he did or wiiich happened to him.

In such a world of "powers and principalities* man was
never free. That he might have or be a free will acting on
his own never entered his mind. The beings and spirits
of the universe directed and determined his every act and
thought.

Later mankind passed beyond belief in animism, but not
to a belief in free will If the powers which governed all
man's actions were not thought of as living objects in na-
ture or spirits occupying natural objects and man himself,
they were believed to be the Fates, beings of great power
and influence who determined the destinies of every man.
In the earliest Greek mythology we find the conception of
the Fates, individuals weaving the web of destiny in which
all mankind is caught and from which we cannot free
ourselves.

Both the idea of spirits and the idea of the Fates are
expressions of a basic feeling among early peoples that in
some way the destinies of each and every human being
are determined by forces beyond ihe power of his control.
It is the idea that all life is a consistent pattern determined
by powers outside of man and to which man is completely
and absolutely subject. Here no place is left for anything
like free will on the part of man. Man is a marionette
whose every action is controlled and determined by the
pull of strings in the hands of powers far above and beyond
him. He riiust follow their lead and can do nothing else.

FATE VERSUS FREE "W3DLI*

The Idea of Fate Among the Early Greek Thinkers

Throughout Greek thought we discover the belief in the
absolute power of the forces of the universe. Man's destiny
is determined by these powers and, although he may not
be happy about it, man is helpless. He must obey.

The Pythagoreans were convinced that the universe, in-
cluding man, was a closed system. This system could be
understood if one understood the relations of the parts.
Further, these relations could be expressed in terms of
numbers* Consequently, if one could penetrate the secrets
of numbers one would know the secrets of the universe and
the destiny of man. This led to a careful study of numbers
in an effort to predict man's future.

In the thinking of PYTHAGORAS and his followers, the
nature of the universe is such as to determine man's fate.
The secrets of this fate are locked in numbers and can be
unlocked if one understands the meaning of numbers. Con-
sequently the way to know what will happen to man, each
man, is to comprehend fully the language of numbers.
The Pythagoreans devoted a good deal of their energies to
this task.

HERACLITUS took the position that the cosmic process
is according to law. He writes: "This one order of things
neither any one of the gods nor of men has made, but it
always was, is, and ever shall be, an ever-living fire, kin-
dling according to fixed measure and extinguished accord-
ing to fixed measure." AH change, he held, is according to
a fixed and unalterable law, a law which is the basic prin-
ciple of the universe. Man is completely subject to this
law. At times Heraditus speaks of this law, or principle,
as "Fate" and at other times as "Justice * But > whatever
name is used, the meaning is simple. At the base of the
universe is inevitable law, to which all things, including
man, are subject. Man has no choice but to follow the
dictates of this law. "This alone is wise," he says, "to under-
stand the intelligence by which all things are steered
through all things." When man understands his fate, he
does not rebel, but accepts it as inevitable.

130 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

A similar point of view was taken by all the philosophers
before Socrates. They all thought of the universe as con-
structed by some underlying power or force, which, in
building the universe, set its pattern so that the parts
functioned with a complete inevitableness. Man, as part
of this universe, was governed by this inevitableness. Al-
though, in their philosophies, they did not make this
inevitableness into a person with the title of Fate, never-
theless they held to the belief that man's destiny was
determined not by what he did but by the facts of his crea-
tion. Thus, the Fates of popular Greek religion and the
belief in the inevitableness of nature were the same in
principle.

The first break in this tradition came with the Sophists.
They centered their attention upon man, and found in him
unrealized possibilities. Man, "the measure of all things,"
could not be wholly bound to an inescapable process or
law* Although they were not clear about the matter, it
seemed impossible to them that man should not have some
effect upon his own destiny. At least, they were certain
that man could shape his destiny among his fellows. He
could learn how to succeed as a member of society, to
defend himself in the courts, and to win a position for
himself in the state. Whatever his eternal destiny might
be, at least he could shape his worldly existence to fit his
desires. Man was not wholly enslaved to the Fates.

According to Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle
This approach forced philosophers to rethink the prob-
lem of man's relation to the universe and the forces re-
sponsible for its existence and activity, Man would no
longer be content to accept the inevitableness of the uni-
verse without a challenge, without a fight, without a val-
iant attempt to defend his own integrity.

SOCBATES added strength to this concern with man. He
held that man's crowning achievement is knowledge. Hav-
ing attained knowledge, man would do the right thing, he
would be good. Without knowledge man was in danger of
acting wrongly. Further, he believed that man could,

FATE VERSUS FREE WILL 131

through biowledge, have some influence upon his destiny
here and hereafter. Man might influence to some degree at
least the fate which was his. Here was ths beginning of a
belief, vague though it was, that man was possessed of
some degree of freedom of choice. This freedom was not a
mere sham, but upon its proper use might hinge man's
future.

In Socrates' thinldng, many people made wrong choices,
and would consequently suffer. They used their freedom to
reach evil ends. With Socrates and the Sophists we see the
Fates loosing their grip on man. Man was rising up and
declaring his belief in his own ability, his strength even
against the powers of the universe.

The belief in man's freedom is shown clearly in the writ-
ings of PLATO. Man can and does defeat the purposes of
the universe. Although he is a creature of the divine Crea-
tor, he may so order his life as not to live justly and wisely.
The appetites or the passions may gain control of him and
refuse to obey the dictates of his highest part, reason or
mind. The ideal is a just man with each part of his nature
functioning in its proper way. But man can destroy this
harmony.

Indeed, in his later writing, the Laws, we find Plato in-
sisting upon freedom as a necessary basis for the good life*
He would have men free to build a life that is worth while.
In this it is evident that Plato believes that a life that is
good because it can be nothing else is not in reality good.
Goodness comes because one has met evil and overcome
it, has made a real choice and has chosen well. This im-
plies that man is not determined by the universe, but is
able to choose, is free to determine in the last analysis his
own fate.

Central in the thinking of ARISTOTLE is the belief in the
freedom of man. Morality, for him, is not a matter of some
inevitable law, but is a matter of free choice. He writes
that "Virtue, as well as evil, lies in our power/' We are
free to do that which is good or to do that which is eviL
is no power in the universe forcing us either way.

132 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

In another place he says, "Virtue is a disposition, or habit,
involving deliberate purpose or choice."

Further, Aristotle held that the supreme end of man
was the realization of that which is highest and best in
him as a human being, his reason. Man may choose to
debase this or to realize it to the fullest He is free to strive
to become all that is in him to become, or to become less.
The ultimate choice lies within man*

Thus, both Plato and Aristotle were certain that a world
in which fate ruled completely could not be a good world.
In such a world man could not be held responsible for his
actions. Whether good or bad, he would be determined by
a power beyond his control and could not therefore be
blamed. Morality, in the thinking of both philosophers,
demanded a free will, an opportunity for choice which was
real and not a mere sham. The good man, they held, was
one who made the right choice and through the force of
his will realized the best. The bad man was one who made
the wrong choice.

Although both these philosophers recognized the exist-
ence in the universe of certain laws and consistencies, they
were not willing to close the universe so tightly that man's
actions were determined in all things. They had to leave
room for free will or freedom, lest they deny the actual
existence of the good life.

The Views of the Later Greek Philosophers

The value of freedom was recognized by EPICUBUS and
the Epicureans. However, following the atomic theory o
Democritus, they were in danger of making such freedom
impossible. If man, as all nature, is a result of the coming
together of atoms and if he disappears when these atoms
separate, then man would be subject to the nature of the
atoms. To meet this difficulty, Epicurus held that th
atoms were endowed with spontaneity. They were not
pushed and pulled by forces of nature, but had the power
to move as they willed. Thus, if man is a composition of
atoms, he too would have the inner power to move and
act as he willed.

FATE VERSUS FBEE "WILL 133

Believing that the universe of man cannot be explained
as the result of blind fate, Epicurus was unwilling to leave
man as the pawn of inexorable forces. Free will seemed
important to him. As a result, he gave freedom to his atoms
so that they might, in turn, give freedom to man.

Thus, man can make choices, determine his fate- He
may strive for prudence. He may seek pleasure which
comes through the satisfaction of desires and through the
elimination of all desire.

ZENO and the Stoics took the other extreme position as
regards human freedom. For them the universe is a result
of fixed and unchanging kw. Everything in it is deter-
mined with an absoluteness that permits no break. Even
man's will is determined. In the entire universe there is
nothing that can happen by chance. From the first begin-
ning to the last end there is an unbroken chain of causes
determined by the nature of the universe.

Man can have no freedom of will in any true sense of
the term, the Stoics taught Man is part of this causal chain
and all his actions are the result of factors over which he
can have no control

It is possible, Zeno asserted, for man to obey graciously
or to obey ungraciously, but in either case he must obey.
His only freedom, then, is to accept his fate, to assent to
what fate has decreed for him.

According to the Stoics, everything in the universe has
its beginning and source in the wiH of God. God is the
ruler and the determiner. Everything which has evolved
has been the result of God's purpose. Thus fate and God's
will are the same.

However, when the Stoics come to the problem of ethics
or the good life, they abandon the complete determinism
of their metaphysics, (By ^metaphysics" we mean the phi-
losopher's conception of the universe and of reality.) In
their ethics the Stoics teach that man may determine for
himself whether or not he wifl obey the moral law, whether
or not he will follow reason and. seek to realize the supreme
good. Man may give himself to his passions and become
their slave, or he may escape from his passions and rise to

134 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

a moral life above them. As lie conquers his passions he
becomes free. This, for the Stoic, is true freedom*

Thus, while the Stoic, in attempting to hold to a universe
in which cause and effect are determined, must deny free-
dom in his metaphysics, he is unable to carry this theory to
its logical conclusion. When he approaches the ethical
problem he realizes that man must be free if good and bad
are to mean anything in reality. Here the Stoic is in the
tradition of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle.

The Position of the Greco-Religious Thinkers

PHILO, in his attempt to reconcile Jewish religion and
Greek philosophy, conceived of the body as the source o
evil. When the soul comes into the body it partakes of the
evil of the body, an evil that has been of the body fromi
the beginning. Thus, the incarnation of the soul in the body
is > forPhilo,afalL

But the soul possesses what Philo thought of as pure
intelligence, an addition which the soul receives from the
divine, from God. This makes man akin to God, to the
divine. However, even though the human soul is con*
nected with the divine and is, in a sense, part of the divine,
it has the power to freely accept or reject the rule of God*

The divine does not exercise complete control over man,
but makes it so that he can give himself over to sense and
the bodily passions or conquer these and rise to the divine.
Thus, man has a real freedom, and can exercise it to de-
termine his own destiny in a real sense.

Likewise, PLOTINDS conceived of the soul of man as
part of the world soul and as thus partaking of the freedom
of the world soul. But man's soul had the desire to shape
and mould matter, and thus became enmeshed in matter
and felL In this fall each soul loses its original freedom.
As the real soul turns away from the life of sense in the
body, it regains its freedom. The nearer it returns to God
the more freedom it has.

The soul, for Plotinus, has an original freedom just as
one outside a prison has freedom. As it becomes entangled
in matter it enters the prison house of matter and loses its

FATE VEBSUS FREE WILL 135

freedom. But, it can turn away from the body and regain
its freedom. It can escape from the prison house of the
body, of the sensual, and return to God who is perfect
freedom.

Whether or not each soul does this, Plotinus believed,
rests with the soul itself. There is no compulsion on the
part of a fate or an inescapable law, Man is free to sell his
soul to the sensual or to free it from the body and strive
upward to union with God*

These early religious philosophers never doubted but
that God was perfect freedom and, in so far as man or the
human soul is godlike, it partakes of this freedom. Thus,
for them, man is fundamentally free. But, because of their
almost universal contempt for the world as the seat of evil,
they believed that the incarnation of this free soul in a body
or in matter was a fall and a loss of freedom. However, in
this incarnation the soul did not lose its ability to rescue
itself. It was still free to become free from the body if it so
willed. All of these thinkers were unwilling to give matter
absolute power over the souL

Early and Medieval Christian Thinkers

This conception was carried over into early Christianity.
The Apologists without exception taught that man is bas-
ically free and that he has fallen through his contact with
body. At the creation, they believed, the soul was endowed
with the ability to choose between the good and the eviL
As a result, some souls chose to turn from God and give
themselves over to the sins of matter. But man is able,
through the aid of the divine and the living of a Christian
life, to return to God. Man can make a choice which will
determine forever his destiny. This choice is real and eter-
nal. Thus, the freedom of man is real in that it enables him
to determine his estate forever.

The early Christian doctrine of the work of Jesus is in
line with this theory. Jesus, the Apologists believed, came
to save man from sin. But sin implies guilt on the part of
man and guilt is meaningless unless man is in some way
responsible for his sin* You cannot hold a man as guilty of

136 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

an act unless he is able to act differently. Thus, only if man
is free to choose can he be condemned for his sin. If man
has sinned, he must be free*

Further, the early Christians argued that God, who is
aH good and perfect, cannot be responsible for evil and six*
in the world. Thus, man must shoulder tins responsibility*
and must be free. The early Christian monk PELAGIUS
taught that God had given freedom to man so that he may
make a choice between good and evfl. Each man makes
his own choice, but he retains his freedom of choice. Thus,
he may turn away from sin by an act of his free will, re*
pudiate evil, and receive divine forgiveness.

It is obvious, then, that freedom was believed by these
early Christians to be necessary to account for the work
of Jesus and the whole scheme of salvation,

The conception of individual freedom was denied by
SAINT AUGUSTINE. According to hi, mankind was free in
Adam, but since Adam chose to sin, he lost freedom not
only for himself but for all men and for all time. Now no
one is free, but all are bound to sin, are slaves of evil*

But God makes a choice among men of those whom he
wiH save and those whom he will permit to be destroyed
because of sin. This choice is not influenced by any act of
an individual man, but is determined only by what God
wants.

In Augustine we find both fatalism and .predestination;
as far as the individual man is concerned. With Adam
there was no fatalism. He was free. But God knew even
then how Adam would act, knew that he would sin. Thus,,
from the beginning God made up his mind whom he
would save* These were predestined from the first to sal-
vation, and alt the rest were predestined to eternal punish-
ment. Adam's sin, for Augustine, became hereditary, with
the result that the future of every man is completely de-
termined and has been so from the beginning of time.

The doctrine of original sin, so prevalent in the early
Christian church, led in Augustine to a belief in fatalism
as far as the individual man is concerned. His future is

FATE YEBSUS FREE WELZ. 137

sealed not by any act of his, but by the act of the first man
and the free will of God himself .

ABELABD was not in complete agreement with Saint
Augustine, but held that aT* is actually free to choose
between good and evfl. Sin, for him, consisted in the con-
senting to do an evil act which is recognized by the indi-
vidual as evil If one does wrong,but intends to do right,
he is not a sinner. But, if he knows that an act is wrong
and persists in doing it, he is sinning. This choice of act is
a matter of the free wffl of man. He can actually decide
on the basis of his lenowledge and can act in terms of his
decision.

While Augustine took from man aH choice, Abelard gave
choice back to man in order to preserve the fact of guilt
and sin. Without choice sin could not exist, he held.

With THOMAS AQTJINAS we find a dear belief in the free-
dom of the human wOL Man, he taught, is a being with a
wiH and with intelligence. He is not pushed from without
like the animals, but can determine his actions. His will
may follow his intellect doing what the intellect says is
right. But the wffl can choose to act or not to act When
his reason tells hfrm that a certain course of action is good,
man can decide which particular acts are best suited to
the realization of the end proposed.

However, when Thomas Aquinas turns to a considera-
tion of specific religious doctrines, he modifies his doctrine
of free will somewhat He believed, as did Augustine, in
the doctrine of original sin. Adam's sin, for htm, was trans*
mitted to all men, and carried with it the natural conse-
quences of sin. Only divine grace can bring salvation* But,
even where God wishes to bestow this salvation, the hu-
man will must co-operate. God foresees that some will not
accept the offer of grace, and predestines them to eternal
punishment.

JOHN DUNS Scorns taugiht that if the human wffl were
inferior to the human intellect, as Aquinas had believed, it
could not be free. If the will had to look to the intellect for
direction, it would be subject to the intellect. Therefore, to

138 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT MODLOSOPHEBS

make the will wholly free, he taught that it was superior to
the intellect.

The will, then, for Scotus is completely free and can
inake decisions between sense and the moral law. The will
is the highest facility of the soul, higher than intellect
This leads, of course, to the position that the will is the
final determiner of right and wrong. What the will deter-
mines as good is good simply because the will has said
that ft is good

Carried over to the idea of God, this doctrine leads one
to the position that God's will is superior to his intellect,
and that right is right simply because God wills it to be
right and not because it is right in terms of reason. God
has made certain things right. He could just as well have
made the opposite things right since it is his arbitrary will
which determines the right The will of God is arbitrary.

This is the extreme of the position that the will is free.
As long as will is influenced in its action by the intellect or
reason, it cannot be wholly free. But^ if it is free also of
reason, it has reached the peak of freedom. This is the
direction of Scotus* thinking, although he tends to draw
bade from the final logical results of his position, complete
chaos since every human will would become a law unto
itself. That which I will is right, and that which you will
is right There can be no measure above the human will,
Scotus drew back when he found himself approaching
this conclusion. But he held tenaciously to the idea that
the human will is free and is not subject to the intellect
Indeed, he took the position that if it was necessary for
him to have either intellect without will or will without in-
tellect, he would choose the latter. He was, in this, one of
the great champions of the freedom of the will.

With the Renaissance, man undertook to free himself
from the dominance of the Church and its doctrines and
to study the world freely. This was an assertion in fact of
man's freedom. The human mind refused longer to be tied
to the doctrines and beliefs of the past, but aspired to
search the universe with unblinded eyes and tell what it
found there.

FATE VEHStTS FREE WHJL 139

It is a curious fact, however, that as man undertook
this search he began to discover inexorable laws and math-
ematical consistencies by which everything in the universe
seemed to bd controlled. The early scientists turned from
the Church and from Aristotle to the world round about
There they found things happening in what appeared to
them mechanical ways. Galileo, Kepler, Sir Isaac Newton,
each found the events of the universe following what ap-
peared to be definite laws.

And into this system of laws man seemed to fit of ne-
cessity. His being, his actions, even his thoughts were con-
ceived to be subject to the laws of the universe, laws
which brooked no interference or change. Thus, man was
freed from the authority of the past and of the Church to
find himself again in bondage to a master more powerful
and unyielding than any he had known before. He became,
in the philosophies of many of the Renaissance scientists,
merely a part of a mechanical universe controlled by forces
in the universe and of no meaning save as a unit in the
inexorable whole.

The Views of Bacon, Holibes, Descartes, and Spinoza

FRANCIS BACON is typical of man's earnest desire to be
free from the traditions of the past and to approach the
universe without religious or intellectual bias. Fundamental
to his thinking was the belief that man must free himself
from the forms and prejudices of the past and follow a
new method in studying the universe. His aim was to free
the mind from the "idols" which the past has foisted upon
it so that it might consider its universe clearly.

Then, having been freed, the human mind will, he was
certain, be able to discover the laws which govern the
universe and determine its every action.

Nevertheless, Bacon was not wholly able to escape the
notions of the past. Although he relegated religion to a
realm of its own outside of and different from philosophy,
he held that there were religious laws which man must
obey whether they appeared to be reasonable or not. By
separating theology and philosophy, Bacon was able to

14O BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

free philosophy so that it might undertake an unbiased
study of the universe. But he left man subject to the will
of God and thereby shorn of his freedom. It is obvious
that this condition ccmld not long satisfy the thinking mind.
It was far too contradictory.

THOMAS HOBBES saw the unsatisfactory results of the
position suggested by Bacon, and went a step further by
holding that all in the universe was subject to a purely
mechanical series of cause and effect Everything, even the
actions and destiny of man, he argued, can be explained
mechanically. All the universe is motion. All thoughts or
ideas are simply motions in the brain.

Thus, for Hobbes, to hold that man is a free will is ab-
surd. An individual finds himself the scene of alternating
desires and aversions. He wants to do some things and does
not want to do others. As these opposites pky across his
mind, he is deliberating, thinking. The last desire or aver-
sion is called will. He completes his deliberation and de-
cides to act or not to act.

Each desire or aversion is caused. Consequently the last
desire or aversion, the point at which one stops, is also
caused. Thus, the will is caused and cannot be free. A
man is, Hobbes held, free to act after he has willed, but
is not free to will or not to will. The very nature of his
being makes him a willing being. He must will. But he
can choose to act or not to act on the willing which he
does.

The problem of DESCARTES was, as we have seen, to
reconcile the mechanical theories of his time with the ideas
of God, soul, and freedom. He was not contented to ac-
cept the mechanistic view of the universe, including man,
which the science of his day seemed to demand. At the
same time, he was unwilling to discredit science altogether
and return to the older spiritualistic tradition.

His solution lay in making a sharp distinction between
mind and body. The body, for him, was part of the or-
ganic universe and was governed by purely mechanical
processes. He believed that here cause and effect was
supreme, that there were no breaks in the chain of causes,

FATE VERSUS FREE WHX

and that everything was determined by what went before.
All the universe, including man, could therefore be ex-
plained mechanically.

The mind, or soul, however, is free. It wills an active
principle. It is free, for example, to will to love God or not
It is free to think pure thoughts or not It is free to create
imaginary pictures and to move the body in any way it
cares. The volitional part of man's nature, then, is in the
soul, and can be influenced by the body only indirectly.

The will, according to Descartes, is independent of the
body, and can, if it so desires, produce states of the body.
The will is free. Further, the ideal for which man should
strive is to keep the will free from influences of the body
and any other outside influences.

While Descartes had separated inind and body in an
effort to reconcile the mechanistic science of his day and
the religion of the times, he left unanswered the question
of the relationship between mind and body. How can the
free will of the individual influence the body? This was
the problem which his immediate successors attacked.

The Occasionalists, of whom GTTEIJNCX is a representa-
tive, held that God is aware at aH times of what an in-
dividual is going to will, and he arranges the universe so
that the thing which I will happens. The human will is
free, but God has foreknowledge and thus can act so that
it looks as though the will was influencing the body or
other bodies.

Other successors of Descartes, BLAISE PASCAL and
PIERBE BAYLE for example, placed freedom in the realm
of religion and held that though we cannot prove man's
freedom by reasoning, we can know that man is free
through a direct religious experience.

In SPINOZA we find a complete abandoning of the idea
of freedom. His philosophic system is absolutely determin-
istic. Everything in the universe follows from something
else in a definite causal chain each link of which is neces-
sarily connected with the one preceding and the one
following.

God, or Substance, for Spinoza, is absolutely independ*

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

ent, self-caused and self-determined. God is wholly and
completely free. However, all finite objects and all thoughts
form two lines each interconnected in strict causal se-
quence. Thus, while the underlying substance of all things
and all thoughts is free, the individual thing or thought
cannot be free but is determined by its history, its past.
Thus, there cannot be any such thing as a free will. The
will, for Spinoza, is simply the soul affirming or denying
what is true and false. The intellect and the will are es-
sentially the same. The will is nothing more than an idea
which one might have affirming or denying itself. And the
affirmation is determined by the idea. Consequently the
will is under the dominance of the intellect and cannot
in any sense be free.

Further, the will can have no effect on the body. Both
body and mind are attributes of God or Substance, and
each is independent of the other.

Man, Spinoza holds, is fooled into thinking he is free be-
cause he does not see the chain of causes which determine
his action. Indeed, any object equally ignorant might think
that it was free. But when man comes to understand the
causal chain, he realizes that he is in no way free.

Spinoza also teaches that we have different stages of the
wiH. At one level are the passions. These are confused and
inadequate ideas. Here we will before the idea is complete
and definite. Adequate ideas result in will proper, the ade-
quate action upon ideas. As man attains to these adequate
ideas he is freed from his passions and acts in the light of
clear understanding. When a man knows, he is free from
hate, fear, anger and the like. But his will is always de-
termined by his understanding and therefore cannot be
thought of as free.

The Position of Locke, of Hume, and of Leibnitz

To ask whether a man's will is free or not is, according
to JOHN LOCKE, a foolish question. "It is as insignificant/*
he writes, "to ask whether a man's will be free as to ask
whether his sleep be swift or his virtue square." This is
true, he argues, because the will is the power of an in-

FATE VEBSUS FEEE "WHX 143

dividual to think his own actions and to prefer their
doing or not doing. If one is able to think about his actions
and is able to prefer one action over and above another,
he has will. On the other hand, freedom is also a power,
the power to do or not to do any particular thing in terms
of what he wills.

Man may have both powers. He may be able to think
clearly about his actions and reach a preference among
possible actions. Further, he may be able to do that which
he prefers or he may find himself unable to act in accord
with his preference. But these are two powers and must
be recognized as such, Locke urges.

God, Locke holds, has endowed man with certain desires
or uneasinesses of the mind for want of some absent good.
These desires determine the will. The individual deter-
mines to do that which is most pressing. He sets about to
realize the desire which is paramount. This he wills to do.

DAVID HUME held that the idea of necessity and the idea
of cause which men have are the result of observation of
the uniformity in nature. As men see the world about them,
they recognize that certain things always follow other
things. This leads them to reason that there is a necessary
causal connection between the two things.

Likewise, as men watch themselves they discover that
when they desire something, actions follow which are di-
rected toward securing that something.

Thus, because of these experiences, men move to the
conclusion that the universe is characterized by causal ne^
cessity and that there is a relation of cause and effect
between a man's desires and the actions in which he en-
gages. However, men find a necessity in the causal rela-
tionships of nature but do not find a similar necessity when
they study their own actions. While they believe that na-
ture is characterized by a rigid cause and effect relation-
ship, their own actions are not so rigidly determined by
their motives.

But, wherever there is uniformity of action, Hume holds,
there is necessity. There is uniformity in nature and there is
a like uniformity in man's actions. Consequently, we can

144 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT 3PHJLOSOPHEBS

inf er from one act to its cause just as we can infer from one
thing in nature to its cause. Man's actions result from his
character and are necessary results of that character. Give
him another character, and his actions wffl be different
Freedom, for Hume, is merely this necessary connection*
So long as man's actions arise from his own character, na-
ture, or desires, they are free. If, however, he acts be-
cause of some external compulsion contrary to his char-
acter of desires, he is not free.

For example, a man strikes another. If this action is a
result of his inner nature, his character or desire, it is
brought about necessarily from the nature which is his,
but he is free in so acting. However, if someone else forces
him to strike the individual against his own desire and
character, he is not free. In both instances there is neces-
sity. But, in the first case the necessity is that of the very
nature of the man acting, while, in the second case, tibe
necessity comes from without him and is not in accord with
his nature.

GOTTFRIED WDLHELM: LEIBNTTZ tackled the same prob-
lem as did Descartes. He realized that, in some way, phi-
losophy must reconcile the achievements of science and the
elements of Christianity which were considered valuable.
But, while Descartes conceived of one universal substance
and two attributes, Leibnitz believed in the existence of an
infinite number of minute units or substances, the monads.
^ Each monad, he held, is completely insulated from any
influences outside of itself. It cannot be determined by any-
toing other than that which it is. It "has no windows."
lUerefore, whatever it does is a result of its own nature
and not because of forces outside it.

Man, like all objects in nature, is composed of a number
of monads intricately organized. Since each monad is in-
flated from without and is thereby free from outside in-
fluences, so man must be free from such influences. How-
ever, just as the monad is determined from within by the
TT, ? ?** ***** nature > so man fe determined from
w?/ r y OWn mture ' ** own ^Prises and desires.
Will, for Leibnitz, is simply the conscious striving of an

FATE VERSUS FBEE WILI, 145

individual, striving that is guided by a clear idea. Man
knows what he wants, and strives to attain it This striving
is his will. Thus, will is always determined by the idea
which the individual has of what he wants. Choice is sim-
ply the selecting of the desire that is strongest Man is
never free, in any absolute sense of the term, to decide
for one action or for another regardless of his desires. He
must decide for the desire which is strongest, and must
strive to realize it through his actions. We will what our
nature tells us is best

Leibnitz believed that in this theory he had saved man
from the mechanism of science and made possible the reali-
zation of the values of Christian thought The monad was
not open to influence from the outside and therefore not
mechanically determined. Its actions were determined by
its own inner nature, and thus were free.

Fate and Free WiU According ta Voltaire and to Rousseau

In his earlier writings the great French propagandist of
the movement in philosophy foaown as the Enlightenment,
VOLTAIRE, taught a doctrine of the freedom of the will that
bordered on complete irresponsibility, but in his later works
we find him abandoning frfc for an almost equally com-
plete determinism. He wrote, "When I can do what I wiH,
I am free; but I will necessarily what I will*

There followed a long list of brilliant thinkers who, in-
fluenced more by the scientific side of the philosophies of
their predecessors, sought to prove that man was wholly
and completely a machine devoid of anything which might
in any sense be called freedom of the wilL They saw man
in all his parts a being similar to the intricate machines
which inventors were constructing. JOHN TOLAND, DAVID
HARTLEY, JOSEPH PBIESTLEY, LA METIBIE, BARON D*HOL-
BACH, and many others taught that thought is merely a
function of the brain and that the human individual is
wholly and completely determined by the play of forces in
the universe so that he is tossed here and there as these
forces meet and separate. He has nothing that could be

146 BASIC TEACB3NGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

called a will which might have power to shape these forces
to ends which might be his.

The general position of all the Enlightenment philoso-
phers was that man in all aspects is governed by the same
laws which govern the natural world. For them man was
just another, but more intricate and amusing, machine.

A bomb was dropped into the midst of this brilliant
group of thinkers by JEAN JACQUES ROUSSEAU. He took is-
sue with the basic positions of all these men when he af-
firmed that the truest characteristic of man was not the
scientific mind but the feeling heart. Man, for him, is not
a toy in the hands of natural laws, but is a free soul striving
to live according to the dictates of this freedom. Rousseau
saw in this trend toward the sciences the inevitable destruc-
tion of aH that man had come to believe was of most value.
Thus, he threw himself against this flood and sought to
stem the tide which threatened to engulf mankind.

Kant> Fichte, Schelling, Schopenhauer, and
Other German Thinkers

It is said that when KANT received his copy of Rous-
seau's Emile he was so fascinated by the arguments there
developed and the point of view taken that he neglected to
take his afternoon walk. To so neglect was almost a major
tragedy in the community since the old philosopher was so
prompt each day that villagers could set their watches by
his appearance at his door. It was Rousseau who stimu-
lated Kant to his great attempt to save man's freedom in a
world of science.

Kant took the position that, so long as one sticks to ex-
perience, there is no proof of freedom. In experience we
find necessary connections, cause and effect Thus, we are
not able to prove theoretically the existence of free will. So
far Kant was in agreement with the mechanists, those who
saw the world as an interlocking series of mechanical laws
and their operations. From the point of view of pure rea-
son there is no evidence to support a belief in free will.
But, Kant believed that the mind had the faculty of
Reason, a faculty engaged in bringing together the various

FATE VERSUS FBEE "WILL 147

processes, events, or occurrences into wholes or Ideas.
These Ideas, though not matters of experience, are legiti-
mate bases for man's reasoning. And, the results of such
reasoning are to be accepted as legitimate bases for beliefs
and actions.

The Idea of freedom is not to be found in experience.
Here we find only cause and effect ad fafinttum, on and on
as far as we can go. But, Kant argues, ft is legitimate for
us to go beyond experience to "transcendental ideas," ideas
created by Reason independently of experience.

Further, to preserve the moral life, it is necessary for
man to believe in freedom. This is a practical idea, a nec-
essary belief. Freedom of the will, then, is an idea which
man erects because of the demands of his moral nature. It
is necessary, and thus legitimate, even though it cannot
be proved by experience.

Man, then, for Kant, is a free agent. He is capable of
acting voluntarily so that his acts are not links in a chain of
natural causes. Man, a free agent, originates the act which,
when seen by the mind, is part of an intricate web of
cause and effect.

It is impossible, Kant held, ever to prove that the will is
free. Nevertheless, because such a belief is necessary, we
can act and live as if the will was free. When we so act
and live, we discover that certain moral insights are possi-
ble. For example, we are then able to hold each individual
responsible for his actions, and we are in a position to strive
for a better life. We are not drowned in complete moral
despair, not caught in the inevitable tangle of cause and
effect which characterizes the world of nature. Life be-
comes meaningful for us as human beings when we can be-
lieve that what we do is the result of free choice, and has,
thereby, a moral meaning. The moral consciousness of man
implies that the will is free.

Kant, in this position, makes a place for the values which
the science of his day was fast pushing out of the picture.
He agreed with the scientists that experience left no room
for these values. But, they were so necessary that we are
justified in acting as though they were reaL

148 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

Basic to this position was the thesis that there is a higher
truth than that of the sciences, the truth of the moral na-
ture of man* The moral law within man is a guarantee of
the world beyond the senses, a world in which freedom
applies. Faith in this world was Kant's way of escape from
the deadening world of experience.

FICHTE began his thinking at this point. Fundamental to
Fichte's point of view was the belief fa freedom, the idea
that the will, or as he called it *the ego" (meaning the
*T), is not a link in the scientific chain of cause and effect,
but is free, self-determining activity. This will is, for him,
the only real thing in the universe.

The ego, being pure activity, creates the world which it
knows. My world is not something given to me from the
outside, but is a creation of the pure, active, free ego, of
which I am a part. The Absolute ego, or God, is free and
sdf-determined Each individual ego, or will, is a part of
this Absolute ego and is likewise free and creative. What
I do, as an individual, is simply the Absolute ego acting,
and, as it is free, so am I free.

If, some will ask, what I do is merely the realization of
the purposes of the Absolute ego, am I not a slave of this
ego? Fichte's answer was to the effect that we can decide
whether we will be blind tools of this Absolute ego or will
be conscious, willing instruments of its purpose. In making
this choice we, as individuals, are free. But, having made
the choice, we are no longer free. My freedom lies, then,
in my choice as to whether I will willingly or unwillingly
serve the Absolute ego. It is freedom of choice.

SCHF.T.T.TNG took very much the same view as Fichte. For
him, likewise, the ground of the universe was a creative,
free, living ego or principle of which everything is an ex-
pression. As man sets up his idea freedom, he reads free-
dom into the universe and comes to know the Absolute ego
as a principle of freedom. As we live a life of creative
freedom, he held, we realize that the universe is at heart
free. "Freedom,* he writes, "can be comprehended only
by freedom/*
In the philosophy of SCHLEIERMACHER an attempt is

FATE VERSUS FBEE WILL, 149

made to salvage human freedom from the doctrine of the
Absolute. Here the individual egos are thought of as in the
Absolute. They are parts of the universe, and, thus, are
controlled by the universe as a whole. They must fit into
the universe, conform to its laws and requirements. How-
ever, each individual is endowed with its own special and
particular abilities or talents. If these are not allowed to
develop and reach full bloom, the universe will not develop
to its fullest. Therefore, the individual is free to develop
itself, to grow in terms of its inner nature or talents.

Schleiermacher, because of bis basic theory of the de-
pendence of the individual upon the "world-ground" or
Absolute, was in grave danger of so merging the individual
with this Absolute as to leave him wholly determined by
the laws of the Absolute. He saved himself from this com-
plete determinism by putting emphasis upon the specific
contribution which each ego must make to the develop-
ment of the whole if the Absolute is to realize itself fully.

HEGEL held that the universe is a process of evolution in.
which that which was inherent at the beginning is finally
realized. In this realization the whole becomes itself to the
fullest. The rose, for example, is inherent in the seed, and is
the result of the process of evolution from seed to rose.
However, the seed is not fully itself until the rose has
bloomed. This is true of the universe, Hegel believed.

Since God is, for Hegel, the living, moving reason of the
world, he becomes fully conscious and the universe be-
comes fully realized only in the minds of human beings.
The self-conscious individual is the fullest realization of the
universe.

But this individual must be free. Freedom is inherent in
the universe from the beginning and is realized fully in a
human being in a society which makes for freedom. Prog-
ress, for Hegel, is the development of the consciousness of
freedom.

Hegel saw freedom as the end and goal of his dialectical
process, a process of development from the simplest and
most primitive to the Absolute Mind. Man is free, but he is
free to realize the nature of the universe. In realizing this

15O BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

nature, lie is realizing himself. Therefore, man is free to
realize himself to the fullest,

HEBBAOT refused to follow the lead of Fichte, Schelling,
and Hegel in defending the doctrine of freedom. He could
see no freedom for man. His ambition was to build a
science of the human mind which would be parallel to the
physical sciences. In endeavoring to do this, he believed
that he had found certain definite laws of human behavior
which were so absolute as to allow no freedom on the part
of the individual Everything, he argued, follows fixed laws,
the laws of a definite science.

On the other hand SCHOPENHAUER taught that the heart
of the universe is wflL Striving or will is to be found in,
everything, the principle of its existence. As we move
from the rock, for example, to man, we see will becoming
conscious of itself. Will is constant, persistent, eternal in
everything.

This will to live, will to be, is the cause of all struggle,
suffering, and evil in the world. la such a world, to be
moral is to have pity for others. Sympathy prompts good
acts. But, if man can evidence sympathy and remorse, his
will must be free. Indeed, he is free to negate his will.

Schopenhauer sees man's will as the basis of all evil, in
that it makes man selfish. He wills what he wills and thus
is self-centered. But he is also able to show sympathy, to
suffer remorse for his deeds and those of others. In this he
denies his wilL Man is happy and at peace when, and only
when, he has suppressed his selfish desires, when he has
denied, negated his will, when he wills not to will.

The Position of MM and of Green

JOHN STUART MTT,T. agrees with the views of Hume when
he asserts that all the confusion in modern thought as re-
gards the problem of free will is due to a misunderstanding
of terms. It is true, he points out, that human actions are
the result of many factors. There is a sequence of events
which, if wholly known, will enable one to predict the fu-
ture acts of an individual.

One of these causes or factors is the desire of the indi-
vidual. It is possible for me to resist other factors, to desire

FATE VEBSUS FREE WILL Igl

something to be different and to work toward that end.
This fact makes possible a sense of moral freedom. Without
this ability to desire, and the power of desire in shaping re-
sults, it would not be possible for us to hold our fellows
guilty of their sins. A fully deterministic universe has no
place for praise or blame. But, Mill sees the basis for praise
and blame in the fact that one of the causes of an act is the
desire of the individual.

Freedom, then, is a fact of human existence, according
to Mill.

THOMAS HELL GBEEN saw that past experiences deter-
mined the factors which an individual accepted as good
and those he accepted as evil. But, even in these past ex-
periences, man has been a factor, and has, thus, had a part
in determining his experiences. Therefore, he is responsible
for the kind of good which appeals to him now.

Further, Green finds man able to think of a better land
of world. He is able to build ideals of and for himself,
visions of what he may strive to become. Indeed, having
constructed these ideals, man is able to strive to realize
them, strive to be better in the future. Therefore, Green
argued, man is free, free to will a better existence.

This ability to will, to strive, and in some degree to ac-
complish, makes man a moral agent and responsible for his
acts. Man is free, therefore he must accept responsibility
for his deeds.

The Views of James and Dewey

WILLIAM JAMES found in man a will to believe, and
this he put at the base of his thinking. Every system of
philosophy, he argued, depends in the last analysis upon
the will to believe. Man wants to believe in a certain way,
because the belief seems to satisfy him most completely.
This is the pragmatic test. It fits and works.

Now, if the will to believe is so fundamental, man cannot
be bound down by immutable laws and conditions. He
must be a part of the picture in a real sense. Thus, he
must be free. Man, in this world, is free to build his ideals
and to risk all on their realization.

JOHN DEWEY goes even further. He conceives of a world

152 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

which, is in the making, and man as doing some o the
creating. Unless this is all a sham, a play before an audi-
ence, man must be free to make decisions and to have his
decisions count in the ultimate nature of things. Human
wants, desires, willings are determiners of the universe.

Though, subject to the factors of the universe in which
man lives, he is able to inquire, think, plan, reach decisions
and act upon them with the result that the universe is
changed by his action. For Dewey, the pivot of progress
is the intelligent human being freely foreseeing the possi-
ble consequences of events and throwing himself into the
stream in order to, in a degree at least, change the course
of the stream so that it conforms more fully to has ideals.

Thus, throughout the history of human thought man
has struggled with the question: Am I a mere pawn on the
chessboard of universal forces over which I can have no
control, or am I able to determine my fate, my destiny, to
some degree at least? Philosophers have taken both sides of
this issue, and many have ranged themselves between the
two extremes. By far the great majority of philosophers
have endeavored to find some freedom for man. Neverthe-
less, there have been many who have more or less willingly
turned man over to some inscrutable fate. But, the human
mind cannot long be content to place itself wholly in the
hands of fate. It inevitably rises up to proclaim its freedom
and challenge whatever forces there be to beat it down.

Inevitably death must overtake man. The pessimists
stand up to assert that death has proven their point, and
that man, no matter how he may protest, is at last forced
to bow to a fate which he can no longer challenge. But the
optimists will answer back that death is no defeat, but is
actually a victory for the will of man.

Though beaten down time and again by forces in the
universe, man rises up again and again to proclaim

I am the master of my -fate,
1 am the captain of my soul.

Chapter VI
THE SOUL AND IMMORTALITY

EMPEDOCLES PLATO ARISTOTLE PLOTTNUS

AUGUSTINE AQUINAS BRUNO

DESCARTES SPINOZA LOCKE LEIBNITZ

KANT SCHLEIERMACHER SCHOPENHAUER

LOTZE COMTE JAMES BEWEY

Is death the end of human existence? Or is there more
for man in a land beyond the grave? Can we find in
man a soul, something distinct from his body, which
can survive the event of death and live eternally?
What can we believe about heaven and hell?

Death is a universal experience. All men, whether great
or small, wealthy or poor, high or low, must inevitably
move toward that hour when life will cease and the body
return to the dust from which it came. To the eye, this is
the end, the finale, the conclusion- The body, if left to it-
self, will disintegrate and disappear, so that, in time, every
trace of its existence will be gone.

And so it has been since Efe first appeared on this earth.
Living is but a short span and is soon done with. Death
writes "Finis" to life, and the living of yesterday is soon for-
gotten. Man is born, grows, struggles, dreams, plans, and
builds, only to surrender at last to death.

But the human mind has never been content to let the
matter rest here. Throughout the history of mankind there
has persisted a conviction, sometimes dim and at other

154 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

times very vivid, that death cannot be the end, that the
grave is not a victory of man's foes, that death does not
inflict a cosmic sting. In every age there have been mil-
lions firm in the belief that what is truest in humanity per-
sists in some form or state after death.

Early man had his dreams. In these he roamed far and
wide, hunted and fished, and had many adventures and
endured many perils. But, when he awoke his friends as-
sured him that he had not moved from his cave or tent.
Since this happened so often, he came to believe that there
was something about him which could free itself from the
body and live its own life. This was probably the begin-
ning of a belief in the human soul.

But, if man had this soul, other things must also have
souls. The early men believed, as we have pointed out, that
all nature was alive. The tree had a soul or spirit; the river
had a soul; and everything else in primitive man's universe
had a soul, a spirit which could leave the body and return
to it after going where it would and doing what it cared.

It was a very early belief that what affected the body
had little or no effect upon the soul. The freedom which
the soul enjoyed to come and go and the special nature of
the soul made it immune*, more or less, to the happenings
of the body. Thus, it was but natural that man should be-
lieve that the soul survived the body and continued to be
active long after the body had been lost.

In this way mankind gradually built up the belief in the
human soul as something distinct from the body, and in the
immortality of this soul, the existence of the soul after death
had destroyed the body.

But, for many early peoples this immortality of the soul
was not necessarily eternal. Having left the body, the soul,
some believed, remained near by for some time, returning
to the place of the body at intervals. Therefore, food,
drink, and other necessities were placed with the body so
that the soul migiht be cared for.

Other peoples believed that the soul left one body only
to take up its abode in another body. Here we find the idea
that the former life of the soul determined what kind of a

THE SOUL AND IMMORTALITY 155

body it entered. A good soul entered a better body or one
higher in the scale, while a bad soul had to enter a body
farther down the scale.

Still others believed that the soul went to a place of
shades and ghostly forms, there to pine for the world of
men. The early Greelcs and the ancient Hebrews, among
others, held to such a belief. Their dead spent eternity in a
dark, uninviting, and cheerless region in misery and re-
morse.

The Soul as Viewed by the Early Greek Philosophers

Most of the early Greek thinkers built their theories of
the soul and of immortality upon the popular beliefs which
were native to the culture in which they lived. That all
nature was alive, few questioned. Nor did they question the
belief that man had a soul which was, in some way, the
real part of him. The earliest Greek philosophers thought
of this soul, as the least material form of the particular
substance out of which everything in the universe was
made.

For example, ANAXIMENES, who taught that the under-
lying substance of the universe was air, likewise held that
the soul was very thin or rarefied air and that this sub-
stance was the thing which held the individual together.
When it left the body disintegration set in and the body
was destroyed.

PYTHAGORAS, and his followers, the Pythagoreans, held
that the destiny of the soul after leaving the body was
determined by die life in the body. Consequently, they
prepared long and involved rules which each man should
know and follow with the utmost severity in order to in-
sure a desirable existence after death.

In the teachings of HERACLXTCTS we find the belief that
the vital principle of the universe is the ever-living fire.
This is, also, the principle of life or soul of the individual
human being. The soul is the finest (most rarefied) form
of fire, ever-changing, but never being destroyed. To this
basic belief, Heraditus added the idea that souls varied in
quality. Some souls are very dry and warm. These are the

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

best souls since they are most like the great cosmic soul,
the soul of the universe, the purest fire. Other souls are not
so dry and not so warm. They are less like the cosmic fire
and, thus, are less good.

Souls, according to EMPEDOCLES, leave one body at its
death only to enter another body and continue to live.
This is known as the doctrine of the transmigration of souls.
Instead of leaving the body and going to some place re-
served for souls, or instead of being destroyed with the
body, this doctrine holds that the soul migrates, moves on,
from one body to another when its present abode is no
longer habitable. This belief was general among members
of a famous early religious group, the Orphics, who influ-
enced many of the early thinkers and had a wide following
during the pre-Christian and early Christian eras.

LEUCEPPUS, DEMOCRTTUS, and the other Atomists, taught
that, just as the entire world is composed of atoms, or very
tiny bits of matter, so the soul is composed of the finest,
purest, most perfect fire atoms. These atoms are, they held,
scattered throughout the body, a soul atom placed be-
tween two other atoms. While man lives, he breathes soul
atoms in and out When he dies, the soul atoms are scat-
tered throughout the universe. The body is likened to a jar
in which are many soul atoms. When the jar is broken at
death, the soul atoms are spilled out.

But these atoms are not lost or destroyed. Indeed, for
these philosophers, the destruction of atoms is impossible.
Soul atoms may be scattered, but they enter into other
bodies, rearranging themselves and thus creating another
being. Change, these men believed, is not absolute. We
cannot create or destroy in any real sense of the term.
Actually the only change possible is that of reassembling
of atoms into new patterns or beings. Soul atoms live for-
ever, but are constantly being rearranged in the universe
just as are all other atoms.

Democritus taught, as did some of the early Atomists,
that the soul is to be identified with reason, the thinking
and j'udging part of man.

THE SOT7I, AND EMCMORTAUIT 157

The Soul and Immortality According to
Plato and Aristotle

PLATO distinguishes between the soul of the world and
individual souls of human beings. In his book, the Timaeus,
he describes, in somewhat mythological terms, how the
Demiurge, or world architect, endowed the world with a
soul, the cause of motion, beauty, order and harmony. This
world soul is between the world of ideas and the world of
things which we see and experience. It acts according to
definite laws, the laws of its own nature, and is the cause
of aU law, harmony, order, o life, mind, and knowledge.
This Demiurge also created, according to Plato, souls of
aU the planets and all individual souls. These individual
souls, he taught, are eternal, having existed before they
came into bodies. In this pre-existence each soul saw aU
pure ideas in a realm of perfect ideas. But, coming into the
body is like entering a prison. The body clouds the soul
and it forgets afl that it has seen. It is pulled down and
debased by the body.

' Thus, the goal of the soul, Plato held, is to free itself
from the body in order that it may see truth dearly. Fur-
ther, by certain experiences, the soul recalls the pure ideas
which it saw in its pre-existent state. Knowledge, then, is
not a new thing for the soul, but is simply a recall of what
has been forgotten because of the body.

* The human soul, then, is a part of pure reason. But it is
debased by the body. However, since it existed before it
came into the body, it may free itself from the body and
continue to exist after the body has been destroyed. The
soul, for Plato, is immortal.

4 Plato offers several proofs of the immortality of the hu-
man soul. In the first place, he holds, the soul is in abso-
lutely simplest form and thus cannot be divided or de-
stroyed. Further, the soul is life and it is not possible that
life can become not-life. Life inust always remain life, and
not-life must always remain not-life. Neither can become
the other.

Having a desire to possess a body, the soul, which had

158 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GEEAT PHTLOSOPHEBS

occupied a star, leaves its heavenly abode and enters into
matter, or body. From then it has to struggle to free itself
from the body. If it succeeds, it will return to its star and
dwell there forever. But, if it fails, it will sink lower and
lower, moving from one body to another. Here again is the
familiar early idea of the transmigration of the soul.

The ultimate goal of life, according to Plato, is release of
the soul from the body so that it may return to its star and
there spend eternity contemplating the beautiful and pure
world of ideas. But, whether or not the soul succeeds in be-
coming free from matter and its evils, it cannot be de-
stroyed. The eternal pre-existence and immortality of the
soul is a fundamental doctrine of Plato.

ABISTOTLE taught that soul is to be found wherever there
is life and, since everywhere in nature are to be found signs
of life, soul must be throughout nature. If we examine na-
ture we will find, so said Aristotle, a series of souls begin-
ning with the lowest or plant souls and moving upward
to the highest or human souk. Plant souls are concerned
with eating and digesting food, or nutrition, and with the
growth of the body as weD as with reproduction. The soul
of man has additional and higher powers.

As we study man, Aristotle held, we discover that his
soul is very much like that of a plant in that it governs the
life functions of the individual But it also resembles the
animal soul in that by means of it man is able to receive
sense impressions and deal with them. It is by means of
this function of the soul that man comes into contact with
and knows the world outside of his body.

However, the human soul is higher, in that it has the
power of thinking in terms of concepts, is able to think
about the inner nature of things. Thus, the soul of man has
the power of reason. This reason perceives concepts just as
the lower part of the soul perceives objects in the world.
Here Aristotle divides reason into that which he calls
passive reason and that which he calls creative reason. The
former is possibility which is turned into actuality by the
latter. Just as throughout the universe Aristotle believed
that matter and form were together so that form was con-

THE SOXJL AND IMMORTAUTT 159

stantly realizing itself in matter, a doctrine which we have
discussed previously, so in the souL Here he taught that
creative reason was the form and passive reason the matter.

Creative reason, the form, existed, he held, before either
body or soul were created. While passive reason, or the
matter part of the soul, is connected with the body and
will perish when the body is destroyed, creative reason is
not influenced by the body, is immaterial, and will con-
tinue to live after the death of the body. This creative rea-
son is a spark of the divinity, a part of God, which comes
into the soul from without and is not influenced by the
baser side of the souL

Since all but the creative reason perishes with the body,
personal immortality is impossible in Aristotle's system*
The only part of the soul which survives death is actually
part of God and simply returns to God. All else perishes,

The Position of the Later Greek Thinkers

Since the Epicureans based their metaphysics on the
work of Democritus, they were logically bound to hold
that the soul is composed of atoms just like all other things
in the universe. But, the atoms of the soul are extremely
fine (thin) and are of various kinds* There are atoms of
fire, air, breath, and very fine matter. These atoms are
scattered throughout the body and are controlled by a
rational part which, according to the Epicureans, is lo-
cated in the breast Further, all sensations of the body are
a result of the soul.

Since the soul is, for these philosophers, material, it can-
not be immortal. When the body dies and disintegrates,
the soul atoms are scattered throughout the universe.
Death, then, is the end for both body and souL As Lu-
cretius, one of the later Epicureans, wrote, "A fool will not
make more out of the hereafter than he has made of this
life."

The Stoics held that man is both soul and body, and
that the soul is a spark from the divine fire controlled by a
ruling part situated in the heart. It is a sort of blank tablet
upon which things write by means of impressions just as

l6o BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

one might write on a wax slab* This is the source of our
knowledge.

The soul of man, the Stoics taught, is the source of what
we know as perception, judgment, feeling, and willing. At
its best, it becomes rational, able to think in terms of con-
cepts or ideas. Thus, the soul makes it possible for man to
deliberate and make choices before he acts.

Various Stoics held different ideas of immortality. Some
taught that only the good and wise souls continued to exist
after death of the body. All others perished with the body.
Other Stoics held that all souk, regardless of their good-
ness or badness, lived until the end of the world.

The Views of Plotinus

In PiLornNus we have an attempt to interpret the teach-
ing of Plato in terms of the later religious interests. In doing
this, Plotinus becomes one of the school known as Neo-
platonism or the new Platonism. For Plotinus the human
soul is part of a world soul. At first this human soul was
in a realm where it saw the pure world soul and knew all
that was good. But it turned toward matter and fell be-
cause of its desire to mould matter.

From this state of degradation, the soul must struggle
to free itself from matter. If it fails, it must, at the time of
the death of the body, enter another body of a man, a
plant, or an animal.. However, to the extent it succeeds in
freeing itself from matter, it returns to God and thereby
realizes itself.

Being part of the world soul, which is itself an emana-
tion from God, the human soul is immortal, and will con-
tinue to live after death. If it has not purified itself, it will
continue to live in another body. If, however, it has been
purified, it returns to the God of which it is a part and lives
as does God.

The Early and Medieval Christian Conception of the Soul

Christianity, as interpreted by the Apologists, taught

that the soul and body were separate things, and that the

soul was that part of the individual which most nearly

THE SOUL AND IMMORTALITY l6l

represented the good in the universe. Thus, for them, the
soul was immortal but continued to live in a resurrected
body. Death, for these thinkers, was not a separation o
body and soul, but rather a purification of the body so that
it might be a fit place for the soul to dwell in throughout
eternity.

This point of view was developed further by AUGUSTINE
who taught that man is a union of soul and body. But, for
Lim, the body is a prison house of the soul, the source of
all evil. The soul, on the other hand, is immaterial (not
made of matter) and is wholly different and distinct from
tike body. Although he taught that the soul directs and
forms the body, he was unable to teH how this happens.

Further, Augustine taught that each individual has his
own soul, and that it is not an emanation from God. A
soul does not exist before the body in which it dwells. How
the soul was created was a mystery. However, after the
soul came into being, it continued to live forever. The hu-
man soul is, for Augustine, immortal. Nevertheless, the life
of the soul after the death of the body may be either happy
or miserable, depending upon how the individual lived
during his earthly existence. If during this earthly exist-
ence he has won the favor of God, he is given blessedness.
If not, he is eternally condemned to misery.

Throughout the so-called Dark Ages, in the teachings of
the Schoolmen and their followers, the belief was held
generally that man possesses a soul which is distinct from
the body but which may be, in some way or other, in-
fluenced by the body. Indeed, the eternal destiny of the
soul was thought to depend to a degree at least upon its
experiences while in the body. That the soul was immor-
tal was not questioned Whether it had an existence before
it entered the body, as those influenced by Plato had held,
or whether it came into being at the time the body was
created, there was no doubt that it lived eternally after
the body perished.

If good, the soul was rewarded by being permitted to
continue its existence in a realm of complete blessedness.
But, if the individual possessing the soul had lived an evil

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

life, the soul was condemned to eternal suffering and tor-
ment. Immortality was certain in either case. Since the
body was thought of as a source of evil and a danger to
the soul, most thinkers held that the soul should, in so far
as possible, free itself from the body and its temptations.
In many instances, men sought ways to torture and deny
the body so that the soul could live its own good life and
thus prepare itself for an eternity of happiness.

THOMAS AQUINAS was the philosopher who brought this
general point of view into a complete and thorough state-
ment. He taught that the human soul was created by God*
This soul was, for him, immaterial, the intellectual and
vital principle of the body. This intellectual soul was added
to the body at birth. While there are other souls, the hu-
man soul is different from all these in that it is intelligent
and can will.

This intelligent soul is not dependent upon the body fpr
its existence or functioning, but can continue to act after
the body has perished. Further, the soul continues to exist
just as it did while the body was alive. Thus, it forms for
itself a new body, a spiritual body through which it func-
tions throughout eternity.

This point of view was the pattern which orthodox Cath-
olic Christianity accepted and made fundamental to its be-
lief. Later Christian thinkers did not alter it in any signifi-
cant detail. Heresies came forward from time to time, but
were beaten back by the strength of the orthodox position.

The Soul According to the Forerunners of the Renaissance

LXJDOVICO VTVES, forerunner of the interest in science
which marked the Renaissance, urged that doctrines
should be abandoned and man should make a careful
scientific study of the soul to discover, not its essence, but
the manner in which it acts. BERNARDINO TELESIO at-
tempted to explain the soul mechanically and materially
in a way resembling the early Greeks. He held that the
soul was a very fine substance, resembling heat, centered in
the brain but diffused throughout the body through the
nerves. As such, he believed the soul caused the parts of

THE SOUL AND IMMORTALITY 163

the body to remain together and to move as an individual.
Besides this material soul, he held that an immortal soul
existed, a soul added to the material soul by God.

GIORDANO BRUNO taught that the soul was an immortal
monad or uncaused element similar to the monads or ele-
ments composing everything in the universe.

These men, standing at the opening of the new age of
mankind, the Modern Period, were not contented to ac-
cept the theories of the soul developed by either the an-
cients or the medieval Churchmen. They felt that these
earlier theories and ideas did not stand the tests of science.
Consequently, these men sought a theory of the soul and of
immortality which would square with the new learning
that was flooding in upon the age.

The Views of Bacon and Hobbes

The attempt to break with the past is clearly seen in the
writings of FRANCIS BACON. He taught that the human
soul was actually two souls, one divine or rational and the
other irrational. The divine soul was, he held, a matter for
religion to handle. The irrational soul, however, was open
to study and understanding by man using the methods of
science. By these methods Bacon believed that we would
find this soul to be material but invisible, residing in the
head and running along the nerves to all parts of the body.
This soul was the seat of reason, imagination, understand-
ing, memory, appetite, and will.

HOBBES broke completely with the past. He held that
the entire universe was material and that in such a universe
there could be nothing corresponding to the human soul as
described by earlier philosophers. His materialistic posi-
tion left no room for an immaterial soul that could sur-
vive the disintegration of the body.

The Views of Descartes and Spinoza

DESCARTES felt that the logical result of science was a
mechanical and materialistic universe, but he was equally
certain that this was not the complete explanation of the
universe. Consequently, he was anxious to discover a way

164 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

by which he could take account of all that science seemed
to demand and at the same time hold to the existence of
the human souL The result of this desire was his theory of
one absolute substance, God, and two relative substances,
mind and body. Having made this distinction, it was easy
for him to maintain that the soul was distinct from the
body and therefore not subject to the same laws as the
body.

The soul, he taught, is a unit or single principle which
expresses itself in numerous ways. Among these are willing,
feeling, and reasoning. Thus, the soul is seen as acting
and also as having passions.

Since this soul is part of the Whole, part of God or
Absolute Substance, it cannot be thought of as disappear-
ing, but continues as long as God continues. Death of the
body is but a change, and the soul, being free of the body
and never actually influenced by it, is not affected by its
disintegration.

Although Descartes held that God is the only substance,
he felt it necessary to make a clear separation between
soul and body and thus he left an ultimate dualism. This
did not satisfy his followers. Two ways of solving the prob-
lem were easily evident. On the one hand, a philosopher
might turn away from the body and concentrate upon the
soul. MAUEBRANCHE did just this. The soul was, for him,
the only reality, and what we think of the body is merely
an idea of the body in the soul. This is pure idealism.
Hobbes had taken the other position: to deny the exist-
ence of the soul and concentrate upon a materialistic view
of the universe.

It remained for SPINOZA to offer a solution of the prob-
lem without sacrificing either the results of natural science
or the soul. Since, for him, God was the only substance,
the soul could be nothing else than a mode of God, As
such, it was identified with tie spiritual side of the uni-
verse. Soul was perceived when one looked at Substance
from the side of mind rather than from the side of body.
Thus, it was subject only to spiritual laws and not to the
laws of science or of the material world.

THE SOUL AND IMMOBTALITT 165

Further, as a mode of the absolute substance, the soul
could not be immortal in an individual sense, but it did
have immortality as a mode of God which could not be
destroyed any more than God could be destroyed, If it be
a mode of God, it would of necessity continue even though
the visible form of the body, also a mode of God, changed.

Locke, Berkeley, Hume, and Leibnitz

The position of JOHN LOCKE resembles very much that
of Descartes. He thought of the universe as being com-
posed of two substances, bodies and souls. The souls, for
him, are spiritual substances with the power of perceiving,
thinking, and willing. Man arrives at the idea of soul by
combining the various operations of the human mind, such
as willing, knowing, and the like, and supposing a support
for them. This support or ground is soul substance. His
argument for this is: ^Having as clear and distinct ideas
in us of thinking as of solidity, I know not why we may
not as well allow a thinking thing without solidity, i.e.,
immaterial, to exist, as a sqlid thing without thinking, i.e.,
matter, to exist, especially since it is no harder to conceive
how thinking should exist without matter than how mat-
ter should think/* The soul is this immaterial thing which
thinks.

This soul of man is both active and passive for Locke.
It is able to influence and move bodies and, at the same
time, it is influenced by bodies so that it has ideas. Thus,
the soul interacts with bodies.

That the soul is immortal, lives after death of the body,
is, for Locke, a matter of faith, and not anything of which
we can have a clear and distinct idea. It is above reason,
but can be believed on faith.

Mind and soul are terms used interchangeably by
BERKELEY. The universe, as we have seen, is, for him, all
mind or spirit. Following Locke's position that all we can
know are our ideas, Berkeley takes the thesis that mind,
the creator and source of ideas, is all that exists. Ideas
which are not the creation of the individual mind are the
creation of God who is also mind. Thus, man's soul is the

l66 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

beginning and end of the universe. And, of course, it can-
not die but wiH live on as part of the spiritual essence of
the universe.

HUME, carrying lie Lockian position to its logical con-
clusion, as be saw it, beld that we can bave no certain
knowledge either of material or spiritual substance. We
cannot know that either the outer world or the soul exists.
AH we know is that there is a succession of ideas, one fol-
lowing another. That there is a ground or support of these
ideas, a soul which has them, cannot be known. We must
therefore be agnostic (that is, without definite conviction)
as regards the souL

No investigation, Hume beld, will reveal an immaterial,
indivisible, imperishable soul-substance. He writes, **When
I enter intimately upon what I call myself, I always stum-
ble on some particular perception or other, of heat or cold*
light or shade, love or hatred, pain or pleasure. I never
catch myself, at any time, without a perception, and never
can observe anything but the perception.** Mind, then, is
nothing more than a succession or jumble of perceptions.
Thus, any idea of the immortality of the soul is wholly
without foundation and cannot be accepted.

This line of reasoning was pure skepticism. As such it
could not satisfy thinking men. Rather than accept it at its
face value, philosophers were certain that somewhere
along the line reaching from Locke to Hume there was
something wrong, something important omitted. Thus,
they set about searching for the mistake, the missing part
which would make an entirely different picture.

The position of LEIBNITZ seemed to many to offer more
promise than the skepticism of Hume. The universe, for
Leibnitz, is composed of an infinite number of monads or
units of force. Even the soul is such a substance, a unit of
spiritual force. Indeed, the soul atom is the model of all
monads in the universe*

The human organism differs from all other beings in
that it contains in addition to other monads a "queen
monad" or soul, which is the guide or controlling monad
of all the other monads which make up the organism. This

TOE SOUL AND IMMORTAUTJT l6/

soul monad organizes the monads of tie organism into a
unity, a whole. But, this control which the soul monad
has over all other monads of the hody is not a matter of
direct influence. No monad can influence another. Rather,
God has so created all monads that in man there is a pre-
established harmony between soul monad and other mon-
ads. As we see it, the soul monad seems to control other
monads just as one man might control another. But this is
an illusion. Actually the two act together because of this
pre-existent harmony.

The soul monad, just as all other monads, develops and
moves toward self-realization because of its own nature,
because of what it is internally.

Further, all knowledge comes to the soul monad not
from without, but from within itself. It is implicit within
the soul and is a matter of the development of what is
latent in the very nature of the soul itself. Experience sim-
ply stirs the soul to realization of what is within it

No monad can be destroyed, and this is therefore true
of the soul monad. It is eternal, and therefore lives on even
though the monads which make up a particular body sep-
arate at death. The soul, then, is immortal.

During the i8th century the influence of Leibnitz was
strong in Germany, where philosophers were striving to
prove the existence of the soul and its immortality. How-
ever, in England, where the influence of Locke, Berkeley,
and Hume was dominant, there was a trend toward a
mechanistic theory of man and his universe. Here the idea
that man was nothing more than a machine was prominent.
Of course, such, an idea left no room for the conception of
a soul. Men like Toland and Hartley strove to show that
any idea of the soul was out of the question.

The Soul and Immortality According to Kant

It was KANT who drew the many strands of thought to-
gether into a system which has proved to be one of the
most important accomplishments in the history of human
thought. Kant held that the understanding cannot know
anything but that which is experienced. However, reason

l68 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

can go beyond this and conceive of a world of which we
can have no actual experience. Thus it transcends, rises
above experience, and gives us transcendent principles.

Reason gives man an idea of soul as the summation of
all mental processes* Although we can never experience
the soul, the idea of soul has value and therefore it is
legitimate for us to think of it

Since there can be no knowledge without a knower, it is
legitimate for us to conclude that there is such a thing as
a soul, and act as if it existed. Although we cannot prove
the existence of an immortal soul, we may act as though
one existed since there is real value in so doing. Kant held
that this idea has regulative use in that it unifies many of
our concepts, it systematizes many of our concepts or ideas.
The Idea of a soul serves as a focal point to which we
may refer our conscious experiences.

Further, the idea of the soul has ethical value. It is a
result of the moral law and serves as a basis for moral life.
The moral law, which we have discussed previously, de-
mands the good will, one so regulated that it acts always
in such a way that its action might well become universal
in principle at least. This good wiH must be realizable. But,
man cannot become absolutely good at any moment dur-
ing his mortal existence. Consequently, this principle makes
the immortality of the soul necessary so that the demands
of the moral law may be met. During this endless time
made necessary and possible, the human soul goes on and
on to perfection, to a complete realization of the demands
of the moral law.

Fichte, Schlelermacher, Herbart, and Schopenhauer
Kant's contention that the moral law is the basis for act-
ing as though there is a supersensible world, a world be-
yond that of science, of experience, was the starting point
of the philosophy of RCHTE. On this principle, Fichte and
those who followed him built what has become known as
post-Kantian idealism. The ego, or will, for Fichte, is the
source, the creator of the world that we know. Man can
understand only that which he has created.

THE SOUL, AND IMMORTALITY l6g

But, the ego is pure activity, universal reason, an ab-
solute principle different from the ego of each individual.
It is the basis for the individual ego, the ego of each per-
son who lives. It is a universal life process dominating every
individual consciousness. This ego is broken up into bits
which are the egos of individual persons just as light
might be broken up into bits but is not broken off from the
source. Thus, that which is the individual self is but a
manifestation of the universal ego or creative principle.

This individual ego, because of the moral law which it
finds within itself, as Kant had held, must go on struggling
and therefore must be immortal. It is the part of the indi-
vidual which others had called the soul and it cannot be
thought of as dying with the body.

Though unwilling to accept the doctrines of idealism to
the same extent as Fichte, SCHLEIERMACHER. did, however,
believe that the individual ego has an independence which
makes it self-determining. It is able to develop its own par-
ticular talent and thus contribute to the development of
the Whole or the Absolute of which it is a part. But, even
this freedom is not enough to admit of immortality of the
ego or soul. The only immortality which Schleiermacher
is willing to admit is that of union with the infinite. The
soul, for him, is immortal when it becomes "eternal in
every moment of time."

HERBART opposed the entire idealistic point of view. For
him, there are many simple, unchangeable "reals" or sub-
stances which combine to form objects. The soul, he
taught, is a real which may fee characterized as simple,
absolute, timeless, and spaceless. The body of a man is a
mass of reals with the soul established in the brain. Al-
though all souls are essentially alike, they do differ in
development due to the nature of the body in which each
soul resides.

As a soul bumps up against another soul sensations arise
which are organized in the soul and form its content.
Originally the soul is empty, and its furnishings are sensa-
tions which result as the soul seeks to preserve itself in
contact with other souls.

170 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

Since the world of reals is unchanging and the only
change is a mixing and remixing of reals, the soul does not
disappear when the body goes to pieces, but continues to
exist.

The "will" of SCHOPENHAUER corresponds to the soul o
other philosophers. It is the *thing-in-itselF of Kant, the
foundation beneath all experience, all things. And the indi-
vidual will is immortal in that it is part of the universal
will. At death the individual will ceases to be individual as
a particular expression of the universal will. But will does
not die. It is basic to all the universe, and will continue to
be forever.

The external world, according to RUDOLF HERMANN
LOTZE, is a creation of the soul in the soul. This soul is
situated in the brain and can contact the body only in the
brain. While the body is alive, the soul is the ruling and
controlling principle. After death of the body it is not
dear, Lotze argues, what happens to the soul. However, he
believes, as an act of faith, that each individual must some-
time and somewhere receive his just reward or punish-
ment Therefore, although he is not able to prove it, he
does believe in some land of an immortality of the soul,

Recent and Present-Day Conceptions of the
Soul and Immortality

More recent philosophy has abandoned the conception
of soul and that of individual immortality. As one reads
the pages of modern philosophers, one is struck with the
fact that soul is seldom mentioned and the word "immor-
tality" is almost never admitted. In a recent anthology of
modern philosophy, a book of some 650 pages selected
from the writings of the present-day philosophers, there is
no mention of the soul and only a very few mentions of
immortality.

The position of most modern philosophers is that the
body is able to act in certain ways which show a high de-
gree of intelligence. This is called "minded action." Some
few writers will use the general term "soul" to describe this
action, but if they are pressed for a more accurate explana-

THE SOOT- AND IMMORTAIXCY

tion, will admit that they know nothing of a soul which is
distinct from the body and which can daim anything like
immortality,

The basis for this general position is to be found in the
present-day interest in science and the general conviction
that it is dangerous to go beyond observable action. In-
terest and respect characterize modern man's attitude to-
ward the scientific method. This method, if applied care-
fully, does not lead to the soul nor does it lead to a belief
in immortality.

The Behavioristic psychology as championed by John
B. Watson and others centered modern attention upon be-
havior as the thing to watch. Although many thinkers were
not willing to go the whole limit of Behaviorism and ad-
mit with its most enthusiastic advocates that behavior as
seen by an observer is the beginning and end of a scientific
study of man, nevertheless the influence of this position
has been great.

Further, the older attempt to account for man's ability
to think and to reason on the basis of his possessing of a
mind or soul has been largely abandoned. It is felt that
such an explanation is no real explanation, but rather a
dodging of the issue. Thought, it is held, is an activity
with a certain quality, the quality of mindedness. Man
who thinks does not have a mind distinct from the body
with which he thinks. But^ because of his finer organiza-
tion and construction, he is able to perform acts which are
characterized as thinking.

We find this general position taken by representatives of
both the Postttvlstic and the Pragmatic schools of thought
Among the Positivists is AUGUSTS COMTE who believed
that the search for a soul and a belief in immortality were
characteristics of an earlier and more childish stage of hu-
man development As man becomes more mature in his
racial development, he recognizes that such beliefs are not
exact, that they are mere wishes which cannot be proven
or founded upon fact Consequently, he argues, they must
be abandoned.

Pragmatism follows in this same tradition. WHJ-IAM

172 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

JAMES recognized that many men believe in the existence
of a soul which has immortality and that such a belief has
a certain usefulness in man's moral life. But he was not
able to make a place for this belief within the structure of
careful thought. JOHN DEWEY is more certain than was
James that there is no basis for such beliefs. Indeed, he is
convinced that the doctrine of the soul may be definitely
harmful since it carries a load of tradition which weights
man down or causes him to give up altogether the at-
tempt to understand experience which has the quality of
the religious.

While there still remain many philosophers, influenced
almost to a man by the religious tradition, who attempt to
interpret the term *souT and the accompanying term "im-
mortality** in such a way that both can be fitted into the
scheme of modem science without too much twisting and
turning, the modem trend is toward abandoning the ideas
altogether as far as philosophy is concerned.

Soul is held to be nothing more than a name for a kind
of activity, an activity which is spiritual It does not mean
an entity or thing which one may possess as he possesses
hands, eyes, and the like. Further, immortality does not
mean for most modern philosophers the eternal continuing
of a thing or the eternal living of the individual entity
which we know as ourselves. Biological immortality or the
continued existence of the germ structure of man, the im-
mortality of influence or the continued effect of one's in-
fluence after his body has died, and the immortality of the
group or the continuation of the whole of which each in-
dividual is for a time a part, are positions taken by modern
thinkers.

But the older traditional idea that there is a dualism of
body and mind or soul, both entities with more or less
separate lives, has been almost wholly abandoned. Thus,
the conception that one member of such a dualism, the
mind or soul, can continue to live and function after the
other member has ceased to function has been abandoned
also.

In the place of these traditional ideas, conceptions which

THE SOTIL AND IMMORTALITY 1/3

have a long and honored tradition, we find today the more
scientific conception that man is a being who, because of
his long and highly specialized evolutionary development,
is able to do certain things wholly impossible at any other
level of the evolutionary process* He is able to reason,
think, plan and carry out the results of his planning, is able
to conceive spiritual values and strive for their realization,
He is able to make fine adjustments to his environment.
Indeed, he is able to conceive the universe in the compass
of his thought and make far-flung plans to master it and
turn it to his desires. These abilities are far above anything
which we know in the universe. Thus, they have a quality
different from that of any other activities which man
knows. However, modern thought is not willing to go from
these facts to the theory that such acts are not the result of
body but are rather the result of another thing which
man has and which can be called mind or soul. Modern
thought holds that these activities are minded or spirit-
ual activities, and part of the complete activity of the
individual.

An illustration will help to make this position clearer.
One man will be called ugly while another will be called
handsome. What, modern philosophers ask, produces the
difference? Does the second of the two men possess a thing
which we may term ^beauty,** and because of which he is
beautiful? No. Beauty is not a thing, but a quality. Be-
cause the features of one individual are so constructed and
organized, we say he is beautiful. There is no thing, no
entity > such as "beauty" which makes one individual
beautiful.

Likewise, man does not have a soul or a mind. Rather,
his acts are of such a nature that we characterize them as
minded or spiritual.

This position makes it necessary for modern philosophy
to abandon the idea of immortality as it has been held in
the past. If there is no thing, no entity, which corresponds
to the soul, then there can be no immortality of the soul.
This necessitates the abandonment of the conception of a
place where souls go after death. This conception extends

174 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GRKAT FHILOSOPHEBS

all the way from the old Hebrew idea of Sheol, and the
Greek idea of Hades, the land of the shades across the
river Styx, to the highly imaginative idea of Heaven held
by the Christian tradition. Indeed, almost every religion
has held to the belief in a land beyond the grave where
good souls go to receive and to enjoy their reward. Many
religions have also conceived of another land to which the
evil souls go to receive their punishment. But, if there is no
soul, there can be no lands of reward and punishment.
Modern thought, therefore, turns to man and to his life
between birth and the grave, for a locus (that is, locality
or realm) of its values. Within this span the modern phi-
losopher finds all that he needs in order to understand
man. Many individual thinkers will allow for beliefs or
hypotheses regarding after-grave experiences, but they do
not include them in their philosophic schemes, nor can
they find sufficient evidence to make such beliefs other
than hang-overs from an older and less scientific tradition
or the wishes of those who are not satisfied with the
scientific interpretation of life.

Chapter VII
MAN AND THE STATE

PYTHAGORAS DEMOCEITUS THE SOPHISTS

SOCRATES PLATO ARISTOTLE
THE EPICUREANS THE STOICS AUGUSTINE

MACHLAYELLI GROTTUS HOBBES

LOCKE ADAM SMITH ROUSSEAU HEGEL

MARX MILL NIETZSCHE PEWEY

Is society made for man or is man made for society?
Js the state a divine creation which man must not
question, or is it a result of a "social contract" among
men and subject to change when it no longer serves
men? How do the rulers get their authority? Is revolu**
tion justifiable? Is totalitarianism or democracy cor-
rect?

Man is a gregarious being. By nature Be lives with Bis
fellows and likes it Indeed, no more cruel punishment can
be inflicted upon an individual than to isolate him from
other men for a long period of time.

Whether this love of being with other men is due to
man's basic and original nature, no one can say. However,
it is clear that the earliest men of whom we know anything
lived together. It may have been in a cave, or it may have
been in rude shelters constructed of branches and leaves,
or it may have been squatting beneath a tree or in the
protection of some overhanging cliff; but wherever it was,
the most primitive of men wanted to be near those of their

176 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

kind. The reason may have been the inherent desire for
security and the realization that one man alone is danger-
ously exposed to his enemies, while two or more men to-
gether are better able to protect themselves.

But, whatever the reason and whatever the location,
wherever we find evidence of man we find evidence of a
number of men and women all living in a group. And,
since all living together, whether it be of man or of beast,
brings conflicts of purpose and desire, it is almost certain
that the earliest of men organized some form of society,
established some rules which were accepted by each one.
Probably the first rules were not consciously determined or
set down so that all might learn. They were possibly ac-
cepted as right and necessary without much if any thought
on the matter*

It was out of these simple provisions for living together
that the first social requirements grew. Gradually an ac-
cepted body of customs and procedures evolved. These
became tribal laws or rules of the social group. Those pro-
cedures which were found to preserve the group and pro-
tect it against enemies without and within were held to
tenaciously, while those which did not serve this purpose
were abandoned.

By this process tribal or group organizations developed
with their ways of living which were handed on from the
older generation to the younger. Some of these rules were
learned by the young as they lived day by day among
their fellows. They saw others act in certain ways and ac-
cepted these ways as right Otter rules were transmitted
to the young in solemn ceremonies conducted by the mem-
bers of the group on special occasions, the chief of which
was that conducted when the young man was admitted
into full membership in the tribe at puberty.

These unwritten customs and laws held the group to-
gether solidly, and anyone who dared to disobey even in
the least was severely punished. Often death was the pen-
alty for failure to follow the tradition. Here was a closely
knit society, with laws, customs, and penalties, a society

MAN AND THE STATE 177

which passed on its traditions to each generation by ex-
ample, word of mouth, and ceremonial rites.

Then came the time when these laws and customs were
written down and a code of laws resulted, laws which were
binding because they had proved themselves to be neces-
sary for the preservation of the life of the social group.
These were the beginnings of society and the state.

It was many centuries later that the philosophers turned
their attention to this social organization and asked how
it came into being and what was its nature and meaning.
**Is it," they asked, *a natural result of man's living to-
gether, or does it have divine origin? Is it a mere con-
venience which is to be changed and revised as times
change, or does it Iiave a permanent status such that man
changes it at his peril? Where is the power of the state,
in the people or in the rulers who receive it from God?
What is the best form of the state, and how shall man
attain this?"

These questions and many others have occupied the at-
tention of many of the great philosophers. Not only have
they been the cause of much philosophic speculation, but
they have served to stir men to wars and threats of war.
Revolutions have arisen because men have differed in their
answers to these questions and have been willing to die to
prove that they were right. In our own time men have
fought world-engulfing wars because they were unable to
agree as regards the answers to some of these questions.

The ancients believed that their gods were the ultimate
rulers of the state, and that those of their fellows who held
power over them had received their authority directly from
the gods. Further, they accepted without question the
belief that all the laws by which they lived were given to
their ancestors by the gods and therefore could not be
changed even in tie least.

Illustrative of this position is the belief of the early He-
brews that Moses, their great lawgiver, received the laws
written on tablets of stone from their god, Yahweh (Jeho-
vah) . The Ten Commandments, the basis of their law, was
believed to have divine origin, and Yahweh was their only

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

ruler. Mcses and the others who ruled over them did not
hold this position by their own power but as representa-
tives of f ahweh. Punishment for breaking the laws was not
man-given, but was inflicted by Yahweh.

All early peoples held these same beliefs, substituting the
name of their god for the Yahweh of the Hebrews. They
saw the state as a divine creation and the laws as divine
commands which man broke at his peril since divine pun-
ishment was sure and just The god was made angry and
wreaked vengeance upon those who dared disregard his
will

The early Greeks did not have their laws written on
tablets of stone but rather in the minds of their leaders.
The customs of their forefathers, customs developed
through generations of tribal and group experience, were
passed on to the group and interpreted and enforced by
the old men. In time these customs were brought together
and written down by Lycurgus. Here the rules for living
together in a group or state were presented clearly so that
everyone would know what they were and could obey
them.

Among all these early peoples the group or the state
was more important than any member or citizen. These
ancient people recognized that the individual man could
not live long and could not enjoy many advantages unless
he lived in a group. Further, they realized that the great-
est good for the greatest number depended upon the
preservation of the group as a unit Consequently, anyone
who by his acts threatened the safety of the group com-
mitted a crime deserving of the most severe punishment.
It was necessary, they saw, to preserve the group even
at the expense of the individual. When the individual and
the group came into conflict, it was the individual who
had to yield or be destroyed. It would be fatal to all if
the group was destroyed,

The State as Viewed by the Early Greek Philosophers

The Pijthagoreans, representative of this early point of
view among the Greeks, taught that the individual should

MAN AND THE STATE 179

subordinate himself to the whole and should act at aH
times for the good of the state. Thus they taught their
members respect for authority, the laws and civic virtues of
the times, and the ideal of sacrifice for the good of the
whole.

This same general position was taken by DEMOCBITOS.
He held that each one should devote himself wholly to
the good of the state because *a weD-administered state
is our greatest safeguard. 1 * In another place he wrote,
'When the state is in a healthy condition, all things pros-
per; when it is corrupt, all things go to ruin * Since, he
argued, the ultimate welfare of everyone depended upon
the state, it was but reasonable to hold that the welfare
of the state was man's first concern.

After the Persian Wars (500 to 449 B.C.) Athens be-
came the center of ancient Greek culture. The events lead-
ing up to these wars and the developments during the
wars developed in the Athenians, among other peoples
of the times, an interest in the problems of government and
an interest m the democratic form of human living. This
led naturally to a growth of independent thinking which
eventually resulted in a growing concern for theories of
government Men began to question the older blind loy-
alty to the powers of the state, and many began to assert
their own independence and their right to a life more or
less free from the dominance of the established govern-
ment Individualism was in the air. Some suggested that
man should divorce himself from the authority of the group
and hold himself free to challenge the group and criticize
freely the older traditions.

The Sophists, as we have pointed out before, led this
advance into individualism. They centered attention not on
the group, but upon the individual member of the group.
They asserted his ultimate worth and independence. They
proposed to teach the individual how to succeed, how to
gain his own ends, tinder the law, and even to dodge the
law by skillful argument

Indeed, there were Sophists who argued that the kws
were mere inventions of the weaker members of the group,

ISO BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHEBS

of society, to enslave and Bold down the stronger. In Pla-
to's dialogue entitled Gorgfas, a well-known Sophist argues
that *The makers of the laws are the majority who are
weak; and they make laws and distribute praises and cen-
sures with a view to themselves and their own interests;
and they terrify the stronger sort of men, and those who
are able to get the better of them, ia order that they may
not get the better of them," He goes on to assert that the
great men of history have been those who refused to obey
the kws of the weak majority who have organized to hold
them down. The bail which they held before the people of
Athens was stated by CaDides in this way: Tf there were a
man who had sufficient force, he would shake off and break
through, and escape from all this; he would trample under-
foot all our formulas and spells and charms and all our
laws which are against nature." This was a challenge to the
spirit of independence which was abroad in the land to
assert itself and refuse longer to be repressed by the weak,
the ignorant, and the fools.

It is obvious that this position might easily be inter-
preted as a call to anarchy, an incentive to rebellion against
all authority. And many individuals took it for just that*
Thus, much of the Sophist influence led to unreasoned re-
fusal to be subject to the dictates of the group and thus
threatened the solidarity of the Athenian state. But, there
were many Sophists who did not intend that this should
happen. They were not satisfied with the older traditional
idea that man should be subject to the state wholly and un-
conditionally, and against this they rebelled. But they did
not want to go to the other extreme of complete anarchy
(that is, lack of any form of government). The tragedy of
their thinking was that although they saw the problem and
the danger in the traditional philosophy of the state, they
were unable to counter this tradition with something better.
They were not able to offer a solution to the problem of
society which would make for social unity and at the same
time avoid blind subservience to the state.

However, in their efforts to solve this problem they
etched clearly on the minds of their age the issues involved,

MAN AND THE STATE l8l

and challenged better minds than theirs to attempt a solu-
tion. They made it impossible for those philosophers who
followed them to dodge the problem of developing an
adequate philosophy of the state. And the great minds who
worked during the next two hundred years made many
significant contributions to a solution of the problem.

The State According to Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle

SOCRATES first asked the important questions involved in
the problem. Xenophon, in his Memorabilia, recounts that
Socrates never tired of asking of everyone he met, "What
is a state? What is a statesman? What is a ruler over men?
What is a ruling character?* Although he did not answer
these questions, he laid the basis for answering them in his
major position that the greatest concern of any citizen
should be knowledge. The good citizen was one who con-
stantly searched for true knowledge, who was forever ques-
tioning. When, Socrates argued, a man discovers true
knowledge, he will act on it and will conduct himself
rightly in all his relations with his fellows.

Although Socrates saw defects in the Athenian state and
spent a good deal of his time pointing to them and criti-
cizing the rulers for their mistaken ideas about government,
he was intensely loyal to Athens. When he had been con-
demned to death by the Athenian courts, a condemnation
which he with many others believed to be wholly unjust,
he refused the offer of his friends to bribe the guards and
escape. His argument was that should he do that he would
be breaking the laws of the state and thus making it that
much weaken The state, despite its mistakes, was to him a
mother who had given him life and had made him what
he was. He could no more betray the state th*n he could
betray his mother. His method was not that of rebellion.
Nor would he accept exile and turn away from the state.
Rather, he counseled his followers to remain loyal to the
state, and through this loyalty to help the state correct its
faults and mistakes.

The illustrious pupil of Socrates, PLATO, took up the
problem where Socrates had left it and endeavored to

BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT 3PH3LOSOPHERS

find a solution. He held that the state was necessary for
the highest development of the individual. Goodness, for
him, was not goodness in isolation, but was goodness in
the group. The good man was the good citizen. Thus, the
state should be so constructed that it would make possible
the good life for sSL

He argued that the individual should subordinate him-
self to the state, but that this was simply a means by which
the individual could reach his most perfect development.
The good of each man, he believed, was tied up with the
good of the group. Laws were necessary only because some
people refused to co-operate with the good state. They
served to bring these people in line and thus make the
whole good.

In the state, he argued, the best minds and the finest
souls should rule. They formed a class of philosopher-
mlers whose authority should not be questioned by the
rest of the group. He believed that since they were philoso-
pher-rulers their rule would be good and just. They could
understand the right, and would do it without question.
The rest of the members of the state he would place in
classes suited to their talents. Those who had a talent for
war should be placed in the warrior class. Those who had
a talent for mercantile pursuits would be in the trade and
merchant class. The skves should be placed in the slave
class. Plato believed that such an organization would give
the best possible state and that in it each individual, doing
his assigned Job to the best of his ability, would be happy
and would develop to his fullest

This ideal state is developed in Plato's famous book, the
Republic. In a book written somewhat later, the Laws, he
argues that all citizens should have a voice in the govern-
ment and that all work should be turned over to the slaves.

This theory of the state is fundamentally aristocratic.
Plato was wealthy, a son of the most favored class in
Athens. Being such, he never was able to be wholly dem-
ocratic, but aligned himself with the more aristocratic
thought of his day. Further, his theory was socialistic in
that it provided for complete control by the state of the

MAN AND THE STATE 183

lives of its members. The wealth of all was to be devoted
to the use of all as tiey needed and deserved it, and the
rulers could say in what class each individual should work
and live. The state was supreme, but this doctrine was
robbed of its sting by his added argument that in such a
state each person would be happy and develop to his
fullest.

ARISTOTUS, the pupil of Plato, developed a philosophy of
the state which resembled that of his teacher very much.
He held that man is by nature a social animal and, as such,
can realize his truest self only in society and among his
land. Although the earliest forms of social living were the
family and later the community, the goal of social evolu-
tion was, for Aristotle, the city state such as was known in
Greece during his lifetime.

Since Aristotle believed, as we have pointed out before,
that the whole is prior to its parts, he held fhat the state
was prior to the individual member of the state. The indi-
vidual is born into the state which has existed long before
he became a member. But, the goal of the state, he main-
tained, is to produce good citizens. Therefore, it should be
organized and conducted so that it enables each member
to become wholly good. To the extent that tihe state does
not enable the individual to live a virtuous and happy life,
it is evil.

Any constitution, he argued, should be adjusted to the
nature and the needs of the members of the particular
group. But, in any group there are individuals who are
unequal in many ways. Therefore, a good constitution must
recognize these natural unequalities and confer rights ac-
cordingly. In so far as all men are equal, the constitution
must confer equal rights, but in so far as they are unequal,
it must confer unequal rights. Among the uaequalities
which he would recognize are those erf personal abilities,
property, birth, and freedom. You treat slaves differently
from free men and those born of slaves differently from
those born of free men.

Aristotle held that a monarchy, an aristocracy, and a
"polity** in which the members are nearly equal, are the

184 BASIC TEACHINGS OF C3REAT PHILOSOPHERS

best f onns of the state. On the other hand he condemned
as bad a tyranny, an oligarchy, and a democracy.

Aristotle believed that slavery was a just practice in a
good state since it was, for him, a natural institution. How-
ever, he would admit only foreigners to the slave class. He
took this position because he held foreigners of all nations
to be inferior to the Greeks and thus not fit to enjoy the
same rights as Greeks.

Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle were all unable to solve the
problem of the state and the individual. Their theories were
interesting on paper, and many thoughtful men of that
time studied them and were interested. But the spirit of
individualism as championed by the Sophists was sweep-
ing Greece, and each man was concerned primarily with
himself and his own success. Slowly but surely the unity of
the state was destroyed. Individualism was no pathway to
unity against the enemies of Athens and other Greek city
states. As a result, these enemies were successful and the
Greek city states fell under their yoke one after another,
Athens, Corinth, and Sparta, the three great Greek city
states, fell, and eventually all Greece came under the dom-
ination of Philip of Macedon at the battle of Chaeronea in
338 B.C. Individualism had proved an internal poison
which eventually so weakened the Greek city states that
they could offer no effective resistance to their enemies and
their fall was inevitable.

The Positions of the Later Greek Thinkers

Amid the gradual crumbling of the city states of Greece
the Epicureans sought to develop a theory of the state
which would fit the situation. They taught that all social
life is based on the self-interest of the individual. We be-
come members of a social group simply because we find
that in such a group we can get more for ourselves, be-
cause the group will give us better protection from our
enemies. Therefore, there can be no absolute justice or
natural rights and laws. That is good which men agree to
call good. The laws are simply rules which the group ac-
cepts and by which the members are willing to live. If the

MAN AND THE STATE l8$

members of the group decide that a certain law is no longer
of value in getting what they want, it can be changed or
thrown out altogether.

Injustice is not an evil in itself, they held. We are just,
only because it helps us to be so. When obedience to laws
does not help us longer, we may break the laws, if we can
escape punishment.

The Epicureans did not believe that participation in pub-
lic life would contribute to the happiness of tfie individual;
therefore, they held that the wise man would shun public
office and public responsibility as much as possible. This
position, as is evident, is one of pure individualism and
selfishness. The individual associates himself with others
only because it is to his advantage to do so, and he breaks
away from the group and its requirements as soon .is it is
to his advantage to do so. Further, the individual helps the
group and participates in group responsibility only to the
degree that it is to his advantage to do so. This point of
view certainly does not build strong group loyalty or sol-
idarity. It is the complete opposite of the earlier Greek
position of loyalty to the state. Indeed, it is a clear expres-
sion of the doctrine of ''enlightened self-interest.'* Each
person is told that he is to make his own happiness, and
that alone, the goal of all that he does.

The Stoics took a position wholly opposite to that of the
Epicureans as regards man's relationship to the group.
They held that man is more than merely an individual in-
terested in his own welfare. He is also an individual with
an inborn social impulse which makes necessary group
life. Indeed, all men are members of a great cosmic society,
the universal state. We all have duties and obligations in
this state, and its laws are the natural laws which we must
all obey whether we like it or not.

The Stoic state is universal and thus dominates every
individual completely. Indeed, each member must l>e will-
ing at all times to sacrifice himself for the good of the
state. Individual interests are always subordinate to the
interest of the whole, and the state must be preserved at
all cost.

3.86 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

Thus, the Stoics taught that everyone should participate
in public affairs and contribute as much as possible to the
welfare of the group. However, and this is most important,
the Stoics never taught a narrow nationalism in which a
small state could be superior to the general* welfare of
humanity. Hie good state was, for them, one whose laws
and practices were in harmony with the good of all man-
kind and with the natural laws of the universe.

The Stoic, then, was to be a universal citizen, a member
of the Great Society which includes all men and the laws
of which are the universal laws of nature itself. Each man
must subordinate himself to the universal ideal and live in
such a way as to serve the good of all men wherever they
might be. A world society rooted in nature was their ideal
This was, obviously, wholly different from the position of
the Epicureans and the other individualists of the day, and
was equally opposed to the position of those who would
have mar* subordinated to a particular state or social group.
The Stoic ideal of universal brotherhood was the highest
point to which the thought of the Greek period arose, and
to which other thinkers in days to come were to strive.

Indeed the Stoics taught much which has become cen-
tral in modern thought With the loss of Greek independ-
ence they began to look at all men as brothers and to teach
universal brotherhood and equal rights for all men. They
sensed the doctrine of the solidarity of the human race
and the dignity of man regardless of his position in society,
his wealth, his birth, or his education. Their position may
be summed up in the words, ''Virtue despises no one,
neither Greek nor barbarian, man nor woman, rich nor
poor, freeman nor slave, wise nor ignorant, whole nor sick."
This was certainly dose to our modern view.

The Views of the Early Christian Thinkers
This point of view was also central in the thinking of
most of the Christian thinkers and philosophers. For them
God was the Father of all mankind, thus making all men
brothers. The Christian community was a social group in
which the customary distinctions of race and social status

MAN AND THE STATE 187

were eliminated. Further, the Christians thought of the
temporal state as an institution subject to God and de-
riving its power from God. Man, therefore, was loyal to
the state only in so far as it obeyed the laws of God. His
first loyalty was to God.

However, in the thinking of many, the temporal state
had so far failed to square itself with the will of God that
man was more or less free from any obligation to it The
"contempt of the world,* which characterized the meta-
physics of many of the Apologists, likewise characterized
their attitude toward the state. The corruption of tie age
drove many to seek a life of seclusion from the state in the
monastic life. They turned from social obligations to a per-
sonal striving to save their souls through a life of isolation
and contemplation.

Throughout most of the early Christian period loyalty to
God and His laws was first in the thinking of the Christians.
In so far as the state was obedient to God, they could be
loyal to it also.

But, with the development of the Church as an institu-
tion and with the spread of Christianity throughout the
Roman Empire, it became necessary for Christian thinkers
to revise their notions regarding government and human
associations. For a while we find Christian writers hesi-
tating between the older contempt for the world and the
things of the world and the opposite attitude of interest in
the world and all that it contained. In SAINT AUGUSTINE,
for example, this inability to make a choice between world
denial and world affirmation is remarkably evident

While AMBROSE, an earlier dhurch thinker, had held the
possession of property and wealth to be ^damnable,* Au-
gustine admitted that one had a right to gain wealth. But,
he did feel that such wealth might be a hindrance to the
Christian life.

In Augustine's theory of the State we find the same in-
ability to decide between the world and contempt for the
world. For him the state is based on self-love and often
leads to a contempt for God and all his laws. But the "City
of God** is based upon contempt for the self and complete

l88 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHELOSOPHEBS

love for God. Thus, his ideal is this City of God. Neverthe-
less, he writes that the state is an ethical community and
that its chief end is the happiness of mankind. In it justice
may rule.

Despite this hanging, as it were, between two states,
Augustine holds firmly to the position that the Church, as
a worldly incarnation of the City of God, is to be supreme
over the state, and the head of the Church is to rule over
the rulers of the states. Further, while the ruler of the state
may make mistakes, the ruler of the Church can never
make a mistake. His word and his rule are infallible since
he is the representative of God on earth.

Thus, while Augustine feared the state and saw in
it dangers to the soul of man, he was never able to turn
his back on it completely and condemn it as wholly sinful
The older Christian contempt for the world haunted Trim,
but was never able to master him completely. Although
the monastic life was for him the ideal, he was practical
enough to realize that most men could not attain the ideal
and thus had to do the best they could as members of a
temporal state.

The Views cj tine Medieval Christian Thinkers

During the so-called Dark Ages, after the northern tribes
had overrun the Roman Empire and destroyed a great deal
of the culture and social organization of the first four cen-
turies of the Christian era, the principle of authority was
supreme. During the entire Middle Ages man was subject
to some authority. The state and its rulers assumed con-
trol over the people, so man found himself everywhere
under the command of some authority. Thus obedience to
the law, whatever its source, became a settled practice.

Gradually there grew up the idea that the king received
his authority from God and thus could not be questioned.
Any disobedience to him was actually disobedience to the
supreme authority of the universe, God, Indeed, authority
was superior to public opinion and the state superior to
the individual. Here the individualism of the later Greeks

MAN AND THE STATE l8{)

was conquered completely, and in its place stood almost
complete domination of the individual by the state.

The flanking of the Schoolmen, as was pointed out ear-
lier, was confined to Interpreting the dogmas of the
Church. Although they were at times keen of mind, these
philosophers were confined within the walls of Church doc-
trine and tradition and had to spend their talents in careful
analysis of the meanings of these. Thus, their thinking
about the state and the place of man in the social structure
was limited by what the Church was willing to accept as
authentic.

But, as in all ages, while the great majority of thinkers
followed the standard pattern, there were those who, often
without understanding the entire import of their thought,
planted the seeds of a later breakdown of tradition*

Among the Scholastics were two groups known as the
Realists and the Nominalists. The Realists held that tihe
whole was the only real thing, and that the parts, the units,
were not truly real The Nominalists held that the parts,
the units, were the real things, and the whole merely a
name. Applied to our immediate problem, the State, this
would mean that the Realists held the State to be the only
reality, and its members, men and women, to be mere
units with no true reality. The Nominalists, on the other
hand, held man to be the true reality, and the State a mere
aggregation of men which had no existence or reality of
its own apart from its members*

The logical result of these two strains of thought was
that some would hold that the real authority rested in the
State as the only reality while others would hold that the
real authority rested in the individual man and not in the
State. Realism and Nominalism were doctrines applicable
to the problem of the State and its members.

JOHN Scorns EBIGENA was a realist. Although he did
not work out his doctrine in its application to the state, he
conceived of the universal, the whole, existing prior to the
particular individual. Thus he was in the tradition of Plato
and Aristotle and those others who saw the state as even-
tually supreme and prior to any individual member.

BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

Likewise AXSELM was in this realistic tradition. He de-
voted much time and thought to proving that universals
were prior to individuals.

ROSCEUN represents the other point of view. He taught
that the individual is the only reality and that any univer-
sal is nothing more than a mere name for a group of in-
dividuals. Take away the individuals and you have noth-
ing but a name left No reality remains.

As with any two extreme positions, and Realism and
Nominalism, were extreme positions, there arises sooner or
later someone who seeks to effect a compromise. ABELABD
was that man at this time. His theory has been called **con-
ceptualism/* He taught that universals cannot be realities
apart from things, but that they are concepts in the mind
of man. He was interested particularly in things and wanted
to point with emphasis to them, but recognized that ideas
erf groups had a certain reality in the mind of man.

Thus, for him, the individual was extremely important,
but the group had its importance also and could not be
ruled out altogether. Both were significant factors in any
understanding of man and his relations with his fellows*

Thus, the thinkers of the Middle Ages planted the seeds
which were to destroy the supreme authority of the social
group. After this doctrine had won out over that of in-
dividualism and had dominated man's thinking for several
centuries, the spirit of individualism again asserted itself
and began to demand recognition. Gradually it gained the
ascendency and man began once more to question the
authority that ruled him.

THOMAS AQUINAS, the last of the great Church thinkers
of the Middle Ages, sought to fuse the thinking of Aristotle
with that of Augustine. He taught that man is naturally a
political being and seeks to be in society. Further, the su-
preme purpose of the state was, for him, the good of the
group. This can be attained only if the society is strongly
united and is able to present a solid front against its ene-
mies. Thus a monarchy in which the rule is strongly cen-
tralized is, for him, the best form of government. But this

MAN AND THE STATE 1Q1

government must not be oppressive of the members. There
must be no tyranny.

Rebellion against the government can never be justified,
St Thomas Aquinas taught that any change in government
should come through legal means, since government is of
divine origin. If it is not possible for the member to obtain
redress of his grievances through legal means, he must
leave the matter to God who will work out good in the end.

But Aquinas held that the church was superior to the
state and the ruler of the state was to be always obedient
to the ruler of the church. The state, then, was thought of
as an institution divinely established and drawing its power
over men from God through His church. Man's ultimate
loyalty was to the church and God, but he had to obey
the state since the state in turn received its power from the
church.

The position of JOHN DUNS Scores is interesting in that
it is developed upon the premise that God is absolutely
free and supreme. Society is a creation of God and is what
it is because God has made it so. God could have made
another type of society just as well and could have made
different laws. Then this type would have been right and
its laws just. This is a far cry from the Sophistic conception
of the state as a result of an agreement among men and its
laws as established because men wanted them so. The
state, for Scotus, is a creation of God, not of necessity but
of his own free wilL It is as it is because God wiUs it so.
Thus, man must obey the kws of the state or suffer divine
punishment.

Although Scotus did not foresee the result, this theory
gave great power to existing states and rulers. They could
claim direct authority from God and could use the fear of
eternal punishment to enforce their authority.

But man was not contented to accept this domination of
the state even though it was based upon the theories of
great churchmen. The nominalistic position persisted and
there were those who arose constantly to assert the freedom
of the individual over the authority of the state. WUJJAM
OF OCCAM was one of this group. He stressed the reality of

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

the individual and thereby gave man a strong argument
for asserting his dignity and for questioning the power of
the state when it seemed to violate the will of its members.
This, along with other things, led to a growing battle
between the state and the church. Men arose to hold that
the state was a temporal institution receiving its power and
authority from the governed and thus free from any domi-
nation by the church. At times the church was in the saddle
and ruled the states then existing. At other times the states
overcame the church and asserted their freedom.

The State as Viewed by the Forerunners of the Renaissance

It was at this time that man began to assert his own
freedom and to challenge the power of rulers who held
key positions in the state. The democratic spirit was afoot
in the land, and absolute rule was being effectively beaten
in many places. Indeed, everywhere the spirit of freedom
was breaking through the heavy crust of the Middle Ages,
and man was struggling to become a true individual and
obtain some power to rule himself.

Added to this was the growing feeling of nationalism
evident on all sides. Groups of individuals with common
language, customs, and traditions began to appear and to
assert themselves over against other such groups. But there
was opposition to all such nations on the part of the Church,
which saw its world domination threatened. Thus, a strug-
gle ensued out of which gradually developed the nations
of the modern world, large groups of individuals with a
common concern and a growing desire to establish them-
selves as units.

In addition, the individual began to assert his own inde-
pendence of thought, and to believe that human reason
was superior to authority. Slowly the idea took form that
truth was a thing to be reached by the operation of human
reason and not something handed down by an authorita-
tive Church.

All these movements tended to weaken the power of the
Church and place the individual man, both as an individ-
ual and as a member of a political group, in the center of

MAN AND THE STA1K 193

the stage. In this setting philosophers began to dream of a
perfect social group in which, ideal conditions would exist.
An example of this trend is the City of the Stm, a Utopian
treatise by TOMMASO CAMPANEIXA. In this volume Cam-
panella sketches the outline of a socialistic state similar
to that found in Plato's Republic, a state in which knowl-
edge is the governing force and power. Everyone in this
state is equal since there is only one class. However, Cam-
panella does make distinctions between men on the basis of
their knowledge. The philosophers, who are also priests,
are the rulers. In making this assertion, he shows his de-
sire to effect a compromise between the Church and the
growing national feeling of the times* In his state there
was to be a sort of papal monarchy, a religious unity as the
basis for political unity.

Campanella's work is typical of the preliminary work
toward thinking through a new theory of the state and its
relations with, its citizens. However, the general trend of
the times was away from the authority and dominance of
the Church, a trend in the direction of political independ-
ence.

MachfaveTlfs Conception of the State

The most violent attack upon the Church and its hitherto
generally accepted dominance over the state was made by
NiccoiA MAGHTAVEtxT. His ambition was to establish a
united Italian nation wholly independent of the Church.
He took as a model for this state the old political forms
established by Sparta, Rome, and Venice.

Since the general situation of his day was one of cor-
ruption, Machiavelli argued that such a state could be
established only by a strong and absolute despot. Although
such a political structure would destroy civic freedom,
Machiavelli thought of this as a necessary intermediate
stage out of which man could eventually work as he be-
came less corrupt His ideal was a free, independent na-
tion in which civic rights would be cherished and the in-
dependence of each individual guaranteed.

To accomplish his ends, the prince or ruler had the right

194 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHDLOSOPHEBS

to use any means necessary, even force, deceit, or breach
of the moral law. He had to fight trickery with trickery,
deceit with deceit.

Grotius, HoVbes, and Other Thinkers of the Renaissance

Another thinker of the period, JEAN BODIN, taught that
the state is founded upon a contract which the people make
with their ruler. The fundamental article of this contract
is one which gives over to the ruler aH authority and which
permits the people under no circumstances to take it back.

JOHANNES ALTHUSIUS attacked this position, holding that
the people could never give away their authority. Rather,
he argued, the contract which the people make with their
ruler lasts only so long as the ruler fulfills his part of the
bargain. When he violates the contract he may be de-
throned and execrated and another ruler set up in his place
by the people.

HTJGO GROTTOS, a leader of the aristocratic party in Hol-
land, developed the theory of absolutism in great detail
and with many cogent arguments. He taught that man
has certain natural rights which are rooted in his very
nature and which even God cannot change or destroy. But
these natural rights may be limited!, and indeed are limited
by the positive law which results from man's voluntary
agreement to live in groups. We give up the privilege to
exercise certain natural rights in order that we may live
together as members of a state. Thus, the state is a result
of the free agreement among its members. Consequently,
at no time can man give up his natural rights uncondi-
tionally. But, he may delegate these rights to a ruler for-
ever.

Therefore, during this early modern period the tendency
was toward absolutism. The ruler had power which, though
originally given him by the people, was more or less ab-
solute from then on. Of course, there was opposition to
this point of view. When the practice of more or less ab-
solute sovereignty reached its climax in the reign of Louis
XIV in France, a climax expressed in his famous saying,
"I am the state,** there was sufficient opposition to effect

MAN AND THE STATE 195

an overthrow of the whole position and to begin building
the more modem idea of democracy. But that is getting
ahead of our story.

The materialist, THOMAS HOBBES, based his theory of
the state upon the fundamental principle that rmm has
the natural right to do anything which he pleases. The
most primitive urge of all men is that of self-preservation.
To accomplish this end, man may use any means he deems
necessary. In this state of nature man may invade the
rights of others with the result that chaos reigns.

Man is, then, fundamentally a ferocious animal, one
who engages in war and pillage, seeking always his own
gain. But, in such a state no man can be strong enough to
preserve himself for long. Each man will destroy the
others and he in turn will be destroyed by others. Thus, to
escape from this inevitable end, man creates a society in
which he voluntarily gives up his rights in many matters.
This is a contract which men make with each other by
which they give up certain rights in order to obtain others
which they desire. To insure this mutual contract, men
transfer power to one ruler or an assembly. After the ruler
has been set up and given power, men must obey.

It is true, Hobbes recognizes, that at times the ruler will
be unjust and will wreak hardships upon men. But they
have no right to rebel. Hobbes justifies this position by
holding that even at their worst, the injustices of a ruler
are never so bad as the original state of man before power
was given to the ruler.

Hobbes believes that the absolute monarchy is the best
form of government But, there are certain things that
even the king cannot force men to do. Among these are
suicide, murder, or the confession of crime. These the king
has no right to impose upon any man.

Hobbes argued further that the king was God's repre-
sentative on earth and that God spoke through him. Thus,
freedom of religion cannot be tolerated. The religion of the
king must be the religion of all the people.

This theory of Hobbes is actually an attempt to defend

196 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

philosophically the power of the English king and the gen-
eral structure of the English monarchy. The defense led to
the theory of the "divine right of kings* and to the position
that the king can do no wrong. So long as the king can
protect the people he is absolute and no one has the right
to challenge Tfo authority.

The Views of Spinoza, Locke, and Adam Smith

The belief that the state is in some way a result of a
social contract among men is also seen in the teachings of
SPINOZA, In the natural state, he held, might makes right,
and man has the right to do anything which he is able to do.
He may destroy others to gain his ends, cheat, lie, or en-
gage in any activity which will help Mm. But, in such a
state, conflict will inevitably arise and many will be de-
stroyed*

Consequently, men give up many natural rights so that
there may be a degree of peace in which they can realize
other desires. Hie state is the result By general agreement,
men in a state agree to limit their natural rights for the
good of aH Therefore, only in a state can justice and in-
justice have a meaning. According to natural rights any-
thing may be Just However, in a state, disobedience to
the laws set up by virtue of the social contract is unjust
The just is that which makes social life possible.

JOHN LOCKE was in complete disagreement with Hobbes
and others who believed that the natural state of man was
one of war and self-seeking. Further, he was opposed to the
doctrine that the king rules by divine right and that he
has absolute power to govern men as he wills. Locke held
that the original and natural state of all men is one of
perfect freedom and equality. Since all men are free and
equal, no one has the right to take away another's life,
liberty, or possessions.

Further, the original nature of man is that of peace,
good will, and mutual assistance. Thus, men naturally
move toward social living. In a society, men set up law, an
impartial judge, and one with executive power in order to
attend to matters of common interest This structure is

MAN AND THE STATE 1Q7

established by a social contract agreed upon by the mem-
bers of the group.

After the society has been established, each member is
under obligation to submit to the authority of the majority.
This is necessary for efficient living together, since unani-
mous consent is next to impossible in a large group*

The main purpose of law, Locke taught, is to preserve
the social group and thus it must be limited to the public
good of society. Beyond this, men are to be left free.
Locke said that there are certain areas into which law
cannot come. He specifically excluded the right to enslave,
to destroy, or to impoverish men.

Locke did not think it good that those who made the
laws should also have the right to execute them. Conse-
quently, he would divide the powers of government into
the legislative and the executive and would keep these
two branches separate for the public good The people
have the power to remove the legislators whenever they
wish since power rests ultimately in the people. They also
have the right to punish their legislators or their executive
whenever they are convinced that either is acting in oppo-
sition to the public good.

It is obvious that Hobbes and Locke were exponents of
two very different doctrines. While Hobbes was interested
in presenting a philosophical justification for absolute mon-
archy and the divine right of the ruler to rule without be-
ing accountable to the people, Locke was interested in
justifying the doctrine of political freedom. Locke sought
to prove that the power of the state always rests in the
people and that their rulers are merely their servants sub-
ject to their will. This power can never be taken from the
people nor can they give it up. Hobbes held that once the
people gave power to the ruler, they were unable to get
it back regardless of what the ruler did.

These were two points of view which appeared often in
the political writings of the eighteenth century and the
early part of the nineteenth century. They were in con-
stant conflict, and the conflict has not died down even to-
day.

This theory as developed by Locke, a theory of man's

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHELOSOPHEES

freedom and of the state as an institution charged with
keeping order among men, but one very limited, led to
the famous doctrine of laissez fairs. This is the doctrine
that the state should not interfere any more than is ab-
solutely necessary with the affairs of its members, that
tie individual has a natural right to exercise his activity
in the economic sphere with the least possible interference
from society.

ADAM SMTIH wrote Bis famous Wealth of Nations to
show that the best state exists only when men are permitted
to engage in unrestricted competition, freedom of ex-
change, and enlightened self-interest In this work the
pendulum of philosophic thought was swinging away from
the theory that the state should regulate every activity of
men, a theory held by Plato and many other thinkers, to
the opposite extreme that the state should observe a strict
policy of Bands off and permit men to exercise their natural
rights in all directions save in those where the safety of
fee group is threatened.

In Adam Smith, and other philosophical writers wBo
followed Locke, we see the attempt to carry Locke's theory
of freedom and natural rights into various fields of human
activity and to free men in each of these fields from the
restraints of government which Bad become so common
since the beginning of written Bistory at least. In most
instances it was felt that the best results would be obtained
if each individual was left as free as possible in all his
activities. Government was to keep hands off except in
those necessary affairs where the safety of the state was in
danger*

The Position of Voltaire and of Rousseau

The brilliant VOLTAIBE never tired of condemning the
traditional authorities and championing human freedom.
Yet, he did not believe that the lower classes had the
capacity for self-government. He believed that the "igno-
rant rabble" was a danger whenever restraint was removed.
Thus, freedom was to be the privilege only of the en-
lightened, the intelligent

MAN ANB THE STATE 199

A powerful opponent of this position was JEAN JACQUES
ROUSSEAU. He believed in all men and fought for their
freedom. Indeed, he would rule out representative govern-
ment and place in its stead direct government by all the
people. The Swiss republic was his model, a small, closely-
knit group of people considering every issue as a group and
determining their destiny by popular vote. Indeed, Tlous-
seau took the Lockian idea of democracy seriously" and
argued that since all men were created free and equal they
should not be robbed or ruled by a privileged class.

To attain this freedom, Rousseau would cast away all
the trappings of modern society and return to nature. Nat-
ural society, he believed, is based on a "social contract"
by which the freedom of the individual is surrendered to
self-imposed laws which are the result of the general will.
Sovereignty lies, he argued, with the people at all times and
cannot be taken from them. Government merely carries
out the will of the people, and the people have the right
at any time to recall their government and establish an-
other.

Locke, Rousseau, Fichte, Schelling, and many other
thinkers, although differing in some details, held the gen-
eral position that man's true self could be realized only in
the right land of a social group. They saw that human
association is not a detriment but is rather a means to the
best kind of life. When a man lives among his fellows he
develops characteristics which are most worth while. There-
fore, they sought the right kind of social group, and
reached the conclusion that a group in which the greatest
amount of freedom was possible would meet the require-
ments of this society. Schelling argued that an isolated ego
could have no consciousness of freedom. We only know
freedom when we live with others and see it in relation to
possible restraint.

The State According to Hegel, Mart, and Lassd&e

HEGEL taught that universal reason reaches its height
in a society of free individuals, each subordinating its in-
dividual reason to the universal reason. The individual, if

BASIC CACHINGS OF GREAT I>HILOSOPHERS

living by himself and exercising his own caprice, is not
free. Only as He blends himself with, the group does he
attain to true freedom* History, he held, has been striving
throughout time toward the realization of a perfect state,
a state in which each member so blends himself with the
whole that the will of the whole is his will.

For Hegel, there is a universal reason to be discovered
throughout history. It is seen working itself out in one
society and then shifting to another. Thus, when one society
destroys or conquers another, the universal reason shifts to
another group and continues to work itself out The con-
queror becomes the agent of this universal reason. War,
then, is justified ia Hegel's mind because it is the means by
whidb progress is made.

The Hegelian system was adopted by the Prussian state
and many Prussian thinkers held that the Prussian state
was destined to carry forward the realization of universal
reason through its eventual conquest of the world.

KAKL MAKX and FERDINAND LASSAUUS, along with other
early socialists (founders of modern socialism), derived
certain of their views from Hegel, especially his idea that
change is but the road to better things. They held that one
type of society, which appeared good at one time, would
inevitably give way to another which would be seen to be
better, a synthesis of opposites. Thus, for example, a so-
ciety based on private property would give way to one in
which socialism was supreme. They saw in Hegel a philo-
sophical justification for the new society which they de-
sired.

De Maisfre, Saint-Simon, and Comte

The result of the Lockian tradition of freedom and popu-
lar sovereignty in France was the revolution and the ac-
companying social and political upheaval. This inevitably
gave impetus to a great deal of conservative reaction with
its emphasis upon the need of authority, JOSEPH DE MAIS-
TBE, for example, held that man had shown his inability
to govern himself and argued that a stable society was
possible only on the basis of tradition and strong authority.

MAN AND THE STATO 2O1

However, the desire for "liberty, equality, and fraternity**
continued to burn brightly and the dream of reforming
society haunted thinkers. They recognized that merely to
proclaim freedom and equality was not enough, but that
actual reforms of society were necessary. CLAUDE HENRI
DE ROUVROY, COMTE BE SAINT-SIMON believed that the
goal of freedom and equality could be reached if men
could build a science of society based upon the laws of
group living. Such a scientific society would elevate the
poor and the lowly and would bring to the world true
Christianity with its doctrine of love for the oppressed. In
such a society there would be equal distribution of prop-
erty, power, culture, and happiness.

But Saint-Simon was not the thinker to develop this
science of society. He could see the need for it and could
preach this need, but it was left for a man of the intellec-
tual strength of AUGDSTK COMTE to actually attempt the
logical construction of such a positive philosophy. He saw
that social reform was impossible without a knowledge of
the laws of society, the development of a social science
equal in logical accuracy to the other sciences of his time.

Sociology, the science of society, Comte held to be the
most complex of the sciences, including both an under-
standing of society as it now is and also a study and under-
standing of the progress of society.

Comte held that society begins as a way to satisfy man's
social impulse which is fundamental to him. As man pro-
gresses, his social life passes through the three stages: mili-
tarism, in which discipline and force are supreme; revolu-
tion; and the positive stage, in which the emphasis is upon
social rather than political problems. It is this positive stage
in which the expert guides scientific research and controls
all phases of living. This expert is not to be dependent
upon the ignorant; therefore popular government is not
desirable.

The ideal of social living, the positive state, is for Comte
one which has passed beyond the stage of chaos repre-
sented by the revolutions which followed the Lockian in-
fluence. Here the expert has emerged and is able through

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHEBS

the strength of his ability to direct society toward more and
more perfect living. He sees the needed reforms of society
and is able to effect them. The masses of men accept his
guidance because he is an expert

The Views of Mill and Spencer

This dream of social reform and the building of a more
ideal society was basic to the thinking of JOHN STUABT
MILL also. He believed that the phenomena of social living
conformed to fixed laws fust as other phenomena do. How-
ever, he recognized that the factors involved in society are
so numerous and are changing so constantly that prediction
is impossible, Thus, the methods of study used in other
sciences, those of the laboratory, are not applicable to a
study of society* By the method of deduction from many
instances we can see tendencies in human social develop-
ment and can point to them as guides to activity, he taught.

Believing this to be true, Mill held that the task of the
social scientists was to investigate social groups to discover
how the different forms of society develop and follow each
other. Thus, by a study of history we can discover the laws
of social progress and development Then we can point to
tendencies in the present social structure and predict that
there is a high degree of probability tibat certain social
results can be expected.

For example, a study of ancient civilizations will show
the reasons for their fall. The historian can point to factors
m the social structure which contributed to the downfall
of the civilization. Then, if an examination of a present
society reveals the same factors as present and operating,
it can be predicted with a degree of probability that that
society will also fall*

Mill, as many of his predecessors, recognized that
social well-being was necessary for individual well-being,
that the individual was tied up with the group and that
his happiness was dependent upon the status of the group.
Thus, he dreamed of a society in which the happiness and
prosperity of all was certain, and in which all would share
the wealth of the group. In his Autobiography he wrote,

MAN AND THE STATE

**Whfle we repudiated with the greatest energy that tyr-
anny of society over the individual which most Socialistic
systems are supposed to involve, we yet looked forward to
a time when society will no longer be divided into the idle
and the industrious; when the rule that they who do not
work shaTT not eat wiH be applied not to paupers only, but
impartially to al; when the division of the produce of labor,
instead of depending, as in so great a degree it now does, on
the accident of birth, will be made by concert on an ac-
knowledged principle of justice; and when it wifl no longer
either be, or be thought to be, impossible for human beings
to exert themselves strenuously in procuring benefits which
are not to be exclusively their own, but to be shared with
the society they belong to. The social problem of the future,
we considered to be: how to unite the greatest individual
liberty of action, with a common ownership in the raw
material of the globe, and an equal participation of all in
the benefits of combined labor."

Mill was struggling here with a problem that seems to
have become more and more clear since his day: the prob-
lem of undeserved poverty and equally undeserved wealth,
Society, as he understood it, exists for the good of all in-
dividual members. Therefore, each must have freedom to
work and be rewarded for his effort But, the raw ma-
terials of the world cannot be the exclusive possession of a
few. These belong to aH, and must be held by society as the
representative of afl. Mffl believed that a time would come
when such would be the case and when society could
guarantee economic freedom to all

HEBBERT SPENCER accepted the doctrine that each in-
dividual had the right to preserve himself. Indeed, he saw
in nature a struggle in which the fittest survived and the
less fit perished. Thus, men must be free to struggle and
prove their fitness to survive.

But; the survival of the fittest among human individuals
depends, he argued, upon group life. Isolated from his fel-
lows, even the fittest o men, would parish. Therefore so-
ciety is essential. This necessitates a course of activity in
which each individual is restricted by the rights of others.

2O4 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

One may do what he wills in this struggle, but he must not
violate the freedom of others. Everyone has the right to
act to a certain limit, but no further.

However, Spencer would not accept the socialistic thesis
of Mill. For him, the state is greatly restricted. Its chief
functions are to prevent internal aggression and to protect
its members from foreign invasion. Beyond this it cannot
go. To own the raw materials of the world and distribute
them for the good of all was not a function of the state,
to his thinking. In this direction he saw only danger, the
danger of complete state control and the inevitable sup-
pression of the individual.

Competition among the members of society was to be
permitted and encouraged. He believed that society, and
the welfare of each individual, was better served by the es-
tablishment of as few restrictions upon competition as pos-
sible. In this, Spencer was an advocate of the laissez-faire
theory. The best life, he taught, was one lived with only a
minimum of regulation by the state.

Nietzsche s Conception of the State

FRIEDRICH NIETZSCHE had no use for equality or any-
thing that suggested democracy. The will to power is his
dominant idea. In the struggle of the universe, this will to
power is expressed; and the most powerful wins and has the
right to win. If others are weaker and are unable to survive,
that is good. The weak should be destroyed anyhow to
make room for the strong.

He recognizes differences among men and believes that
these differences should be magnified. The more powerful
should rule, and the weaker should be ruled. Slavery seems
perfectly natural to him; and he feels that women, being
weaker than men, cannot be expected to have the same
rights as men. Thus, he repudiates all that has been held
by that long line of philosophers whose constant theme
has been the equality of all men and the right of all to share
equally in the goods of society. For Nietzsche, society is
merely a field in which the strong have a chance to demon-
strate their strength and win their rewards, while the weak

MAN AND THE STATE

are defeated and dragged from the arena to be disposed of
completely. Since inequality is characteristic of nature and
the natural state of man, it is unnatural to replace it with a
forced equality.

The Views of Dewey and Recent Thinkers

JOHN DEWEY has shown at all times a strong interest in
society and its problems. He constantly attempts to inter-
pret the modern democratic point of view, to reveal its
implications, and to forecast its future. He thinks of society,
at its best, as a group of individuals sharing their experi-
ences and growing through this sharing. The individual is
to be free, but this freedom is not to be that of the older
tradition. As the individual becomes a true member of so-
ciety he is incorporated into the group in such a way that
he can contribute to the welfare of the whole and receive
from the whole that which makes him truly human.

At all times Dewey recognizes the importance of the in-
dividual. He holds that no one should ever be treated as an
instrument, as a means to some goal that is not his. Rather,
each one should be treated as an end in himself. ^Respect
for human personality" is the chief doctrine of his philoso-
phy. This is, perhaps, the only absolute known to Dewey
and his school of thought.

Man, Dewey holds, is man because he lives in society.
To the extent that his activities in the group lead on to
richer and more rewarding activities for him and for all
members of the group, he is acting wisely and truly. So-
ciety, group fife, is the way to this complete and full life
since here mutual sharing is possible.

Thus, we may say that two points of view are basic to
the great mass of recent writing which deals with matters
of the state. On the one hand are those who follow more or
less completely the lead of men from Plato to Nietzsche
and hold that inequality is the natural state of man. This
being the case, each member of the state must take his
proper place in the social structure. It is perfectly right and
natural, these men argue, that some should be rulers and
others should be ruled, and the ruled should not question

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT FHELOSOPHEBS

the acts of the rulers. Such writers spurn democracy, so-
cialism, and all other systems of human equality and free-
dom. Plato saw democracy as the open door to anarchy.
He would have the philosopher-king rule, and all others
take their places in a tightly organized system.

Hegel carried this idea one step further when he held
that certain states or groups of individuals were by nature
superior to others and therefore should rule them. This, of
course, is the basic point of view of all totalitarian systems
of government.

Opposed to this entire trend is the democratic tradition
which grew out of the Renaissance and came to fruition
in the work of men like Locke, Rousseau, and their f ol-
lowers. It holds that all men are by nature free and equal.
This position is basic to the French Revolution and the
American Declaration of Independence and Constitution. It
affirms that there are certain rights with which all men
are endowed by their Creator, and which cannot be taken
away from them under any conditions. These rights have
been listed in many ways, chief of which is life, liberty,
and the pursuit of happiness.**

This position led to the influential doctrine of laissez
faire, a doctrine which characterized the early years of
development in the United States. It limited the authority
of the state and magnified the freedom of the individual to
work and hold the rewards of his work.

Today philosophers are seeking to discover a balance be-
tween these two positions. Complete freedom leads to a
crass individualism in which the powerful oppress the weak.
Complete regulation leads to the same end, but the oppres-
sors are those who happen to gain control of the govern-
ment. Dewey and many modem thinkers agree in this
seeks a freedom within the social group by which both the
individual and the group will prosper* A great many of the
social experiments of the present are in this direction, seek-
ing to balance individual interests and group interests in
such a way that both will be served and neither sacrificed
to the other.

Chapter VIII
MAN AND EDUCATION

THE SOPHISTS PLATO ARISTOTLE QUINTTLIAN
ABELARD LUTHER BACON HOBBES

COMENIUS LOCKE ROUSSEAU
PESTALOZZI HERBART FROEBEL BEWEY

Why do we establish schools and pay for tliem? Is the
fundamental purpose of education the training of obe-
dient citizens of a totalitarian state, or is U the devel-
opment of free men in a democracy? Shall the church
or the state dominate the schools? What shall we
teach in our schools?

As we survey the whole course of man's development
from the earliest times to the present and from the most
primitive and simple to the most complex ways of living,
we are strongly impressed by the fact that wherever men
have lived together there has been some group interest in
education. As the group becomes more complex this in-
terest grows, and institutions definitely charged with the
task of teaching are created. Thus the school comes into
existence and an educational system evolves.

But, so far as we know from the meager records which
have been left, early man had only a very simple educa-
tional system. Most of the child's learning was picked up
as he associated with his parents and other members of the
family, tribe, dan, or larger group. He learned to fish and
hunt, to prepare his food, to fight his enemies, and to take

208 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

care of his simple and elementary needs. In short, he
learned to survive in the world in which he found himself.

In time, however, as traditions and customs grew, this
simple association together was not enough* The child
could not learn all that was necessary by this method. As
a result the older men of the group took it upon themselves
to instruct the young at certain times in traditions, customs,
and group lore. One of the most important of these times
was the age of puberty, when the child was initiated into
the group as an adult Special initiation rites were held, and
if the young man stood the tests imposed upon him he was
told the most cherished secrets of the group and then ac-
cepted by the group as a full member. Thus education be-
came a definite concern of the group.

As the life of the group became more complex, certain
members of the group took it upon themselves to become
thoroughly familiar with the traditions and the customs
and devoted most of their time to the teaching of the
young. At first, this teaching was done wherever the
teacher and a group of learners cared to gather. But later
specified places for teaching and learning were set up.
These were the first schools.

Often these places of teaching and learning were also
the places where members of the group gathered for re-
ligious purposes. This was due to the fact that among
early people the traditions, customs, lore, and ways of
living were tied up closely with their religion. Their gods
were believed to be the powers who established customs
and traditions. Thus, worship of the gods and compliance
with customs and traditions were so closely united that
education was largely religious education, and everything
that was learned had a religious sanction. Consequently, it
was natural that the teachers should be men of religious
power and that the places of learning should be also the
places of worship.

The ancient Hebrews reveal this fact clearly. Their
schools were held in the synagogue or place of religious
worship and their teachers were the rabbis. Even though
education kter became concerned with a great deal more

MAN AND EDUCATION 2OQ

than mere religious matters, the leaders of the religious
life of the poeple continued to hold a dominant position in
the education of the young, and a large part of the material
taught was directly or indirectly of a religious nature.

In time the thinkers or philosophers began to devote con-
siderable attention to the matter of education. They
wanted to know what should be taught the young and
how it should be taught They gave thought to the rela-
tionship of education to the rest of group life, its impor-
tance and necessity. They took up questions of the aims
or purposes of education, of the methods of teaching, of
what should be taught In this way education became a
major concern of the philosophers.

This development was logical and necessary. If a philoso-
pher believed that a certain thing was true, his next ques-
tion was: How can others be instructed so as to believe it
to be true? Every philosopher, as soon as he developed his
philosophy, was confronted with the problem of how to
get others to accept his philosophy as true. And the an-
swer was always "through education."

Education as Viewed by the Early Greek Philosophers

Among the Greeks, the Sophists, as we have seen, were
individualists. They believed that man should be trained
to take care of himself at all times and advance himself in
his community at all cost. Thus, they advocated a system
of education which would promote the happiness and in-
sure the success of the individual. Since a great deal of
man's activity at that time hinged upon public discus-
sion and the workings of public opinion, the Sophists based
their education upon training in debate and oratory. They
wanted the young men trained to argue well and con-
vincingly before their fellows so that they might win their
cases.

This training was careful and thorough. The young men
learned to build logical arguments which could not be
broken down, and to deliver these arguments with a per-
suasiveness of voice and personality such as to win their
hearers. This included training in logic, mastery of the

210 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

laws and customs of the Athenians, a familiarity with the
literature of the past so as to be able to use illustrations
from it, great practice in speaking and careful training
of the voice, and a thorough mastery of the language of
the people so that it could be used with ease and brilliance.
The Sophists, strolling teachers who taught for a fee, held
that an individual so trained could rise to high places in
the life of Athens and could lead the people. But, there
was tied up with this a belief on the part of many Sophists
that the best speaker should also be the best man. PRO-
TAGOHAS is believed to have said, *If you associate with me,
on that very day you will return a better man than you
came.** Part of the work of fitting a young man for a
successful career, as many Sophists saw, consisted in mak-
ing him a better -man in every way.

According to Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle

SOCRATES, although disagreeing with the Sophists in
many respects, held this same general belief. He stated
that education should make a man a better citizen and
thereby a happier individual. However, while the Sophists
placed emphasis upon the individual man, Socrates em-
phasized man as a member of the group. He taught that
the most valuable thing a man could have was knowledge*
and that such knowledge was to be obtained by removing
individual differences and discovering the essentials upon
which all men would agree.

This belief lead Socrates to go about Athens challenging
the statements and beliefs of those with whom he spoke.
He would show that many beliefs were false because they
were superficial. Then he would continue the discussion
by probing the topic deeply until he discovered the es-
sential truth about it His method has become known as
the ^dialectic* or "Socratic" method. It consists of taking a
statement made by another and so analyzing it as to re-
veal its inconsistencies. Then, after the other person rec-
ognizes the fallacies in his view, the questioner asks him
a series of questions in which he brings out what he be-
lieves to be the truth.

MAH AND EDUCATION

Socrates was a great teacher, who devoted Mm self to
the practice of education. His pupil, PLATO, developed
one of the first theories of education. In the Republic, one
of Plato's great works, we find a system of education which,
Plato believed, would insure a happy and just state.

Since Plato believed that men were by nature different
and should be put into classes corresponding with their
basic differences, he developed a plan of education which
would meet this need It was a plan by which men would
be selected and trained for work in one of three classes.
During the first eighteen years of a boy's life he was to be
trained in gymnastics, music, and literature, learning to
read and write, to pky and sing, and to take part in many
sports. At eighteen those boys who showed ability were
given further training, while the rest stopped and became
tradesmen, merchants, and the like*

Those boys who were retained in the educational system
were given two years of cadet training. At twenty, those
who were found to be incapable of going on were put into
the military class and charged with defending the country.
The remainder were given more extensive training in phi-
losophy, mathematics, music, science, and other cultural
subjects, and would eventually become the leaders of so-
ciety.

In this system Plato was endeavoring to use education to
pick men for the various duties of a social group. In each
case, however, he sought to pick men in terms of their
abilities as discovered by a system of education. It is evi-
dent that Plato held education to be a matter erf state con-
cern. It was supported and controlled by the state and its
function was to select and train men for service in the
state. Plato believed that if the state would adopt this sys-
tem of education, it would produce an ideal society in
which everyone would be doing the work for which he was
suited and trained and thus would be happy.

ABISTOTLE held that the aim of education should be to
make people virtuous. Thus, there should be three periods
of training fitted to the three periods in the development
of an individual The first period, from birth to seven years

212 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

of age, should be concerned wholly with the training of
the body in preparation for formal schooling. The second
period would be that of formal schooling, from seven to
twenty-one years of age. This would consist of training in
literature, music, gymnastics, and the like.

For Aristotle, as for Plato, education was a state matter
and should be controlled by the state. Aristotle would have
the state determine what children should live and what
ones should be destroyed soon after birth because of phys-
ical deformities. Further, he would have the state deter-
mine whom a man should marry, so that desirable off-
spring would be assured. The state, he held, should use
education in order to develop citizens who could defend the
state and make it better.

The positions taken by Plato and Aristotle, positions em-
phasizing the use of education by the state as a means for
training good citizens, did not have wide influence in the
life of Athens in their day. Rather, the Sophist position
that education was for individual interests dominated. The
individualism of the times was not to be suppressed by a
few philosophers. The people listened to the philosophers,
but they followed their own interests and demanded a type
of education which would make them most successful and
happy. They were carried away with visions of personal
success and individual happiness and were in no mood to
listen to philosophers who suggested that both success and
happiness in the long run depended upon the welfare of
the group.

The Roman Conception of Education

In Rome, education followed the pattern which had been
developed by the Sophists. The ideal of the Roman was
the orator who could sway the multitudes with his elo-
quence. Success in public life was largely determined by
the power which one possessed to speak in public and to
influence mass opinion. QUJLNTJULIAN, the Roman authority
on education, pointed out that tie orator had to be more
than an eloquent speaker. He must also be "a good man/*
one of "excellent mind." He believed that "the man who

MAN AND EDUCATION 213

can duly sustain his character as a citizen, who is qualified
for the management of public and private affairs, and who
can govern communities by his counsels, settle them by
means of laws, and improve them by means of judicial en-
actments, can certainly be nothing else but an orator."

Thus, tie heart of Roman education was the training of
the orator. This included knowledge of logic, good morals,
a careful schooling in the laws of the nation, and a char-
acter that was above suspicion. CICERO developed this
scheme thoroughly and became himself the model of the
Roman orator.

Early Christian Conception of Education

With the development of Christianity education was
once more concerned with religious questions. Those in-
dividuals who wished to become members of the Christian
community needed instruction in the beliefs and rites of
the Christian faith. Thus "catechumenaT schook were es-
tablished to give such instruction to the "catechumens'* or
candidates for admission to the group. Further, as Chris-
tianity came into contact with other religions and the phi-
losophies of the world it became necessary to train leaders
who could explain Christian beliefs to the leaders and the
people of the times. This led to the setting up of "catecheti-
cal" schools in which instruction was carried on by the
question and answer method, the method of the catechism.
Out of these schools came the Apologists, men able to meet
the questionings of those interested in Christianity and to
answer the many critics of the movement. Many of these
Apologists, after receiving training in the catechetical
schools, became teachers in them and instructed a great
number of individuals who spread throughout the then-
known world preaching and teaching the Christian beliefs
and doctrines. Among the most important of these were
CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA and the great theologian
ORIGEN.

These men, along with many others, believed in educa-
tion as the only sure means of protecting the Christian
movement and spreading .it throughout the world. For

214 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

them education was not an instrument for the state, as
Plato and Aristotle had held, but an instrument for the
church, to be used in the service o God. The influence of
these early Christian thinkers was wide, and schools under
the control and direction of the church began to spring up
everywhere. By 529 this movement had become so power-
ful that the Emperor Justinian ordered all pagan schools
dosed and permitted only Christian schools to operate.
Thereby Christian education, a system under the control of
the church, was left without a rival in the vast Roman
Empire.

St. Benedict and the Monastic Way of Life

As life in the Roman Empire became more and more
corrupt, many devout people fled from society and estab-
lished themselves in secluded groups, living in monasteries.
We speak of this way of life as "monasticism." Although
the chief purpose of the various monasteries was religious
living, education was not neglected. SAINT BENEDICT, head
of the famous monastery at Monte Cassino in southern
Italy, established a "rule 7 * for the government of the mem-
bers of his monastery. This included work and study, and
emphasized the belief that education was necessary for the
continuance of Christianity. As the influence of Saint Bene-
dict spread and his "rule" was adopted in principle by
other monasteries, schools became a part of monastic life.
At first these schools were devoted to the education of
young men who planned to enter the monastery. Later
others who wished some education but did not intend to
devote themselves to the religious life came to the mon-
asteries for training. Thus, two types of schools developed
in connection with the monasteries, one for the "internT
or those who were dedicated to religion and the other for
the "externf* or those who came only for education.

At first this education consisted merely of reading in or-
der to study the Bible, writing to copy the sacred books,
and some calculation for the figuring of holy days and other
church festivals. By the end of the sixth century it had
grown until it covered the "seven liberal arts" of grammar,

MAN AND EDUCATION 215

rhetoric, dialectic, arithmetic, geometry, music, and as-
tronomy. These subjects were taught almost wholly by the
question-and-answer method.

Thus, throughout the so-called Dark Ages of European
history, those centuries when the lamp of civilization
burned low in Europe, some learning was preserved in the
monasteries, a learning which was wholly under the control
of and for the service of the church. Its flfoi was funda-
mentally the salvation of the human soul in a world of
temptation and sin. This became the general gfrn of all
education during these dark days.

Education in the Middle Ages and Early Renaissance

A light in these centuries of darkness was the work of
Charlemagne, Emperor of the Holy Roman Empire during
the early part of the ninth century. He called the Anglo-
Saxon ALCUIN from the monastic school at York, England,
to help him establish a palace school and to reform edu-
cation in his empire. Alcuin established a monastic school
at Tours, and wrote many textbooks on grammar, rhetoric,
and dialectic as well as a work on psychology.

Alcuin had great influence in the empire and left his im-
print upon many scholars, among them JOHN SCOTUS
ERIGENA. Erigena and the others of this group followed
the general position of the times in holding that education
was fundamentally a matter of religion and the salvation
of the human soul. Its purpose was vocational only in so
far as it might serve to train young men for the church.
Popular education was to be based wholly on religious mat-
ters and everything taught pointed to religion in some way
or other. This position, of course, helped the church to
maintain itself as the dominant institution of these ages.

The education of Scholasticism did not depart from this
general point of view. Although the Schoolmen studied
widely, their aim was to prove the reasonableness of the
doctrines of the church. PETER ABELARD, one of the great-
est of the Schoolmen, devoted much of his time to teach-
ing and was influential in the founding of the University of
Paris. Here theology was the dominant interest, and the

2l6 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PfflLOSOPHEKS

core of teaching was the presentation of the doctrines of
the church. Abelard never lost the conviction that all the
doctrines of the church could be proved to be logical and
scientific.

After several centuries, as we have seen, thinkers began
to question tfrfc complete dominance of the church. It was
inevitable, when men began to attempt to prove the doc-
trines of the church by reasonable means, that some would
question the proofs offered.

Further, there began to arise classes of merchants and
skilled tradesmen whose interests were largely outside of
the church. They desired an education which would fit
their children to follow them in their trades or to succeed
in commercial pursuits. As these skilled workmen began to
"unite into "guilds* or early trade unions, they established
schools to train young men for service in the particular
trades. In this way, guild schools and later burgher or town
schools sprang Tip. Although religious questions were con-
sidered in these schools, the main purpose for them was
vocational rather than religious.

Thus, as the Middle Ages faded so faded the complete
dominance of the church in matters of education. Along
with the guild and burgher schools there arose court
schools founded and supported by wealthy rulers of the
Italian cities. One of the most famous and influential of
these was presided over by the noted scholar VITTOBINO
DA FELTKE at Mantua. He sought a harmonious develop-
ment of mind, body, and morals, following the teachings of
the ancient Greeks. He wished to prepare boys for a prac-
tical life in the world of the age. He gave time to Latin,
mathematics, fencing, wrestling, dancing, ball-playing and
other physical exercise, and also to the Latin and Greek
classics which had been rediscovered by such men as
Petrarch and his contemporaries.

Schools similar to that of Vittorino were founded at
Florence, Padua, Pavia, Milan, Ferrara, and other Italian
cities. They all represented a move away from the church
and a definite challenge to the religious dominance of edu-
cation.

MAN AND EDUCATION

Martin Luther and the Protestant Reformation

While the leaders of the Italian Renaissance were chal-
lenging the church's control of education, the leaders of
the Northern or German Renaissance were substituting. the
control of the people's church, the Lutheran church, for
that of the Roman Catholic church. MABTIN LUTHER,
spearhead of the Protestant Reformation, the northern
counterpart of the Italian Renaissance, held that everyone
should know how to read his Bible and interpret it ac-
cording to his understanding.

Thus, Luther and his followers were driven by a neces-
sary logic to support education for all people. They advo-
cated training in the elements of reading, writing, and
figuring, and held that, though fundamentally this knowl-
edge was to make possible their understanding of the
Bible and religion, it was also necessary for good citizen-
ship. Luther wrote that even though there were no heaven
nor hell, education would be necessary for the citizen,

This swing away from the dominance of education by
the church, and its control more and more by secular
forces, led to the establishment of schools and school sys-
tems by cities and by interested private groups. An ex-
ample was the school of JOHANN STURM at Strassburg,
which was then in Germany. This institution aimed at
"piety, knowledge, and eloquence." Although religion was
a prominent factor in the teaching of the school, other
matters were also considered, and the control of the school
was not in the hands of the church.

As this trend toward secular education grew in strength
there began to appear men who attempted to put it into
philosophic form, to draw up a philosophy of education
to fit the new age and new demands. JOHN MILTON, the
great English poet, who was also a schoolmaster, urged
students to turn to the ancient writings of Greece and
Rome and study them, not for their form, but because they
contained all that man needed for a happy life. He be-
lieved that the best possible education was to be obtained
from the study of these classical writings,

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

The Views of Bacon and Hobbes

But tills devotion to the past did not hold Its own in the
face o the growing interest in the world in which men
were then living. Science was making itself known and
respected. Men everywhere saw the value of scientific
understanding and began to emphasize the need for scien-
tific knowledge. Thus any philosophy of education which
would prove acceptable to the age had to be based on the
scientific knowledge then available.

FRANCIS BACON pointed out the need for clear and ac-
curate thinking, showing that any mastery of the world in
which man lived was dependent upon careful understand-
ing of the facts of this world. Bacon would first rid the
mind of aH prejudices. Then he would have one observe
carefully and collect all possible data from which to draw
condusions or hypotheses to be tested by other data which
could be collected later. As society accumulated more
knowledge it should pass this on to the young through
schools so that they would start in their thinking where
their parents and the older members of society left off.
Thus, education was, for him, a passing on of the knowl-
edge of the past, the accumulated knowledge of society, to
the young.

The interest of THOMAS HOBBES in government led him
to argue that the ruler should have the right to determine
the kind of education fit for his subjects; and that the sub-
jects must accept the educational system set up by the
ruler. Education, according to Hobbes, is one of the ab-
solute rights of the sovereign power. It serves to strengthen
the state, and therefore should be watched carefully and
controlled at all times. Here we have education as an in-
strument of the state, set up and controlled to serve the
ruler and his system. Each child should be trained in order
to serve the state better.

Comenius* Philosophy of Education

Among the great educators of this period was JOHN
AMOS COMENIXJS, a Moravian bishop and teacher. He be-

MAN AND EDUCATION

lieved that it was possible for everyone to learn everything.
Thus he visioned a long period of encyclopedic training
during which the student would be introduced to all sci-
entific knowledge. At first everything was to be taught in
*a general and undefined manner," while, as the child
grew, teaching was to become more exact and specific.
This training, Comenius argued, should follow the
^method of nature. 3 * His plan was to expose the pupil to the
world in which he lived, let him observe, and thereby lead
fri to an understanding of things about him. As the child
grew older his observations would become more detailed
and cover a wider and wider area.

Locke and "Rousseau

Although the scientific trend in education, as developed
by Bacon, Hobbes, and Comenius, interested him, JOHN
LOCKE was more interested in the training of the English
gentleman, a youth of breeding and wisdom. He con-
demned the education of his day as being little more than
a reproduction of the old interest in the classics and re-
ligion. He did not believe that such would fit a man for the
manifold duties of the world in which he lived. Conse-
quently, Locke sought a more practical and efficient type
of education.

Locke held that the human soul at birth was a blank
tablet but possessed of the power to receive impressions
from the outside world and endowed with a desire for
pleasure. Consequently, he saw education as the process of
learning through experience with this outside world and
working toward the realization of happiness. His ideal
was a sound mind in a sound body.

To realize this ideal, Locke advocated much physical
exercise and a hardening process by which the body would
become strong and able to endure hardships and long
physical strain without breaking. Further, the child should
be exposed to as much of the world about him as possible,
so that he could receive impressions in great numbers.
Travel, teaching by private tutors, and wide experience in

22O BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

the social world were advocated by Locke as methods for
training.

The aim of education, Loclce argued, should be an in-
dividual who knew all the proper methods of association
with his fellows, who was wise in the ways of the world so
that he could take care of himself at all times, who was
pious, and who had enough knowledge to meet the de-
mands of his environment. This, of course, was a practical
education which would fit the young man for complete
living in the world of Locke's day.

In contrast to this social emphasis in education, JEAN
JACQUES ROUSSEAU held that society warps the child and
that its influence is wholly evil. Consequently, he would
protect the child from society at all times until he is so
completely developed that society cannot destroy his inner
nature.

In his famous book, Emile, Rousseau outlines the edu-
cation of a boy in a manner which is natural and sponta-
neous. Emile, the hero of the story, is to be permitted to
develop in accord with his own nature, without interfer-
ence. Education is protective, a means of shielding the
child from the influence of society which will warp the
natural growth of his real self.

For the first four years of the child's life, Rousseau
would emphasize physical training, the development of
the Ixxly. Then, from five to twelve years, the child would
develop his senses. He would live in the world of nature,
and observe many things. Intellectual training, through
books and the like, would begin when the child is thirteen
years old. Even here Rousseau would follow the natural
curiosity of the child, and give instruction only as the
child naturally came to demand it During this period the
child would learn a trade in order to be economically inde-
pendent. Between fifteen and twenty the child would be
given moral training. Here he would come into contact
with his fellows and learn the basic principles of sym-
pathy, goodness, and service to mankind. Here religion
would come into the picture.

Although Rousseau emphasized the natural training of

MAN AN1> EDUCATION

boys, He did not believe that the same training should be
given to girls. They should be educated to serve men and
make them happy. Girls were to be fitted into a pattern
demanded of men, one of restraint, While the boy should
be free to develop according to bis own inner nature, the
girl should be moulded to fit the pattern demanded by
the man.

Rousseau voiced the growing belief of his day that life
should be freed from the many restraints which had been
put about it. Men were breaking away from the past with
all its hindrances. They had escaped from the dominance
of the church, but found themselves dominated by the
restraints of society. Hobbes* point of view, that the ruler
as representative of society should set up an educational
system which would make the young worthy citizens, was
not acceptable to many. They felt that this system warped
the original nature of man. Thus Rousseau said and wrote
what was in the minds of many of his fellows. They wanted
to free themselves not only from the church, but from
the many requirements of society. Freedom was their
watchword.

JOHANN BEBNHABD BASEDOW came under the influence
of Rousseau and established an educational institution in
which he sought to put Rousseau's ideas into actual teach-
ing. His school emphasized conversation and play. The
interests of the child were considered so that this school
became in a large measure a "child centered 7 * school. All
instruction began with those things in which the child was
interested, and moved along as interests grew. The idea
spread, and many other educators sought to incorporate
Rousseau's ideas into their teaching.

Pestalozzfs Conception of Education

One of the most influential educators to be influenced by
Rousseau was JOHANN HEINBICH PESTAIXXZZI. He sought
to understand the nature of children and to build his teach-
ing on the "natural, progressive, and harmonious develop-
ment of all the powers and capacities of the human being.*

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

As he understood the natural laws, he sought to develop
children in accord with them.

Thus some educators supported one and others sup-
ported the other of two fundamental principles the prin-
ciples of social control and of nature. Which should be
dominant? Should education be a matter of building citi-
zens according to a socially accepted and determined pat-
tern, or should it be a following of the inner nature of the
diild? Here, from another angle of course, is the old prob-
lem of the individual and the group. Which should domi-
nate? This was the problem of the eighteenth century, a
century in which more and more emphasis was being
placed upon the individual and his freedom, in which the
ideas of freedom were being realized in the French and
the American revolutions.

JOHANN GOCTUEB FiCHTB approached education from
the point of view of the state. In one of the darkest mo-
ments in the life of the Prussian state he arose to deliver his
famous Addresses to the German Nation. In these he ar-
gued for group unity and social solidarity such as to create
a new and strong nation. And, as a basis for this unity he
advocated a strong system of education which would
mould the people into a whole. Education, for hm^ was to
be a means for building a nation.

Thus, education should concern itself with the greatness
of the nation. In a sense, it should be a program by which
the people of the nation should come to know and love
those factors of national life which were significant. Edu-
cation, Fichte believed, was necessary to national unity
and national progress.

Herbert's View of Education

Another great educational mind of this period was JO-
HANN FRIEDRICH HEBBABT. His interest was fundamen-
tally psychological, and this interest colored his thinking on
educational matters. Experience, for him, is the sole source
of knowledge. The mind receives impressions and organizes
them. Then its further reception and use of impressions are

MAN AND EDUCATION" 223

determined by the impressions already received and or-
ganized.

Thus, the environment ia which the child is placed is of
greatest importance. From this he receives his impressions.
If it is good, his impressions will he good and he will be
morally sound. Consequently, Herbart emphasized the
place of the teacher in the educational system. It is the
teacher who, to a great extent, determines what impres-
sions the child receives. If the teacher is wise and clever,
he will so set the scene that the child receives right im-
pressions and will thereby develop a character which is
good.

FroebeTs Conception of Education

Without doubt, one of the most consistent followers of
Rousseau's ideas of naturalism in education was FKTEDEICH
WILBELM AUGUST FEOEBEL. He believed firmly that the
nature of the child was good and that it should be al-
lowed to grow naturally. Education for him was a process
of permitting and maldng possible this natural growth of
the child. He called his school the Kindergarten, the gar-
den of children. For him the school was to be operated as
one might operate a garden. The teacher should permit
and help the children to grow, just as the gardener helps
the flowers to grow.

However, Froebel went further than Rousseau did, in
that he attempted to take into account the fact that the
child is not merely an individual, but is also a member of a
group. He would not shield the child from society, but
would help him to adjust himself to society in such a way
that his social and individual experiences would both be
helpful in tlie development of the complete personality.

Thus, in Froebel we see an attempt to reconcile the two
divergent doctrines of education which thinkers before
hiTn had held. He realized the value of natural growth and
development, and did not want this warped or interfered
with. But, he also realized that society plays a great part
in making the person a civilized being. Thus, society

224 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHU-OSOFHEBS

should not be ignored, nor should the child be educated in
complete disregard of the values of society.

Consequently, social participation, work in groups, was a
definite part of the kindergarten as conceived and founded
by Fit>ebeL At the beginning of the kindergarten day the
children gathered in a circle, each child holding the hands
of those on either side of him. This circle was supposed to
symbolize the unity of the group* Then the circle was
broken up, and children played or worked either alone or
in small groups. At the dose of the day the circle was
again formed to emphasize that even though the child was
an individual and should develop as such, he was also a
member of the whole group.

This problem of the individual and the group is still the
major problem of present-day educational thinking. Public
schools have been set up by society and are supported by
means of taxes. Thus, society has said, in effect, that it
recognizes the necessity of education for its preservation.
Further, society has designated what shall be taught in
these schools. Teachers are certified by society, and must
meet certain standards set by society.

AH of these factors indicate that society has a major
interest in education. Therefore, there are many who argue
today that the fundamental purpose of education is to
train and mould individuals into service to the state. The
whole totalitarian educational system in the twentieth-
century dictatorships is of this nature. Education is con-
trolled completely by the state and no one is permitted to
do or teach anything except that which will contribute to
the building of citizens who will devotedly serve the state
and be obedient to the will of the ruler.

But educators in the democratic countries see the danger
of destroying the individuality of children. They feel that
in so far as the individual is permitted to grow according
to his nature and to deviate from the group, he is able to
make a contribution to the groups such as will further
group progress.

One of the leaders in the field of education in our de-
mocracy is JOHN DEWEY. His theories are in agreement

MAN AND EDUCATION

with those of men who believe that the center of education
should be the individual child, Dewey recognizes, how-
ever, that neither the individual nor the group should be
given exclusive emphasis. The individual becomes truly
developed as a member of society* Further, society has the
right to demand of the individual that he prepare himself
to serve the best interests of the group. But, Dewey holds
that the best interests of the group will be served as the
individual develops his own particular talents, as he de-
velops his individual nature. Education is concerned with
the individual in society and not with the individual iso-
lated from society.

This point of view has led to the development erf what
is generally known today as the "child centered" school.
In some instances this school has gone to the extreme of
the philosophy upon which it is founded and has em-
phasized the child's interests to the exclusion of all others.
Many so-called "progressive* schools are of this type. But,
the saner representatives of this movement, under the
leadership of Dewey, have attempted to find an adequate
adjustment and reconciliation between the two extremes of
emphasis on the individual and on society. The result is a
school in which individual interests, talents, and purposes
are considered as means for contributing to the good of
the whole.

Chapter IX
MIND AND MATTER

ANAXAGORAS PLATO ABISTOTLE PHILO

ANSELM ROGER BACON PARACELSUS
FRANCES BACON HOBBES DESCARTES SPINOZA

LOCKE BERKELEY KANT
BRADLEY BOYCE JAMES DEWEY

Is the universe actually fust a great mind, or Is it really
matter throughout? Is matter mind or is mind matter?
If His mfad and matter, what is the relation between
the two? How can mind influence matter or matter i n-
fluence mind? Have philosophers found a solution to
the problem of the relationship between mind and
matter?

Anyone who opens his eyes to observe will discover a
world of objects which con be kicked about, moved from
place to place, broken into bits, shaped and moulded in
many ways, but which do not "seem to care." A piece of
day can be shaped into a thousand and one forms. A rock
can be rolled about, broken into pieces, or ground into the
finest powder.

This individual who has noted these facts knows also
that certain other objects seem "to care* what happens to
them. Indeed he finds evidence that they make plans for
their future and endeavor to carry them out. A man, for
example, seems to plan his actions, to resist forces which
would turn him from his plan, and is able to shape his

MIND AJND MATTER 227

environment to fit his plan. He moves into a barren land,
draws plans for a giant irrigation system, builds the sys-
tem, and eventually has changed an arid region to a mod-
em Eden of flowers, trees, and green grass.

The difference between the rode and man is, according
to many philosophers, to be found in the fact that in man
there is a mind which is absent in the rock. This mind,
they argue, controls that part of the individual which is
not mind. The not-mind is called matter.

The earliest people of whom we know anything recog-
nized this difference among objects in the environment
Indeed, they recognized the difference within themselves.
They experienced their bodies as composed of matter, but
they were vaguely conscious that this mass of matter was
animated by something which was distinct from matter,
and different. As far back as we can penetrate into the be-
ginnings of man's thinking, we find that he recognized a
difference between mind and matter and that he placed
mind in a more exalted realm than matter.

The earliest beliefs regarding mind and matter were
tied up with beliefs about the soul and the body. In the
days of the childhood of humanity fofa thing which made
man different from other things, this soul, was not clearly
defined or understood. Indeed in many quarters early man
believed that all the universe had a souL The rock, the tree,
the river, all had souls as well as bodies. Later, as man
developed, the idea of mind as a peculiar human posses-
sion and distinct from matter became dearer.

The Greeks exhibit all stages of this development, from
the most primitive to a dear distinction between mind
and matter. The first records whidi we have of the Greeks
reveal them as nature-worshipers believing that everything
in nature was possessed of a souL Gradually they de-
veloped a mythology or group of stories about the activities
of nature which they looked upon as alive. Then, as the
Greeks came to distinguish between the animate and the
inanimate, they no longer looked upon the rocks and trees
as having souls, but they felt that gods presided over them.
This was the period of the great theogonies or genealogies

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

of the gods who ruled over the various things in nature.
Then, as the Greek mind matured, these inventions of
fancy and of the childhood of the race gave place to more
careful studies of nature and of man. The gods were put
in a realm of celestial glory and more or less peace; nature
was held to be alive but not possessed of a soul; man was
believed to be a unique combination of soul and body.
The Greek was studying his world and himself and was
coming nearer and nearer to the belief that there must be
a dear distinction between two phases of the universe, be-
tween matter on the one hand and mind on the other,
But, the fmaT realization of this distinction was a long and
difficult process.

Mind and Matter 3 Contrasted by the
Early Greek Thinkers

The first Greek philosophers were interested, as we have
already seen, in the problem of the nature of the universe.
They saw this universe as composed of one or more original
and simple substances. But, to account for the fact that
the basic substances became a universe, they introduced a
force which in some way or other moved substance. ANAX-
TMANPEB, for example, held that the basic substance of the
universe was "the infinite," an eternal and imperishable
substance. But he endowed this substance with eternal mo-
tion in order to explain how the universe as he saw it and
as his fellows saw it came into being. Here is an early dis-
tinction between mass or substance and a force which
moves it and shapes it into objects and things.

This distinction runs through early Greek philosophy.
Each thinker suggests some basic principle or substance of
which the universe is composed, and accounts for its com-
ing into being by adding another factor which is distinct
from the basic substance and which makes it take the
many forms which we see about us in the world.

HEBAGLTTUS attempted to make the original substance
and the cause of the forms which it takes one and the
same, when he held that the first principle of the universe
was fire as a symbol of change. He saw ceaseless activity

MIND AND MATTEH

everywhere and reasoned that change or activity was all
that there was in the universe. Nevertheless, he felt that in
addition to the fact of change there was some entity which
changed, something different from the principle of change.

When Heraclitus came to speak of man, he revealed
this fact clearly. Here he made a distinction between man's
body and his soul. The body was material and the soul
was akin to divine reason. Thus, even in Heraclitus we find
a distinction between ttat which moves and that which is
moved.

In PAEMENIDES we find a suggestion that thought or
mind is in some way the creator or cause of that which is
not mind. This is tie principle which much later devel-
oped into the great idealistic movement Parmenides ar-
gued that being and thought are one and the same, for
what cannot be thought cannot be and what cannot be
cannot be thought Thought, or mind, and being, or sub-
stance, are identical to him. All reality, he held, is en-
dowed with mind, and mind is, in some way not quite
dear to him, the cause of everything. Mind causes matter
to be, creates matter. Although Pannenides does not see
all the implications of this position, and although he does
not hold to this point of view consistently, we find in his
writings a foreshadowing of one of the major positions
regarding mind and matter, the position that actually mind
is all that exists and that which we call matter is a creation
of mind for its own purposes.

By the time of ANAXAGOBAS, during the fifth century
B.C., we have a clear statement of the theory that all
movement is caused by mind or "nous* which is distinct
from the substance that moves. This mind is, for Anaxag-
oras, a free source of all movement Further, it knows all
things in the past, in the present, and in the future, and is
the arranger and cause of all things.

Here Anaxagoras expressed fairly clearly what many
philosophers before htm had been striving to express, a
vague dualism between matter and something else which
causes matter to move and become. But, for him, mind is
not an individual thing to be found in each object. Rather,

23 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

it is a world mind which is free from tlie individual objects
of the universe but which serves as the moving principle
in them. This world mind rules all things and does not get
itself mixed up or mingled with things. It started the
world, and is, in some way, in the world and the imme-
diate cause of the world,

Anaxagoras was anxious, as were most of the thinkers
of his day, to explain the universe in purely mechanical
terms. But he found instances in which this explanation
did not seem to be adequate. Then he turned to the theory
of the world mind As Aristotle points out in commenting
on this point: ^Anaxagoras uses mind as a device by which
to construct the universe, and when he is at a loss for an
explanation of why anything necessarily is, then he drags it
in; but in other cases he assigns any other cause rather
than mind, for what comes into being,* In other words,
Anaxagoras was struggling to get away from the idea that
matter is not a self-contained principle, but he was still
held by the beliefs of the past.

The Sophists were not concerned with explanations of
the nature of the universe. Indeed, most of them felt that
all attempts to discover the origin of the universe or to
locate the first substance or substances of which all else
was created was nothing short of foolishness. They cen-
tered their attention upon man and especially upon the
mind of man. .They believed that this mind was the pivot
about which all else revolved. All truth was, for them,
measured by the mind of the individual man, so that what
each man's mind told him was true was in fact true. Thus,
the Sophists accepted the dualism between mind and mat-
ter and held that mind was the determiner of all things.

Plat o, Aristotle, and the Later Greek Philosophers

The mind, which he also referred to as the soul, was for
PLATO the seat of all knowledge. Ideas had been implanted
in the mind before it became imbedded in the body. Birth
clouded the mind, so that the individual forgot all that he
knew. But, through a process of questioning it was pos-
sible, Plato believed, to cause the mind to remember what

MIND AND MATTER 231

it had known before birth. All knowledge, Be held, was
located in the mind, knowledge gained from experiences
before birth. When this knowledge was recalled or remem-
bered, the individual knew.

Plato held firmly to the idea that the universe is com-
posed of two principles; mind and matter. Mind is wholly
distinct from matter. Matter is, for him, a dull weight that
mind must carry because mind has become entangled with
matter. Matter is the raw material upon which mind works.
It has no oim or reality except as mind works on it and
forms it into being. Mind is the only true reality, the thing
of most worth, the principle of law and order in the
universe.

This matter, dead and thus a slave, is impressed by
mind with the ideas which mind has experienced in the
ideal world, ideas which are real and true. It takes the
shape of these ideas, and holds this shape for some time.
The tree which you and I see is not a real tree to Plato. It
has come about because mind has taken some matter and
impressed upon it the idea of tree. The true tree, the real
tree exists only in the realm of ideas, and has been seen by
mind before birth. .

Plato resorts to a myth to explain how mind, pure and
untarnished, originally got mixed up with matter. He says
that it was existing on a star in its pure form but that it
became possessed of a desire for the world of sense. There-
fore it became imprisoned in a body. Here it seeks to free
itself from the body and return to the star. This is, of
course, not a satisfactory explanation; it is evidence of the
fact that at this point Plato was not sure of himself. He
was sensing what became later a most difficult problem:
that of explaining the relationship between pure matter and
pure mini How could these very opposite things ever
come into any relationship with each other? This problem
has haunted philosophers even to the present. Plato could
not solve it; and it remains unsolved.

ARISTOTLE could not solve it. But he sensed that the
solution lay along the line of an intimate relationship be-
tween the two. Mind, for him, was in matter as its forma-

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

tive principle, as its form. He held that there could be no
matter without mind and no mind without matter. Even
the lowest forms of matter known have form and therefore
have mind. As we progress up the scale to man we find a
clearer mind. But mind is everywhere.

Mind, then, for Aristotle, is not outside of matter, as
Plato had held, but is within matter as the cause of all
that is. Matter has existence and offers resistance to mind
which attempts to form it into shapes. At the same time,
matter is the ground of beings and therefore must seek in
some way to be shaped. Mind, then, has both an antagonist
and a willing helper in matter.

The Epicureans, in their attempt to explain the rela-
tionship between the mind and the body, turned to the
writings of Democritus. This ancient philosopher had ar-
gued that aH sense perception results from "idols'* or im-
ages which objects throw off and which hit the sense
organs. For example, when I see a chair my eyes are be-
ing bombarded by little idols of the chair which it is con-
stantly throwing off. These little images travel through
space to the eye, and I see a chair.

In the same way, the Epicureans argued, when I want
to ran, an image of running presents itself to the mind*
Then the mind hits the soul with the image. Since the
soul is spread aH over the body, it hits the body witih this
image, and the body runs. This appears very crude and
unbelievable today, but it was an earnest attempt to ex-
plain how mind, which, was so different from matter, could
influence matter so that when the mind has an idea the
body acts in accord with it

The Stoics held that mind is material just as is matter,
but of a much finer texture. It is a spark of the divine fire.
The mind is, for them, the soul become rational or having
acquired the power of conceptual thought. Thus, mind is
distinct from matter only in degree, not in kind.

The Skeptics, such as PYRBHO, held that it was impos-
sible to prove that matter existed, since all that we have
is our ideas or thoughts. To demonstrate that something
exists which corresponds to our thoughts is impossible.

MIND AND MATTEH 233

Thus, all that we have is ideas in the mind. We must act
upon these, hoping that we will get what we expect, but
with no assurance. Mind exists, but there is no proof that
matter exists.

The Positions of Philo and St. Augustine
As Greek thought came into contact with the Jewish
religious thought of men like PHILO the attempt was made
to find a basis for reconciling the ideas of both traditions of
thought. Philo, being fundamentally interested in religion,
thought of God as the world mind which shapes matter.
Thus, the universe for him is composed of mind and mat-
ter. Likewise, man is a dualism of mind and matter. Pure
thought, "nous," is the chief essence of man, and matter
or the body is that upon which mind works. Thus mind
in man controls his body or matter, just as the world mind,
God, controls matter in the world. Pure intelligence is
added to the soul from God, thus tying man on to the di-
vine in the universe.

Christianity brought to the front the idea that matter is
the source of all evil, a thing to be shunned. Matter holds
the soul down and therefore must be denied by the soul
if it is to attain salvation. Thus, throughout most of early
Christian thinking we find a definite despising of matter.
Although matter had been thought of by early philoso-
phers as something less than mind, dead, or the material
upon which mind worked, there was never that complete
degradation of matter which characterized Christianity.
Further, there was not the earnest desire to escape from
matter, a desire born of fear of matter. Early C^hristianity
taught man that matter was the source of all evil and that
man's salvation lay in his turning away from matter to
pure spirit or God.

AUGUSTINE recognized the difference between mind and
matter in man, but held that truth is not something which
the human mind creates. Rather, truth is, for him, some-
thing that exists independently of mind, and has its source
in God. Mind may discover truth, just as the Platonic

234 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

mind saw ideas in the ideal world. For Augustine, the mind
of God is the abode of ideas and of truth.

According to the Medieval Christian Thinkers

Christianity emphasized another principle which had a
telling effect upon man. Not only did it disparage matter
by making it the source of evil, but it disparaged the hu-
man mind. This was done to elevate God to the place in
the universe which Christian thinkers believed He should
have.

The human mind, Christian philosophers taught, is a
poor and inefficient instrument. It is full of mistakes and
of error. Of course, man can use his mind to reason, but
his conclusions must conform to the divine authority. No
one could be permitted to reach a conclusion through use
of his mind which in any way questioned the edicts of
authority. The church and its doctrines were believed to
be the ultimate in truth. Augustine had held that truth
was independent of the human mind. Therefore, the func-
tion of the mind was not to create truth but to discover it
When the Church ruled that a certain doctrine was true,
the human mind had to accept it without question. AN-
SELM held to this position finnly. He argued that the hu-
man .mind may try to understand the doctrines of the
Church, but if it is unable to reach understanding, it must
accept them just the same. This was the early position of
Christian thinkers: the more contradictory to reason a thing
is the more faith it takes to believe. But the human mind
must never question. Belief must precede reason.

When ABELAKD took the position that reason should pre-
cede faith, he was going against a long and honored tra-
dition. But Abelaxd never for a moment doubted that rea-
son would prove the Christian doctrines to be true. He was
willing to give the human mind freedom to question doc-
trines, but he was certain that true reasoning would bring
the mind to accept the doctrines as true and beyond ques-
tion. Nevertheless, when once the human mind was per-
mitted to question Christian doctrine the stability of this
doctrine was in danger. Man was no longer beaten down

MIND AND MATTER 23$

by authority and began to venture out to challenge doc-
trine. The human mind, which had been held within a
body of accepted doctrines for many centuries, began after
Abelard to feel its way toward independence*

The result was nothing short o revolutionary. Once the
restraint was eased, man began to think about many things
and to question much that he had not dared to question
previously. He began to exercise his mind and to wrestle
with numerous problems which he had shunned or not
even seen previously. A new and exciting world dawned.

THOMAS AQUINAS, though developing a position which
was fundamentally religious, sought to champion the hu-
man mind by endeavoring to show that the universe as a
revelation of God is rational Recognizing the power of the
mind, he sought to show that Christianity, as interpreted
by the church, was logically consistent In doing this, he
fell within that tradition which was becoming so important,
a tradition in which the human mind was fast becoming
the court of final appeal No longer was it possible for any
institution, even the church, to disregard human reason or
to insult it by proposing doctrines which were not con-
sistent with the best that the mind knew.

It was dear to Aquinas that man was both, mind and
matter and that the two were intimately connected. How-
ever, he did not believe that mind was so tied to the body
that it could not function in more or less complete freedom
from he ills of matter. Indeed, even though matter was
the seat of evfl, mind was able to criticize matter and escape
from it and its temptations.

Roger Bacon and Paracelsus

With the rise of natural science, the human mind began
to assume a more important place in the scheme of things*
ROGER BACON, a peculiar mixture of medieval monk and
modern scientific scholar, stood midway between the old
religious point of view and the more modern position of
trust in the mind* He set about to use the mind to under-
stand, and, in a small degree, to control matter. And he was
startled to find that he could not only know, but could

236 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PEQDLOSOPIIERS

control matter. In him, then, we see the symbol of hu-
manity feeling its wings, of the mind attacking the world
of matter and realizing success which acted as a spur to
further attacks and a growing confidence in the power of
the mind.

It was inevitable that free thought should assume a more
and more prominent place in the new world, which was
coming into being. As man thought and found thinking
good, he would think more, and gradually become impa-
tient with any authority which denied him the right to
thinL Success bred courage, and courage resulted in more
use of the mind and more success. There was no stopping
this process once it was begun.

Of course, it was inevitable that the first blush of success
should lead to extravagances, to an over-enthusiasm re-
garding the powers of the mind. In a man like PARACEL-
SUS, for example, we see evidences of this over-enthusiasm.
He visioned short cuts to mental mastery of the universe,
and suggested many strange things which today appear
little other than pure superstitions. Alchemy and magic ap-
peared to him, to be ways by which mind might master
matter.

But these vagaries were soon to be corrected by men
who saw further and saw clearer. The great scientists,
among whom were GALILEO, KEPLER, NEWTON, and
others, realized that the mastery of the understanding of
matter by mind was a long and arduous task, requiring
careful study and a growing keenness of understanding.
They set man on this hard road with definiteness, and
proved by their successes that this was the only road to
success.

Francis Bacon and Hobbes

Then came FRANCIS BACON (not to be confused with
Roger Bacon), a man who could take the modern spirit of
confidence in the power of the human mind and the
equally modern science and weave them together so as to
suggest a method by which mind could master the uni-

AND MATTER 237

verse. He showed tow this new-found strength could be
used and how it could lead to success.

Francis Bacon's method was fairly simple as we look at
it today. He would first dear the mind of all "idols" or false
ways of thinking. lien, as a free instrument, the mind
could attack the world by careful observation, the collec-
tion of data, and the interpretation of these data. This was
the method of "induction,* the moving from numerous bits
of evidence to a general principle which will explain the
data collected. Here was a method which mind could em-
ploy, and which, Bacon believed, would lead inevitably to
success. Thus, he set the pattern for thinking, and chal-
lenged men to think clearly and accurately.

But inevitably the question as to the rektionship be-
tween mind and matter would arise. Though some earKer
philosophers had attacked the problem, they were not in
any position to do more than sketch in its bold outline.
Then, during those early days of the Renaissance, when
man was enchanted by the new-felt power which he was
discovering, the question faded into the background. Man
was more interested in using his mind than in asking ques-
tions about it Nevertheless, sooner or later it was certain
that the question would arise again and demand solution.

With THOMAS HOBBES we have an early modern at-
tempt to explain the relationship between mind and matter.
Being a materialist and believing that everything could be
explained in material terms, Hobbes taught that mind is
motion in the brain. In other places he refers to mind as an
internal substance, a subtle body, in the head. When the
mind has an idea, there is nothing more than motion of a
material substance in the brain. Here Hobbes seems to
solve the problem of the relationship between mind and
matter by holding that mind is matter and that there is no
difference. Mind is simply a more subtle matter than that
of body. This was the ynnfcmt explanation.

But, though a materialist, Hobbes does not seem content
with this explanation. In other passages we find him speak-
ing of mental processes as appearances of motion, as the ef-
fects of motion rather than as motion itself. Consciousness

238 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

comes after motion as its effect This theory is known in
modern philosophy as *epiphenomenalism. w

Thus, though Hobbes attempts to account for mind in
terms of matter, he is not quite satisfied with the results,
and seems at times to drift in the direction of a dualism one
side of which is motion and the other side the effect of
motion,

Descartes and Spinoza

The same problem challenged DESCARTES. He did not
try to dodge the issue, but stated clearly that the universe,
for him, consisted of two substances, mind and body. And
these two substances were fundamentally different If, then,
mind is wholly different from body or matter, how is it
that mind can have an effect upon matter or move the
body? How is it that when one wishes to walk, he walks?

TTie solution which Be offers is vague and full of con-
fusion. Determined to stick to his dualism, a complete and
absolute dualism, he has difficulty in explaining interac-
tion. Mind, he tells us, is troubled by matter, by the proc-
esses which go on in the body. At another place he offers
an interesting but not wholly satisfying explanation of in-
teraction. He suggests that the body and the mind make
contact through the pineal gland, a small gland in the
brain* The body, he says, moves the pineal gland or the
mind moves it In either case this movement is transmitted
to the other which is itself moved: I wish to walk; I trans-
mit motion to the pineal gland which transmits it to the
body; and I walk.

The unsatisfactoriness o this theory is proof of the fact
that Descartes, having once taken his stand as to the dif-
ferences between mind and matter, could not find any ex-
planation of the experienced fact of interaction. It seems
that he must either deny interaction and leave the question
unsolved, or take the position that mind and matter are
enough alike to influence each other.

Descartes* successors rejected the idea of interaction and
sought to explain the relationship between mind and mat-
ter by some other principle, ARNOLD GUEUNCX taught that

MINB AND MATTEB 239

God has so arranged the universe from the beginning that
when the mind has an idea, matter moves as though it
were affected, but actually there is no interaction. God
created the world and in this creation he so determined
everything that when my mind has an idea of walking my
body walks. Guelincx writes that "God in his infinite wis-
dom has instituted laws of motion, so that a movement
which is entirely independent of my will and power coin-
cides with my free volition,"

NICOLAS MAEKBRANCHS held that we do not experience
a world of matter and are not affected by that world.
Rather, God is like mind, and influences our minds so that
we think we experience a material world. Indeed, he tells
us, "If God had destroyed the created world, and would
continue to affect me as he now affects me, I should con-
tinue to see what I now see; and I should believe that this
(created) world exists, since it is not this world that acts on
my mind" but God himself.

Another point of view, held by many Cartesians, was
that whenever something happens in matter, God affects
us so that we think we are being affected by the happening
in matter. This is known as the theory of "occasionalism":
the happening in the material world is the occasion for
God's action upon us.

These theories, as it should be clear, are not at all satis-
factory. They make of God a sort of showman putting on
a performance for us, fooling us by pilling the proper
strings at the proper time. One is tempted to ask the ques-
tion, if God created the world, why did he create such a
situation? Would it not have been easier to have created a
world in which mind and matter interacted?

But philosophers were not contented, and they struggled
to reach a more acceptable theory of the relationship be-
tween mind and matter. SPINOZA taught that mind and
matter were two attributes of one and the same substance,
God. These two attributes were, for him, absolutely inde-
pendent of each other and neither could influence the
other. But, since they are attributes of God, we have
thought and action moving along in parallel lines, both

240 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

being the thought and action of God. This is the theory of
*psychophysical parallelism.** My mind, Spinoza would
argue, is a mode of the thinking attribute of God, and my
body is a mode of the extended attribute of God. My
thought is paralleled by action in the body so that it ap-
pears that my mind influences my body. Actually there is
BO direct influence.

Locke, 'Berkeley 9 and Hume

JOHN LOCKE abandoned the attempt to malce two unlike
tilings influence each other. He begins his thinking with the
tihesis that the mind is a sort of blank tablet upon which
the world of matter writes by means of sensations. This
mind does not have innate or inborn ideas, but it does have
the power to arrange impressions in such a way as to pro-
duce a consistent system of thoughts. Mind and body, for
Lodfae, exist as real things, but they interact Bodies act
upon the mind and produce sensations. Locke spends a
great deal of time developing this point of view, but, when
he comes up against the question as to how these two un-
like substances interact, he is confused, and even though
he does not want to, he lapses into occasionalism.

Accepting the dualism of mind and body as his starting
point, GEORGE BERKELEY draws the conclusion that the
material cannot exist and that the only thing that we can
prove as existing is mind. Matter, belief in which leads to
atheism and materialism, as he argued, cannot exist. To
exist means to be perceived, therefore bodies have no ex-
istence without mind. The mind creates the material world,
and this world has existence only in mind. This is the ideal-
istic position in modern philosophy.

DAVID HXJME went a step further and showed that, on
the basis of Locke's dualism, we cannot prove even the
existence of mind. All that we can prove is that ideas, im-
pressions, come one after tte other. Whence they come
cannot be proven. There is, for Hume, no material world
and no mind; just a succession of impressions.

Philosophy could not stand this very logical position.
Since it was logical, thinkers began to ask if the premises

MIND ANJ> SCATTER

upon which It was based, those of a dualism between mind
and matter, might not be false.

The Views of Leibnitz

LEIBNITZ attacked the problem by holding that body, or
matter, is not something dead and static, but is composed
of many monads or centers of force. These monads differ
in clearness of their perceptions, and mind consists of these
perceptions. Every monad or center of force has the power
of perception. It perceives or represents and expresses in
itself the entire universe. The higher the monad, the clearer
are these perceptions.

For Leibnitz the human organism contains a central
monad or "queen monad" which has before it the picture
of the entire body. God, in creating the world, so arranged
things that the monads composing the body and the
"queen monad" are m perfect hannony. "Souls act/* he
writes, "according to the laws of final causes, by means of
desire, ends, and means. Bodies act according to the laws of
efficient causes or motions. And the two realms are in har-
mony with one another."

It is evident that here Leibnitz is attempting to erase to
some extent the complete difference between mind and
matter by holding that both are centers of force and that
the "queen monad" is simply a clearer and more perfect
monad than those composing matter or the body. Al-
though no monad, whether it be "queen" or less clear
monad, can influence another monad, there is a certain re-
lationship among monads. The mind or soul monad holds
its place because it is a better monad, not because it is
something different from other monads.

Kant and Later German Philosophers

With KANT there emerged a fairly clear-cut theory of
the -mind as the only source of knowledge. While Kant
admitted the existence of a world other than the mind, a
world from which the mind received impressions, he held
that the mind can know nothing of this world, this *thing-
in-itself ? The mind receives impressions according to its

242 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

nature or its categories and shapes them into patterns
which conform not to the world outside mind, but to the
nature of mind.

We know, then, only what our mind shapes and moulds.
We can, because of the necessities of the moral nature, be-
lieve in the existence of the "thing-in-itself,** but mind can
never prove it, nor can mind prove what it would be
without mind. Indeed, we are shut up in our minds, and
must interpret everything in terms of our minds. Space and
time, for example, are not realities existing by themselves,
but are ways our minds have of receiving and shaping sen-
sations. Take away the thinking subject," Kant argues,
"and the entire corporeal world will vanish, for it is noth-
ing but the appearance in the sensibility of our subject*

Kant* s position gave rise to the great German Idealistic
movement of the eighteenth century. Thinkers who fol-
lowed him felt that the only solution of the problem of
mind and matter lay in eliminating matter. This seemed
the most logical approach. Mind seemed evident, but mat-
ter had to be interpreted as something other thgn and out-
side of mind, different from mind. But this gave rise to the
problem of how these two so different things could interact.
This problem and aH its difficulties could be eliminated by
doing away with matter. Such a solution, as we have seen,
was not new, but it was greatly strengthened by the work
which Kant had done. He had pointed the way and pro-
duced strong evidence that this way was right and .true.

JOHANN GOTTLIEB FicsTE took his cue from Kant and
argued that the -mind, or ego, was everything, and that
there was nothing outside of it He held that Kant's "thing-
in-itself* could not possibly exist outside of the mind. The
material world is, for him, a creation of the mind and serves
as a limiting principle for the mind.' The material world is
a projection into space of objects which exist only in the
mind.

However, the mind which creates this world is not the
mind of the individual, according to Fichte, but is a uni-
versal mind, an absolute ego. This universal mind is before
and above all individual minds and is the creator of the

MIND AND MASTER 243

material world which has existence only in the universal
mind. The material world "is not a world of dead things,
arranged in a spatial-temporal-causal order; the latter is
the re velation in human consciousness of the absolute prin-
ciple, and could not exist if it were not for the universal
ego.* Fichte seeks to solve the problem of mind and matter
by making matter a creation of Tnfnci and denying it any
existence other than that supplied it by mind*

FRIEDBICH WELHELM SCHEDULING leaned heavily on
Fichte in developing his theory of mind. For him, the ab-
solute mind has limited itself in creating the material world*
But, this material world is alive; it is mind at a lower level,
a less clear level Actually there is only a difference of de-
gree between the material world and mind. They are both
mind of a certain sort

Although lie approaches this question somewhat dif-
ferently, HEGEL follows in frhig same idealistic tradition.
For him, mind passes through three stages of evolution:
subjective mind, objective mind, and absolute mind The
subjective mind is dependent upon nature as soul, is op-
posed to nature as consciousness, and is reconciled with
nature as spirit At its highest, mind is creative of the
world which it knows.

Mind, for Hegel, is creative of the material world, there-
fore in both that world and in mind we discover the same
dialectical principles. Throughout the universe Hegel finds
mind creating and realizing itself in objects and institutions.

This idealistic tradition, developing out of Kanf s think-
ing, held sway in Germany for a century. However, it was
not satisfying to all philosophers. Many believed that the
material world was too real to be explained merely as a
creation of mind, whether it be individual mind or absolute
mind. HEBBART is representative of this position. He held
that *things~in-themselves* do exist and the world is not
merely our idea. He based his thinking upon the premise
that experience is the only source of knowledge.

Every sensation is a sensation of something outside of the
mind. Thus, there must be a real world which influences
the mind This world is composed, according to Herbart,

244 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

of many simple principles or "reals. 3 * This world of reals is
static and unchanging. The soul is a real which asserts it-
self against other reals and thus produces sensations in it-
self. These sensations, as they are organized, constitute the
mind. Mental life is, for him, a most complicated fusion of
ideas, a union and organization of sensations which be-
come ideas or units of the mind. Mind, then, is material, of
the same general nature as the material world,

Bradley, Royce, and Bergson

There are three principal answers to the question of the
relationship between mind and the material universe. One
answer is that of Idealism, which holds that mind is in
some way the creator of that which appears as matter. The
method by which mfod creates matter may be thought of
differently by various idealists, but in every case it is mind
which is the real thing, and matter is a creation of mind,
dependent upon mind for its existence. The more recent
Idealists, F. EL BBADIJSY, JOSIAH ROYCE, HENBJ BEBGSON,
and others, develop this position in one way or another.

Gonfie, James, T>ewey, Santayana

Another approach is that of Realism. Here it is held that
mind and the material world are actually both material.
The realists hold that mind is another form of the material
world, finer perhaps, but actually material. Recent repre-
sentatives of Realism are the Positivist, AUGUSTS COMTE,
and the Pragmatists, WTT.TJAM JAMES and JOHN DEWEY.
Although these men differ in many respects, they agree
that mind is a kind of behavior. We have, for example, acts
which are of such a nature as to be held mind-less. Other
acts have a different nature, and we can refer to them as
minded or having the characteristic of mind. Thus, for
these philosophers mind is not a thing but is rather a kind
of behavior.

With the modern emphasis upon natural science and a
moving away on the part of many philosophers from the
more spiritual interpretation of the universe, the idealistic
position has been in an eclipse. The materialistic point of

MIND AND MATTER 5&4S

view has seemed most logical In a world of natural science.
BERTRAND RUSSEUL, has been more at home in this modern
world than GEORGE SANTAYAKA. John Dewey has expressed
the thoughts of the man in the machine shop and on the
street, the man of "common sense," more completely than
did Fichte or Hegel.

But, with the coming of the present-day world, a world
in which men are questioning the materialistic premises
seriously, there are indications that some new form of
Idealism is just over the horizon. Values, spiritual experi-
ences, ideals and aspirations do not seem to be accounted
for completely by materialism. There is a growing feeling
among present-day thinkers that the next great step in phi-
losophy will be a new Idealism.

Chapter X
IDEAS AND THINKING

HERACLITUS SOCRATES PLATO ABISTOTLE

GALILEO DESCARTES SPINOZA

LOCKE KANT HEGEL COMTE

MILL JAMES DEWEY

Whence come our ideas? Are they lorn with us and
do they become conscious in time, or do we get them
from sense experiences? Or does some god reveal them
to us? What are the laws of thinking? How do the
thinkers of each age go about thinking?

Everyone thinks. We all have "ideas* or thoughts, we
see the world about us, and remember what we see. We
make inferences from the facts which we experience, draw
conclusions, and make these the bases of our actions. Man,
we hold, is a thfaVfag being.

Whether or not animals think has been a question of
interest for generations. Your dog sees, hears, and feels. He
receives impressions from his environment Further, he ap-
pears to draw conclusions from these impressions and to
act upon them. He finds that an individual is friendly, and
he acts accordingly. He finds that another individual is not
friendly, and acts upon this fact Does your dog think?
Does he have ideas?

The earliest philosophers struggled with the problems
which grouped themselves around the question of ideas
and thinking. How is it that ideas are formed? Where do

IDEAS AND 1HINXING 247

we get our ideas, and of what nature are they? How do we
reach conclusions upon which we act? How do we come
to know that one act will bring happiness and another mis-
ery? All these, and many other problems, have appeared
upon the pages of philosophic writings from the very be-
ginning of human thought, and they still fascinate phi-
losophers.

When early man gave thought to these problems, he
reached the only conclusion possible in his culture. He be-
lieved that his ideas came to hfm from the world of spirits
which surrounded him at all times. Cods put good ideas in
his mind, and demons put evil ideas there. He felt that his
thoughts came from outside himself, from the forces and
powers which governed and controlled every phase of his
life.

In the history of philosophy, the explanation of ideas and
thinking has tended steadily away from the supernatural
Man has struggled to explain tTifalring in natural terms jmd
as a result of natural processes and subject to natural laws.

What Thinking Meant to the Early Greek Philosophers

The early Greek philosophers were interested primarily
in the nature of substance and gave little attention to man
and his thought processes. They centered their attention
upon nature, the world in which man lived, and attempted
to explain how it came to be and what was its essence.
HERACLTTDS was one of the few who gave some attention
to the problem of thinking. He felt that reason was a more
certain source of knowledge than sense perception and
that the rational life was the best life. Reason, for him, was
akin to divine reason, a sort of spark of the divine in man,
which was able to see truth in ways not given to man de-
void of reason. Most men, he said, live not by reason but
by passion,

EMPEDOCLES believed that since y^n knew the elements
of which the universe is created, he must be composed of
these elements. Like is known bjr like, he argued. There-
fore, if man knows the universe, he must be like the uni-
verse. Man knows water because particles of water pass

248 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

from water to the eye and are there met by particles of
water in the eye. This contact of water with water enables
man to know water. He applied this same line of reasoning
to man's knowledge of other things in the universe.

Sense experience, for DEMOCBJTUS, was obscure knowl-
edge. We really know, he argued, when we transcend sense
perception. When sense perception can cany us no further,
genuine knowledge begins. Here we are in a realm that
deak with finer things than the senses can show us, the
realm of true knowledge.

These early Greeks, though interested primarily in the
problems of the nature of substance, recognized that man's
ability to have ideas, to know the world about him, pre-
sented an equally difficult problem. But their suggested
solutions of this problem were in line with their materialis-
tic bent. In some way, they felt, ideas and the material
world must be similar, though perhaps finer.

This interest of the early Greek thinkers in the nature
of the universe seemed a great waste of time to the Soph-
ists. They felt that the many theories suggested by differ-
ent thinkers pointed to the fact that no real explanation
was possible. Thus, they turned from such questions to con-
cern themselves with man. And tibe conclusion of their
study was that tibe knowing subject was the thing of most
importance and therefore that which should be studied*
Further, they concluded that knowledge depends wholly
upon the individual knower. My ideas are true for me and
youis for you, they would say. For them there could be no
objective absolute truth which would be the same for all
men. Rather, that which seems true to a man is true for
him. "Man," PHOTAGOBAS held, "is the measure of all
things," even truth.

This criticism of knowledge, this making of all knowl-
edge dependent upon the individual knower, was a chal-
lenge to those who assumed without question man's ability
to know truth. By denying the possibility of sure and uni-
versal knowledge, the Sophists made ft necessary for phi-
losophers to investigate thinking most carefully and
thereby opened the door for a theory of knowledge. They

IDEAS AND THINKING 249

hastened the discovery of the correct laws of thought and
the development of "logic/* which is the science of thought

According to Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle

SOCRATES took up the challenge of the Sophists and as-
serted without hesitation that the problem of knowledge
was the key to all other problems. He was interested par-
ticularly in discovering a method for reaching true knowl-
edge as distinct from mere opinion. The method which he
developed consisted of first clearing away all false notions
and then proceeding with careful observation and thinking
in order to reach universal judgments. Amid the diversity
of thought Socrates attempted to discover that which was
common to all, a ground which could not be disputed.

By constant questioning and careful examination of
statements and opinions, Socrates proceeded to establish
definitions which he later used as bases for further opinions
and statements of fact Having established a principle, he
used it to define other principles.

It is customary to speak of logic as either inductive or
deductive. Induction consists in starting with some parties
lar fact and arriving at a general principle. Deduction starts
with a general principle and shows its application to par-
ticular facts. Deduction is the more characteristic method
of the early thinkers; and induction is the method of mod-
em science. Socrates used something of both methods.

PLATO was among the first philosophers to offer a fairly
complete theory of knowledge. He agreed with Socrates
that sense perception could not give genuine knowledge.
Man must pass beyond the senses to ideas which are not
derived from experience and are not dependent upon ex-
perience. The soul, he taught, comes into the world cany-
ing within itself true ideas. These have been planted in it in
an existence previous to birth. True knowledge is reached
when these ideas are remembered and take the front of
consciousness. This is "conceptual knowledge" as distin-
guished from sense knowledge which is actually not knowl-
edge. This reveals the essence of things rather than their
mere accidental factors.

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

ABISTOTLE carried this line of reasoning further by hold-
ing that although our world of experience is the real world,
genuine knowledge consists of knowing the reasons or
causes of things* To reach these basic causes man must
follow certain laws of logic or true processes of thought.
The pattern of true thought is, he argued, the "syllogism,*
in which we move from a generally accepted principle to a
particular.

A famous example of the syllogism is;

AH men are mortaL
Socrates is a man.
Therefore Socrates is mortal*

All men are mortaL This is a general principle which is
evidenced through numerous experiences. We may look
about us and, after observing a number of men and seeing
that all sooner or later die, reach the general conclusion
that all men are mortal Since Socrates was a man, he can
be classified under the general heading of *all men." What
is true about afl men must be true about Socrates* If aH
men are mortal, the particular man Socrates must also be
mortal*

Aristotle worked out the science of deductive logic so
completely that.Iittle or nothing has been added to it even
to the present. He laid down all the laws and gave ex-
amples which men have been able to follow with success
ever since.

The Views of the Later Greek Philosophers

EPICURXJS turned to the senses as the criterion of truth.
We must, he argued, trust our senses. All knowledge comes
through the senses, and error is a mistake in judgment. If
we observe correctly, we arrive at truth. When we make
false interpretations of our sensations, or refer them to the
wrong objects, we make mistakes and do not have true
knowledge. We learn, then, by using our senses, and we
must be very careful that we use them correctly.

We perceive copies of objects, and these are true copies
since they come directly from the objects themselves. These

IDEAS AND imNKXNG 251

copies strike the sense organs and produce ideas in us. If
we do not get our ideas mixed up, we have the truth about
the real world.

The Stoics agreed with the Epicureans in holding that
all knowledge comes through sense perception. At birth,
they maintained, the soul is an empty tablet which receives
impressions from things. These impressions persist and form
memory-images, and from these images ideas are formed.
The mind organizes its impressions into general ideas. Thus,
all knowledge which we have comes, they hold, from im-
pressions and our organizing of these. If we have an im-
mediate conviction that there is a real object correspond-
ing to our idea, then that real object does exist

It is evident that the Stoics disagreed completely witi
Plato. Ideas are not in the soul at birth, as Pkto had ar-
gued. They come to the soul from the outside and through
the senses. The mind does not have ideas until the senses
give it impressions which it can organize into ideas. Pkto
was a "rationalist" in holding that the mind has ideas in-
dependently of experience. The Stoics were ''empiricists''
in holding that ideas come from experience.

Greek thought gave us these two great traditions in phi-
losophy. The rationalists held that the ideas which man has
are innate. Experience simply serves to stir them into con-
sciousness. The empiricists held that the mind has no ideas
of its own. It looks out upon the world through the win-
dows of the senses. When these senses are stimulated by
this outer world, they impress these experiences upon the
mind, which in turn organizes them into ideas. The prog-
ress of philosophy is more or less a battle between various
forms of these two major positions as regards ideas.

The Medieval Christian View

One phase of the conflict between the Nominalists and
the Realists among the medieval Christian philosophers
was concerned with thinking. The Realists held that ideas
are general concepts or universals which have an existence
independently of *Mngg or experiences. Ideas are real in the
sense that they are not created by the individual's experi-

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHTLOSOPIEEIlS

ences. The Nominalists lield that Ideas are the results of
experience and can have no existence except as they are
supported by experience. We build general ideas, such as
justice and goodness, out of experiences; and without ex-
periences, individual and unique experiences, we could
have no general ideas.

With AUGUSTINE we find ourselves in a period one of the
chief characteristics of which was a distinction between
ordinary ideas received through experience and revealed
knowledge received from God. Augustine held that man
has natural knowledge of the world about him. He knows
physical nature, and can act on this knowledge. For the
ordinary needs of living this knowledge is sufficient. But
there is also a higher knowledge which comes not from
experiencing nature, nor is it of the same kind as natural
knowledge. This is revealed knowledge, which comes
through faith.

In this way Augustine and the Christian scholars sought
to protect the doctrines of the Church* Many of these doc-
trines were not in accord with the logic of human think-
ing. They seemed to contradict everything which man
found in experience. But these thinkers held that they were
true because of a knowledge different from and above
natural knowledge. I know because God has revealed it to
me, was the position taken by them.

This interpretation enabled the Church to extend the
borders of knowledge far beyond that of natural experi-
ence. When man reached the limits of his ability to do
logical thinking, to reason in line with the principles of
Aristotle, he was able, by this method of divine knowledge,
to go on to accept the doctrines of the Church.

This position became fundamental to the Church's phi-
losophy, and developed into the doctrine of the "two-f old
truth,** One phase of truth is that which can be substanti-
ated by logical reasoning. Another phase is that which is
substantiated by faith and the authority of the Church.
THOMAS AQUINAS made this basic to his general position.
One phase of his thinking dealt with ideas received from
sensations. He argued that genuine knowledge is concep-

IDEAS ANB THINKING

tual knowledge and that concepts have their origin in
sations. But the mind is able to form universal notions
from these sensations. External objects act on the souL
This raw material of knowledge is received and worked
into conceptual knowledge by the higher faculties of the
soul.

But there is also intuitive knowledge which is superior to
knowledge gained through sensations, through reason, or
through mere faith. This knowledge has its source in divine
revelation and also gains its authority from the divine. We
know about God, immortality, the divinity of Jesus, and
other doctrines of the Church, not by reasoning, but by
tibis higher type of knowledge.

JOHN DUNS Scorus goes further ffiflp Aquinas in limiting
the sphere of reason. He did not believe that any of the
Church's doctrines could be demonstrated by reason, and
held that they all depended upon revelation. Reason, he
held, could not prove these doctrines, but it was in perfect
harmony with them* If, however, reason reached conclu-
sions different from the doctrines of the Church, reason
had to bow to superior authority and admit that it was
wrong.

Thus, although Christian thinkers accepted the two-fold
truth, it is evident that knowledge coining from divine reve-
lation was thought to be superior to that coming from ex-
perience. The natural result was that human reason was
constantly being corrected by the Church. Ideas which men
gained by hard thinking were found to be opposed to the
authority of religion, and the Church was powerful enough
to suppress such conclusions in the interest of what it held
to be revealed knowledge.

Galileo and the Beginning of the Scientific Attitude

This condition could not, of course, continue indefinitely.
As man began to gain confidence in himself end to chal-
lenge the authority of the Church along other lines, it was
inevitable that Le would challenge the authority of re-
vealed knowledge. As tibis developed strength, the funda-
mental bases of Scholastic thought began to crumble, and
man stood more and more upon his own intellectual feet.

254 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

He saw the power of sense experience and the equal power
of reasoning from premises such as Aristotle had estab-
lished The syllogism and sense experience gained in re-
spect among men and the authority of the Church began
to weaken. Man was demanding that all knowledge rest
upon the ability of the human mind and not upon some
revealed authority.

GAIJLEO, as representative of this movement rejected
authority and mystical speculation in matters of science,
and held that all our ideas should rest upon observation or
experimentation. But, he would add to experience, under-
standing. He would build ideas out of observation, experi-
ment, and thought.

The scientists of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries
followed in this direction. They realized what could be
done with observation and experimentation, and were un-
willing that any other authority should detennine man's
thinking. As these men were more and more able to dem-
onstrate the results of their position, the authority of extra-
rational processes came into question. This led to an in-
crease of confidence in the human mind to build its own
ideas and ihougfrt patterns. la other words, man was de-
manding the right to think for himself and reach condu-
it is independently of authority.

Bacon, Descartes, Spinoza

This led inevitably to an interest m the processes by
which man formulates his ideas and the grounds for their
authority- FBANCK BACOK suggested a method for receiv-
ing true impressions and building them into true ideas.
Having cleared the mind of all "idols" or prejudices and
false points of view, he would have man observe his world
carefully. As data was collected, Tnan would be in a posi-
tion to draw conclusions which would have the authority
of the data upon which they were based.

To reach a justified conclusion, man must study all inr
stances in which a certain factor appears, then those in-
stances in which it does not appear, and then those in-

IDEAS AND THINKING 25$

stances in which it appears with variations of greater or
less. For example, if one is seeking to discover whether or
not drinking certain water causes a disease, he would study
all cases of the disease in which the water was drunlc and
all cases in which water was not drunk Then he would
study the amount of the water drunk in each case. On the
basis of data gathered from these studies, he will be in a
position to conclude whether or not drinking the water is
the cause of the disease.

DESCABTES sought a basis for establishing truth. He rea-
soned that one must start with premises which cannot be
denied. Mathematics seemed to give frfrn such premises.
In mathematics he saw a model for correct thinking, the
method of reasoning from self-evident truths. This ap-
peared to him to be the method by which aH true knowl-
edge could be obtained. Thus he sought first for self-evi-
dent truths. The one truth which he was able to discover
was: I thinly therefore I am. With this as a basis, he rea-
soned to a body of ideas which he did not believe could
be disputed. These ideas were, for him, dear and distinct,
and therefore true beyond question.

Descartes established as a fundamental principle of afl
thinking that all true ideas must be dear and distinct The
mind has its norms of dearness and distinctness, norms
given to the mind because of its nature. Thus, knowledge
comes to man, Descartes argued, not by sense perception,
but through careful reasoning from fundamental premises;
and each idea can be accepted if, after it has been rea-
soned out, it is dear and distinct

SPINOZA held that man can have three kmds of knowl-
edge. Obscure and inadequate ideas, he argued, depend
upon sense perception, and are the result of the imagina-
tion plus the failure of the individual to interpret correctly.
Adequate knowledge, dear and distinct ideas, rational
knowledge, is the result of reasoning from things already
known. The third type of knowledge is intuitive knowledge,
which is the finest kind of knowledge and gives a truth
which cannot be disputed. Here no error is possible.

256 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PBOLOSOPHERS

Locke, Berkeley, Hume, and Leibnitz

JOHN LOCKE made the "study of knowing" his chief oc-
cupation. His conclusion was that all ideas come to the
individual through sense experience. The mind is, for him,
a blank tablet with only the power to assimilate or or-
ganize impressions. As contact with the environment stim-
ulates the senses and causes impressions, the mind receives
and organizes these into ideas and concepts. Thus, there
are no innate ideas in the mind; all its ideas come from
without. The ideas which are received through sense im-
pressions he called simple ideas. As such ideas are organ-
ized, complex ideas are built up by the mind.

Locke's writings are concerned in considerable part with
the classifying of ideas and the study of the power of
things to produce ideas.

GEORGB BEBEEXEY went further than Locke did in his
emphasis on the mind, for he held that we cannot know
anything beyond what is in the mind. We cannot know
the material world since we do not have it in our minds.
Indeed, we cannot prove that the ideas which we have
are a result of contact with a material world. To account
for the consistency among ideas, Berkeley held that God
gives us our ideas. We receive them not from a material
world, but from God who is mind on a higher level.

DAVID HUME went still further and held that all we
have or can know is ideas. We cannot prove the existence
of a material world or of God. There is just a stream of
ideas. The mind is this stream of ideas, for him. We re-
ceive impressions, but do not know from whence they
come. Then the impressions are organized into ideas. As
we experience ideas we find that they bear certain rela-
tions with each other. Thus we get ideas of relations and
come to the idea, for example, of cause and effect. But we
cannot say that objects in a material universe are so related.
All we can say is that ideas follow each other in a certain
order, and this order we call cause and effect.

All the contents of the mind are ideas in certain rela-
tions. Beyond this we cannot go. We -have ideas, and think

IDEAS AND THINKING

in terms of them and their relations. Here we must stop.
We cannot demonstrate anything beyond this.

LEIBNITZ disagreed with Locke, Berkeley, and Hume,
by holding that the monad is self-contained and can in no
way be affected or influenced from the outside. Thus, all
ideas must be contained within the monad. Experience
merely brings these ideas to the forefront The senses," he
wrote, "can arouse, justify, and verify such truths, but
not demonstrate their eternal and inevitable certitude.*
Ideas and truths are innate in the mind as tendencies. We
do not receive ideas, but have them all the time.

Leibnitz held that Locke had not gone far enough. He
said that Locke was right in holding that there is nothing
in the intellect that did not exist before in sensation, but
that he should add "except the intellect itself.*

All these later philosophers were attempting to reach a
satisfactory explanation of how the individual, living in and
experiencing an environment, could have ideas, thoughts,
could think* Some had reached the conclusion that the
individual faced the environment pure and undefiled and
received his ideas from the environment and through the
senses. Others had argued that ideas were innate in the
mind and needed only the stimulation of sensations to bring
them to consciousness.

Kant, Fichte, Hegel

KAJSTT sought to overcome the difficulties of both ex-
tremes by holding that we do receive impressions from the
environment, from the *thing-in-itself,* but that the mind
is of such a nature that it shapes these impressions into
ideas. The mind, for Inim^ is like a bowl with many crevices
and strange depressions in its contour. When one pours
water into the bowl, it takes the shape of the bowl, filling
all the crevices. In the same way the environment pours
impressions into the mind and they are received by the
mind and shaped in accord with the nature of this mind.

But knowledge is universal. This is due to the fact that
all minds are fundamentally alike. They all have certain
fundamental categories such as totality, unity, plurality,

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

reality, and the like. Because all minds are of the same
general nature, we all think very much alike. We organize
impressions into ideas. But these are ideas of the mind and
cannot be applied to a world outside the mind. This leads
to the conclusion that we cannot know the world outside
the mind. We can act as though it existed, and can correct
our ideas in terms of the additional impressions which
we receive. But beyond this we cannot go. Our ideas are
a result of the kind of thinking organ which we have,
and are determined by its nature.

We can, of course, bring ideas together into large, gen-
eral ideas, and can act as though these generalizations
were true. Indeed, to satisfy our moral natures, we must
so act. But here we are dealing with judgments and not
provable ideas.

Kant's masterful argument for the mind as the creator
erf ideas led FXCBTTE to the conclusion that one can under-
stand only that which he can create freely in thought. The
ideas which one has, the contents of one's consciousness,
are results of an act of creation. The ego, active and free,
creates everything that man knows, even the "non-ego" or
that which seems not to be the ego.

By ego Fidbte means universal reason or intelligence as
such, not the individual self. Reason, the whole array of
ideas which one has, is prior to the individual and is the
creation of a reason which existed before the individual
man. We know only our ideas. These are not the result of a
material world which we experience but come from the
universal ego.

HEGEL took the position that the processes of the hu-
man mind and those of nature are the same. In both he
found what he termed a "dialectical process** operating.
If one studies the mind, he will find it full of contradictions,
full of disagreements, of opposites. But, a further study will
reveal that there is a process in the mind by which each
pair of opposites is reconciled in a synthesis which includes
both but on a higher leveL

This process is everywhere. First there is a thesis or
affirmation, then we discover the antithesis to this thesis or

IDEAS AND THINKIKrG

its contradiction. The highest form of thought is the recon-
ciling of both in a synthesis which lifts thinking one step
higher. The human mind does not stop with contradictions,
but strives to get rid of them by effecting a synthesis. This
is not to be confused with a compromise. In a true syn-
thesis the values of both the thesis and the antithesis are
conserved and together they move toward new values.

The highest function of the mind, then, is that activity
which enables one to see things whole, to see opposites
unified. Here man rises to the true height of his nature.
Thought moves from the simple ideas to more complex
notions, from the individual to the rich and fufl.

Hegel saw what few philosophers had realized to his
day. He recognized that thought is not a static thing, a
mere receiving of impressions. Thought, for him, is a proc-
ess, a moving from one point to another. The thinking
being is a living logical process in which there is an un-
folding and a progression. Study of thinking convinced
Hegel that thinking moves from the simple to the complex
not by discreet jumps but by a gradual development into
syntheses which become theses for still higher syntheses.

But, since nature and thought follow the same process
of evolution, Hegel reasoned that afl reality is a logical
process of evolution. The universe is a logical process of
thought and not dead material upon which thought works.

This point of view, that everything is a logical process
of thought obeying the laws of evolution from the simple
to the more complex, held sway in Germany and influenced
other countries until the middle of the nineteenth century.
Indeed, even though it lost some of its popularity after
that date, it continued to influence world thought for many
years after.

A counter influence was the work of HERBAHT who
looked upon thinking as the organization and integration of
reals. Through experience the soul throws off reals which
are organized in consciousness into ideas and points of
view. Many of these are pushed into the subconscious,
there to wait until the time is favorable for them to come
back into consciousness and dominate it.

260 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHU-OSOPHEBS

Comte, Mitt, Spencer

COMTB took the position that the only knowledge worth
while was knowledge which could be used. He was not
concerned with theories of knowledge, with attempts to
discover what knowledge is, but was interested in dis-
covering knowledge which could be used in actual life
situations. If one has knowledge, ideas, which work, which
meet problems and solve them, that is all that is necessary.
Their source or history is of little or no importance.

JOHN STOABT MTT.T. based his entire logical theory upon
the laws of association. He sought to discover how and
why one passes from the known to the unknown by the
process of inferences. This became his theory of induction*
As one collects data through experience, he draws certain
conclusions. His data serves as a basis for his conclusions.
"When he goes beyond this data to generalizations he is
acting upon a belief that nature is uniform. Mill believed
that man had a right to so act

Our ideas are a result, then, of experiences and of care-
ful inferences from them. There are laws, Mill held, by
which these inferences can be made. These laws have au-
thority because experience has proved them valuable. Men
have used them in the past and have arrived at conclusions
which were successful Therefore, the test of experience
has been met, and we can afford to make use of them with
a high degree of confidence.

HEBBEBT SPENCER held that all thought was founded
upon the fact of relations. We think in teims of differences
and likenesses. Our conclusions, our ideas are of these dif-
ferences and likenesses among things. We know flings in
terms of their differences and likenesses and not directly.
Here we have a theory of the relativity of knowledge. Ideas
are expressions of the relationships between things.

James and Dewey

From the theory of knowledge many modem thinkers,
under the influence of psychological advances of the last
century, have turned to a study of thinking itself. WIL-

IDEAS AND THINKING StBl

JAMES held that thinking is an instrument, and is no
better than its service in a situation. We think for a pur-
pose. Thus, James stresses the thinking process, interest in
how it works and how it can be made more efficient

JOHN DEWEY has given us one of the dearest analyses
of reflective thinking ever worked out He identifies refleo-
tive thinking with problem solving, and holds that man
does not think unless he has a problem to solve. Mere
passing fancy, daydreaming, and the like are not thinking
in any real sense of the term. But, when one is faced with
a situation for which he does not have a ready solution, he
engages in thinking.

Now, the process through which he must go if he is to
be successful in reaching a solution to his problem consists
of several fairly well-defined steps. First, there must be a
clearly defined problem. This is followed by a period dur-
ing which data relative to the problem is collected. Then,
on the basis of the data, a hypothesis or possible solution
is arrived at The fourth step is a mental trying out of the
suggested solution or hypothesis to discover if there is any
reason why it should not be the desired solution. If the
hypothesis stands the test of this mental trial, it is put into
action, and the results recorded. If this test is also satis-
factory, the knowledge gained is generalized or applied
to other similar situations, thus becoming a general prin-
ciple which may then become a basis for future thought

All reflective thinking takes place in this fashion, ac-
cording to Dewey. If each step is carried througji care-
fully and no mistakes are made, there is a high degree of
probability that the thinker will arrive at an adequate
solution of his problem. If, however, any step is neglected
or the process is not carefully followed, the accepted hy-
pothesis may prove false.

Other philosophers hold that Dewey is here considering
only one type of thinking, and is neglecting the most im-
portant type, creative thinking. Studies seem to indicate
that creative thinking proceeds by three stages. First, there
is a period of preparation during which the thinker studies
his problem carefully and collects data pertinent to it. Then

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT 1?HILOSOPHEHS

there must be a period of incubation when this data and
the problem are put aside, as it were, to become assimi-
lated. This is, they say, a subconscious process which can-
not be rushed and the outcome of which cannot be pre-
dicted. If it is successful, the third stage will reveal itself,
a stage when the individual experiences iHumination or
the flash of a possible solution of hypothesis. This hypoth-
esis is not necessarily the sought-for solution. It must be
tested both mentally and practically to discover if it is
adequate. If it fails, the problem must be returned to the
subconscious and the process of incubation continued*

Modern philosophy seems to be moving more and more
in the direction suggested by James and Dewey and other
Pragmaiists. "While there are many philosophers who are
struggling with the problem of knowledge and are seeking
to discover how ideas are formed, the modern spirit of
efficiency has so dominated many thinkers that they be-
came impatient with such activity. They can see no real
value in determining whether ideas are innate or whether
they come from the outer world. The problems with which
TTftnf; Fichte, Scheflfng, Herbart; and others struggled,
seem to them meaningless. Their interest is not in the gene-
sis of ideas so much as in their working in actual life situa-
tions. The philosopher, they hold, is concerned with life
and life situations. Here ideas are tools for solving prob-
lems* Thinking is a way one may go about meeting difficult
situations. And its efficiency is to be measured by the suc-
cess which the individual experiences in its use. If, by
thinking, he solves his problem, the process has been satis-
factory and his ideas true.

Chapter XI

SOME RECENT APPROACHES TO
PHILOSOPHY

KIERKEGAARD HEIDEGGER JASPERS SARTRE

WHTTEHEAD RUSSELL MOORE CROCE UNAMUNO

TILLICH NIEBUHR MARTTA3N BUBER

Why re-examine old concepts and values? Is evil real
or an illusion? Is there a meaning to suffering? In the
face of inevitable death, what is the meaning of life?
Can the findings of science be reconciled with the con~
cept of God? What is the function of moral laws in a
world explained by science?

From the time of Plato and Aristotle, and even earlier,
philosophy has been largely concerned with helping man
to understand the basic, ordered pattern of the universe,
and man's relationship to man. These two large concerns
may be described as "metaphysical 5 * and "ethical." In
some periods philosophers have sought to help men dis-
cover the meaning of God and in the light of this meaning
to live lives of goodness and rightness. At other times,
philosophers have concluded that men could live morally
without believing in God. All philosophies involve the criti-
cal analysis of concepts which many people accept in blind
faith.

In a changing world, however, old concepts and values
have to be re-examined. With the increasing importance
of scientific discovery, many of the traditional ideas about

284 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHELOSOPEEKS

tie order of the universe began to change. With increasing
economic progress and greater material comfort for indi-
viduals, both spiritual and ethical values have undergone
subtle changes. In the middle of the nineteenth century,
many keen thinkers sensed an Inadequacy and inapplica-
bility in much previous thought The world, for these new
pMosophers, did not seem to be based on a neat and tidy
a"bsolute rula The problem of man's existence had to be
re-examined. New solutions were needed, new answers
bad to be f oundL

Kierkegaard and the Beginnings of Existentialism

S0REN EJEBEEGAAICD, a Danish philosopher and writer,
took the position that religion was a personal experience.
Using Kant's idea that the only thing we can TCQOW^ is
experience as a stepping-oS place, Kierkegaard evolved a
philosophical system which divided existence into three
categories; tihat is, lie claimed that experience may be of
three kinds: aesthetic, ethical, and religious. The child is
an example of the individual who lives almost exclusively
at the aesthetic level. For the h*M all choices are made
in terms of pleasure and pain, and experience is ephemeral,
having no continuity, no meaning, but being merely a con-
nection of isolated, non-related moments. The ethical level
of experience involves choice; whenever conscious choice
is made, one lives at the ethical level At the religious level,
one experiences a commitment to oneself, and an aware-
ness of one's uniqueness and singleness. To live at the re-
ligious level means to make any sacrifice, any antisocial
gesture that is required by being true to oneself. Clearly,
these levels are not entirely separable, but may coexist:
when (me chooses the aesthetic level of existence, the very
act of choice involved ethical experience; and when one
makes choices at the ethical level, and these choices are
true to one's own singleness, one lives at the religious leveL

Kierkegaard believed that m^rr proceeding from one
level of experience to another, would ultimately choose
suffering and pain, and a constant awareness of the dif-
ference between ephemeral, temporal existence and ulti-

SOME RECENT APPROACHES TO PHILOSOPHY 26g

mate truth. He concluded that only when man experiences
the suffering of firm commitment to the religious level of
experience can he be considered to be truly religious, and,
further, that the suffering endured by God is greater than
that endured by any man.

If religion, then, is a purely personal matter, truth is
clearly subjective, quite separate from the "truth" of re-
ligious doctrine, for the truth of man's experience must
emerge from his faithfulness to his own unique identity.
Kierkegaard recognized this difference between the ob-
jective, universal truth, and the subjective, personal truth.
Objective truth, such as that of geometry, is acquired by
the intellect; subjective truth must be experienced by the
total individual* One may have objective truth, but one
must be religious truth.

The Views of Heidegger, Jaspers, and Sartre

MARTIN HEIDEGGER, a German, has perceived the mean-
ingfulness of Kierkegaard's position that man is a tragic
figure in a finite world. He agreed that man must become
intensely aware of his own individuality, of the special-
ness of his own person. In that man, is capable of ques-
tioning himself, existence precedes essence; that is, mean-
ing can only be applied to what already is within an
individual's experience. Man can define kis existence by
three traits: mood (or feeling), understanding, and sjpeech.
These traits Heidegger called exktentia&a, and the philo-
sophic tradition derived from his theories is known as
"existentialism." Only by questioning existence in terms of
the existentialia can man become aware of his own true
identity; and when he has found his identity, the essence
of his existence, man is able to transcend the limits of the
non-inquiring world and assert his destiny.

KARL JASPERS, a German psychologist and philosopher
and a contemporary of Heidegger, has subscribed to many
theories of the existential schooL Jaspers* philosophy is
also centered on the importance of the individual, and he
has stressed the importance of the discrepancy between
actual facts and the individual's interpretation of those

266 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

facts. To Jaspers, truth is subjective, to a large extent non-
rational, and constantly being reinterpreted by the indi-
vidual. Freedom, according to Jaspers, is the ability of the
individual to make spontaneous ethical decisions, and love
is the highest level of existence.

Because of the importance of sioffering in existentialism,
and because of its concern with reconciling man with the
necessity of death, ft is not surprising that so many twen-
tieth-century thinkers have been attracted by this philoso-
phy. Because existentialism is intensely concerned with
the individual, and with the concrete rather than the ab-
stract, much of the keenest existential thought has come
from writers and artists. JEAN-PAUL SARTRE, French play-
wright and novelist, has developed a philosophy which is,
in many respects, negative. Yet much of his thought is
founded on the optimistic principle that "Man is essentially
a subjectively worthy being/* Sartre recognized the per-
vasiveness of evil, holding that evil could not be redeemed,
and that each individual man is responsible for the evil in
the world. But he also credited man with the capacity for
heroic action. The ultimate freedom, for Sartre, is the
freedom to say "No." Man may not be able to overthrow
evfl, but he can and must refuse to co-operate with evil.
The freedom to say "No," of course, can only be main-
tained by total consciousness; and man has, therefore, the
responsibility to maintain his consciousness both actual
and spiritual at aH times. Man's existence precedes his
essence, and from his existence man is free to make of him-
self what he chooses.

Three Philosophers of Science: Whitehead,
Russell, and Moore

ALFRED NORTH WHTTEHEAD, mathematician and scholar,
was disturbed by the trend of twentieth-century scientists
to "prove" with their science the non-existence of God.
Deeply concerned by this non-religious current in philo-
sophic thought, he sought to develop a philosophical sys-
tem in which God and the findings of science would not be
mutually exclusive or even unharmonious. The theory which

SOME EECENT APPBOACHES TO PHILOSOPHY 267

he evolved he called the "philosophy of organism.* White-
head perceived the relation of man to God in the funda-
mental processes of the world. He felt that philosophy
should not start with clear-cut items, but rather with a
sense of something going on, a process in an unending
continuum. Just as man's life is made up not of isolated
units strung together hut of a connected series of minute
but interrelated moments, Whitehead felt that the world
is made up of essences and entities which, while undergo-
ing purely internal development, are nonetheless in active,
constant contact with each other. It is the interaction of
these essences throughout nature, and the effects of their
interrelation as they attempt to adjust to their environment,
that is the true world process. That the particular world
we know resulted from the combination of these forces
in a particular way, instead of the forces having interacted
differently to produce a different world, is the result of the
selection and ordering of God. For Whitehead, the ulti-
mate good is the perception of God as this unifying force
behind the movement of the world process. Thus White-
head constructed a metaphysical system which made room
for the incorporation of all scientific theory and discovery,
and which included as well aH subjective experience.

BEBTRANB RUSSELL, originally also a mathematician,
collaborated with Whitehead on many important early
projects, though they later disagreed philosophically. Rus-
sell's approach to mathematics was abstract and formal,
and he attempted to cast his philosophy in the same mould.
Russell has emphasized the importance of creativity for
man, as opposed to activity that is merely acquisitive and
possessive. Russell came to the conclusion that philosoph/s
aim is to imderstand the world, and to isolate that which
may be considered knowledge from all that is merely spec-
ulative. To do this, man must rely on the scientific method.
la contrast with many other twentieth-century philoso-
phers, both Whitehead and Russell agreed on the innate
dignity and value of man. It was this attitude that pro-
pelled Russell into the realms of social philosophy in his

268 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GRKAT PHIIX>SOPHERS

later years, and his efforts on behalf of various social causes
have attracted wide attention.

GEORGE E. MOORE was a neo-realist whose position was
similar to that of Russell. Moore developed an ethical
theory which maintained that such words as "good" and
"right" have no objective meaning, and cannot be recog-
nized as natural objects scientifically. "Goodness** and
Brightness" are states or conditions which are simple, un-
analyzable, and indefinable.

Logical Positivism

At the same time that existentialism gained importance
in world thought and Whitehead's approach to metaphys-
ical philosophy was claiming wide attention, a philosophic
school was emerging which was to make radical charges
against the very nature of philosophy itself. This school
was "Logical Positivism." Among prominent thinkers in this
area were LTJDWIG WITTGENSTEIN and the men who es-
tablished the group known as the "Vienna Circle," Mourns
SCHLICK and RUDOLF CARNAP. Instead of believing that
the province of philosophy is to understand the world, they
believed that its function is the analysis of the uses of lan-
guage and the properties of sentences. To the logical pos-
itivists, all knowledge is empirical, and is derived from
sense experience; that is, all knowledge can be verified
either by personal experience or by knowing what obser-
vations would be required in order to verify by personal
experience. Because there may be an infinite number of
experiences relevant to the verification of any empirical
observation, the truth of such observations is at best prob-
able, and may never be established absolutely. The most
radical charge of the logical positivists, though, is that the
statements of metaphysics, theology, and ethics are fac-
tually meaningless. For example, "Crime is wrong" as a
sentence makes only one factual, verifiable observation,
"Crime is." Wrongness, having no existence as an actual,
observable phenomenon, communicates only a feeling, not
a fact. Logical positivists claim that such "pseudo-proposi-
tions" of theology, ethics, and metaphysics are the result

SOME RECENT APPROACHES TO PHILOSOPHY 269

of the misunderstanding and misuse of language. Because
we use the word "God," they say, does not necessarily
mean that there is a God; and yet, in error, we continue to
make decisions concerning this non-verifiable concept In-
evitably, logical positivism, when carried to its extreme
conclusion, becomes a matter of semantic interpretation
rather than a creative philosophy. But its impact on twen-
tieth-century philosophic thought has been profound, and
its contribution to the clarification of thought and expres-
sion should not be minimized*

Two Philosophers of the Spirit

MiGtoEL I>E UNAMUNO was a Spanish poet, novelist,
scholar, and philosopher of tremendous originality. His
entire life was a struggle against the imposition of formal-
ism upon the individual, and in his writing he constantly
created new literary forms novels, plays, and poetry
rather than submit to those established by tradition. Una-
muno believed that only the internal will of an individual
is real, and that the external world around hfm is merely
mist; and, further, that the will of the individual person
and the spiritual conflicts produced by its passions con-
tain the final sense of all existence. The basic urge of life,
thought Unamuno, is not simply to go on living, but to
grow and to develop. Therefore the fundamental problem
of life is the necessity of coping with the idea of death,
which stops all growth. Each man lives in the agony of
conflict between his wills need for a life after death, and
his reasons denial of life after death. If one is to exist
in meaningful terms, one must accept this frustration, and
in spite of the awareness of death one must will passionate
action; for even meaningless action, if it is profoundly
motivated from the inner core of an individual's existence,
will provide the necessary balance to the twentieth cen-
tury's stifling, all-pervading dependence on impersonal
reason.

BENEDETTO CROCK, an Italian critic and historian, con-
cerned himself largely with problems of aesthetics. Croce
took the position that the spirit is the only reality, though

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

it manifests itself in various different guises in the external
world, a concept similar to that developed by Whitehead.
Croce extended this idea by maintaining that the physical
does not exist at afl, but is merely a construction of the
mind. For example, a work of art is an image created in
the mind of the artist and communicated to the minds of
the audience. Only the image is a work of art; the physical
objectpainting, piece of sculpture, or other form is
merely a practical act to aid reproduction of the image.
This concept is of great importance in the understanding
of much modern art

Some Current Philosophers in the Religious Tradition

Although much of contemporary philosophy has implied
a negation of the concept of God, many twentieth-century
philosophers have found themselves closer to the tradi-
tional religious points of view. They recognize the need for
a new set of moral values as well as do the agnostics in
the philosophical fraternity, but they believe that such
values <^n be found by a re-examination and a redefini-
tion of religious principles.

PAUL THXICH, a German Protestant theologian, sees a
true "God above the God of Theism.* Man is beset by
anxiety over the inevitability of physical death, but he has
the responsibility to accept this anxiety, to take it upon
himself. In so doing, he achieves transcendence. For Til-
lich, religion is man's striving for the ultimate, the abso-
lute. There can be no atheistic society, since striving for
any absolute is, by definition, religious activity, and the
point of a society's existence is to strive toward a goal. In
spite of a possible lack of meaning in existence, faith con*
stitutes acceptance of what is given.

REINHOLD NIKBUHK, an American Protestant theologian,
abjured the traditional liberal Protestant point of view
that man is essentially good. On the contrary, according to
Niebuhr, only God is good, and man is beset by sin. Man's
only hope for salvation is to rely on the goodness of GocL

JACQUES MABITAIN, a neo-TTiomistic French Catholic,
reconciled existential philosophy with the Thomistic tra-

SOME BECENT APPROACHES TO PHELOSOPHY

dition. To Maritain, all forms of knowledge scientific,
metaphysical, and mystical are valid.

MARTIN BUBER, oriented in traditional Jewish values,
has expressed the view that man was made less than hu-
man by the encroachments of science and mechanization.
With the increase of dehumanization in the world, evil in-
creases; and as men lose their identities, they lose their
souls. To counteract this evil, Buber proposed his Ich itnd
Du philosophy: Ich, the German word for "I" points out
the importance of recognizing one's own individuality,
one's own uniqueness; Du 9 the personal form of "you,"
emphasizes that the individuals one encounters must be
loved and absorbed into one's own identity. But a general-
ized love of mankind is not enough; one must recognize the
subjectivity of other people; and only when there is a har-
monious balance within an individual of an awareness of
his own self and an awareness of and love for the unique-
ness of the selves of others can the individual find fulfill-
ment and contentment

As conditions change and man's environment becomes
different, the mind of man must construct new philosophies
for new times. What Plato and Aristotle did for their
times, the thinkers of these recent days have done for
theirs. And the mind of the philosopher, ever alert and
sensitive to change, will continue to meet the challenges
of the future as they arise.

CONCLUSION

One's experience, whether it be yours or mine or that of
a Great Philosopher, may be thought of as many pieces of
a jig-saw puzzle. The pieces are scattered everywhere in
time and space. Some date back to earliest childhood while
others are now ia the process of being born. Some are the
result of events far out near the horizon, while others are
within erne's own body. Often they have baffling shapes.
Each one of us attempts to fit the pieces which are our
experiences together so that they will form a picture that
satisfies us.

You and I wffl often try to force pieces together when
they are not made to fit in the way we desire. We wiH
push and shove the pieces until the spaces between them
are as small as possible. In doing this, we often force them
out of shape. Thus, the final picture will be full of gaps
which we may not be able to see but which are obvious to
another of more experience and a keener insight and under-
standing. It wffl contain shocking contrasts of color. It will
be smaH and incomplete.

Although the picture which you and I build may be
adequate for most of the practical situations in. which we
find ourselves, there will come times of crisis when it will
not prove adequate. A new experience may not fit into
the picture at alL At such times we may try to rearrange
the pieces so as to make a place for the new experience
and thus fashion a very different picture, or we may throw
the piece away, saying that it is an "unreal" experience,
false, an illusion.

The experiences which a Great Philosopher employs to

CONCLUSION 273

weave his pattern, his philosophy, are far more numerous
than ours. He attempts to include the entire universe, all
that there is, in the picture which he constructs. Further,
he is constantly on the alert to discover gaps, delicate
shadings, fine cuts of the pieces with which he works. He
trains his mind to a high degree of sensitivity to these
differences. He can detect errors in the relationships be-
tween pieces which escape the less trained mind. Thus,
the picture which he presents to the world is more accurate
and complete than ouis.

But even the Great Philosopher does not fashion a per-
fect picture. Only a God who knows all experiences of all
men and can detect the finest relations can weave a perfect
pattern. No philosopher, however great, is such a God.
Thus the pattern of every Great Philosopher is imperfect
and subject to improvement.

The history of philosophy is the story of how different
philosophers have woven different patterns, proposed dif-
ferent solutions to the puzzle that is human experience.
One philosopher will offer his solution and many will hail
it as the answer. But it will not be long before another
philosopher will discover and point to errors in his pattern,
will reveal gaps and distortions, and will propose a some-
what different solution, one which seems to him more
nearly perfect He, in turn, will be followed by another
who repeats the process.

In the pages which constitute this book we have seen
how many Great Philosophers have attempted to piece
together the world of human experience and have sought
to answer some of the problems which have often inter-
ested us. We have seen how each Has given a somewhat
different answer and how later philosophers have corrected
them and offered other solutions.

Thus, in a real sense, you and I can stand on the shoul-
ders of all the Great Philosophers of the past As we too
look out upon the world, *we can build our philosophies
with the benefit of their experience and advice. We can
learn from them, and by learning can make our picture
more accurate and complete. Each philosopher says to us,

2/4 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHTLOSQPHEBS

**Here is what the universe of human experience means to
me, and here are the mistakes which I have found in the
other philosophers who have preceded me. This is the best
I know. Take it and begin your thinking from here.**

You and I stand at the apex of centuries of struggling
with the great problems of mankind. Behind us are great
minds who offer us the service of their experience and
thought. Indeed, we should be greater philosophers than
any of the past since we have all the past to help us. Let
us, then, consider what these of the past tell us. Let us
ponder their advice carefully. And let us carry on from
where they have had to stop. This is the way to progress
and to a more perfect philosophy.

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES

ABELABD, PETER: (1079-1142). Bora at Palais, near
Nantes, in Brittany. Opened a school in Paris in 1103
and became noted for his keen mind and theological pene-
tration. Among his more important writings are Ethics and
Introduction to Theology.

ALCUIN: (735-804) . An English theologian and scholar.
He was called from York to assist Charlemagne in es-
tablishing an educational system in the Prankish Empire.
In his old age he retired to the monastery at Tours and
devoted himself to theology.

ALTHUSIUS, JOHANNES: (1557-1638). A German thinker
who is credited with founding the modern theory of nat-
ural law. He was born at Diedenshausen, studied at Baste
and Geneva, and became Professor of Law at Herbort
Among his significant writings is Political Method.

AMBROSE, ST.: (34O?-3Q7). Born at Treves and became
Bishop of Milan in 374. He often came into conflict with
the highest authorities of his times. He wrote the great
Christian hymn, **Te Deum Laudamus/*

ANAXAGOKAS: (sooP-4^8 B.C.)* Born at Clazomenae.
After traveling widely he settled in Athens and opened a
philosophic school there. Many famous thinkers studied
with him. He was condemned to die for alleged impiety,
but the sentence was changed to exile. He retired to Lamp-
sacus and taught philosophy there until his death.

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHELOSOPHERS

ANAXIMANBER: (6n?-547? B.C.). Famous both as
mathematician and as philosopher. He taught that the
moon received her light from the sun and that the earth
was round. He believed in the existence of many worlds.

ANASIMENES OF MILETUS: (6th cent B.C.)- A Greek
philosopher. He believed that the basic substance of the
universe was air, from which everything else derives by
rarefaction or condensation*

ANSELM, ST.: (1033-1109). He was Archbishop of Can-
terbury during the reigns of William Rufus and Henry I.
He was a man of great piety and intellectual power and
resisted efforts of the king to despoil the church of her dig-
nity and revenue.

AQTJOTAS, THOMAS: (i225?-i274) Known as the "An-
gelic Doctor." He was descended from the counts of Aquino
in Calabria. In 1323 Pope John XXII made him a saint
His writings form the basis for the Thomist sect Several
editions of his Selected Writings are available.

ABISTOTLE: (384-322 B.C.)- Born at Stagira in Thrace.
Began his study with Plato when he was 20 years of age.
Philip of Macedon made Mm tutor to his son, Alexander
the Great. He was accused of impiety and exiled to Chalcis
where he died. Among his many important writings are
The Nicomachean Ethics and Politics.

ATHANASIUS: (2gs?-373). Born in Egypt, entered the
church at an early age, and became Bishop of Alexandria
in 326. He was violently opposed to Arisu and the Arian
position and often came into conflict with the authorities.

AUGUSTINE, AUBEUUS: (354-43 ) Born at Tagaste in
Africa. He became Bishop of Hippo and wrote with great
force against all he deemed as heretics. Among his most
famous works are the Confessions and City of God.

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES 2/7

BACON, FRANCIS: (1561-1626). Born in London. He
rose to great heights in the English government and be-
came lord chancellor. But his venality as a judge caused
his downfall and imprisonment After he was pardoned by
the king, he retired to his studies. The Advancement of
Learning is one of his more famous works.

BACON, ROGER: (i2i4?-i2g4). An English scientist and
publicist. He is reputed to have invented gunpowder and
to have manufactured magnifying glasses.

BASEDOW, JOHANN BERNHABD: (1724-1790). A German
educator and teacher who attempted to work out the doc-
trines of Rousseau in an educational system. He wrote sev-
eral books for children.

BAYLE, PIERRE: (1647-1706). Applied Descartes*
method to the dogmatism of his day and effected reforms
in thinking.

BENEDICT, ST.: (4807-543?) . Born at Nursia, in the
Duchy of Spoleto. He established the famous monastery of
Monte Cassino near Naples in 529 and founded the first
religious order in the West, the Benedictine order.

BENTHAM, JEREMY: (1748-1832). A distinguished Eng-
lish writer on political economy and jurisprudence. Among
his writings is the well-known Fragment on Government.

BERGSON, HENRI: (1859-1941). Born in Paris. Was one
of the great modern French philosophers and received
many honors from the French government He became a
member of the French Academy in 1914. He held several
important chairs of philosophy in France. Among his ex-
tensive writings are Matter and Memory 9 Introduction to
Metaphysics, and Creative Evolution.

BERKELEY, GEORGE: (1685-1753). A famous English
divine. Born in Ireland and educated at Trinity College,

2/8 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

Dublin. He conceived a plan for converting America to
Christianity and set out for the Bermudas to erect a college
there, but the project failed because the money which he
expected did not come. In 1734 he was made Bishop of
Cloyne. Prominent among his works are A New Theory of
Vision and Principles of Human Knowledge.

BODIN, JEAN: (1530-1596). A French jurist. For a time
he enjoyed the favor of Henry III, but later forfeited it by
defending the rights of the classes and the masses against
the king. He was closely allied with the group known as
the "Politicians" in France.

BOEHME, JACOB: (1575-1624). An uneducated German
cobbler who became famous because of his mystical ex-
periences and his writings dealing with mysticism. One of
his important works is The Signature of All Things.

BRADLEY, FEANCIS HERBERT: (1846-1924). Born in
Glasbury in England and educated at Oxford. Made a fel-
low of Merton College where he lived for his entire life. He
is the author of Appearance and Reality.

BRUNO, GIORDANO: (i548?-i6oo). A member of the
Dominican order. He left the order and wandered through-
out the world, at last returning to Italy where he was im-
prisoned by the Inquisition and burned at the stake.

BUBER, MARTIN: (1878-1965). Bom in Vienna, Buber
was raised in the Orthodox Jewish tradition. Intensely in-
terested in Zionism, he escaped from Nazi Germany, where
he had been teaching, to Palestine, in 1938. He was among
the first of the former German citizens to resume cultural
relations with Germany by accepting the Goethe Prize in
1951. One of his most important books is I and Thou.

CAMPANELLA, TOMMASO: (1568-1639). A Dominican
monk who was persecuted by the Inquisition. He spent 27

BIOGRAPHICAJL NOTES 2/9

years of his life in prison for ideas which he never at-
tempted to put into practice. City of the Sun is one of his
major works.

CARNAP, RUDOLF: (1891-1970). Bom in Germany.
While an instructor at the University of Vienna, he joined
Schlick in founding logical positivism in the 1920*5. In
1936, he came to the United States, where he was a
professor of philosophy at the University of Chicago and at
the University of California. His writings are par-
ticularly concerned with semantics. Published works in-
clude Introduction to Semantics and Logical Foundations
of 'Probability.

CABNEADES: (213-129 B.C.) . The greatest skeptic of the
Academy established by Plato.

CICERO, MARCUS TUIXIUS: (106-43 B.C.). Born in AT-
pinum. A Roman orator and statesman. He held many high
offices in Rome, fought conspirators, and was eventually
murdered by emissaries of Mark Antony. His philosophical
works are available in several editions. One of his most imr
portant works is On Orators and Oratory.

CLEMENT OF AT.KXANPBIA; (i5o?-22O?). An early
Christian theologian, he was one of the first to attempt to
reconcile Platonic and Christian thought. With his famous
pupil Origen, he helped make Alexandria a great center of
learning. Among his surviving works are Address to the
Greeks and Who Is the Eich Mart? Who Is Saved?

COMENIUS, JOHN AMOS: (1592^1670). A great Moravian
educator and leader of the religious life of the Moravians.
He was persecuted violently but continued in his faith and
his educational endeavors. He advocated the "method of
nature" in teaching.

COMTE, AUGUSTE: (1798-1857). Born in MontpeDier,
France, and attended the polytechnic school at Paris. He

S.8Q BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHELQSOPHEBS

was well versed in the exact sciences and in mathematics.
Among Ms interesting writings is Positive Philosophy.

CROCE, BENEDETTO: (1866-1952). An Italian historian
and critic, Croce devoted his life almost exclusively to
studying and writing. He was a senator, and later became
minister of education. Firmly opposed to Fascism, Croce
emerged from retirement in 1943 to become the leader of
Italy's Liberal Party. He is the author of Philosophy of the
Spirit, which is the work presenting his system.

COMBEBLAND, RiCHABD: (1631-1718). An English phi-
losopher and churchman. His belief in the principle of uni-
versal benevolence opposed him to Hobbes's egoism and
led to his being considered the founder of utilitarianism.
Principal work: On Natural Law.

DEMOCBTTUS: (460-370 B.C.) . Born at Abdera in Thrace.
He traveled widely and wrote many books on science, phi-
losophy, and mathematics.

DESCAJRTES, REN; (1596-1650). Born in the Touraine,
France. Was a soldier and served the armies of the Dutch
and the Bavarians. He settled in Holland and there wrote
many books which had wide influence throughout the en-
tire world. Among the most significant of these are A Dis-
course on Method and Meditations on the First Philosophy.

DKWKY, JOHN: (1859-1952). An outstanding American
philosopher. Born in Vermont He wrote widely on phi-
losophy, education, psychology, political science. Through
his writings and lectures he influenced the processes of
thought throughout the world. Among his influential works
are Democracy and Education, Experience and Nature,
and Logic: The Theory of Inquiry.

ECKHABT, MEISTEK: (ia6o?-i3^7?). A German mystic.
Member of the Dominican order. Taught and wrote widely
and had great influence as a minister.

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES 28l

EMPEDOCLES: (495?~435? B.C.). Born in Agrigentum,
Sicily, the son of a wealthy and public-spirited family. He
was a leader of the democratic elements in his city, and is
said to have refused the kingship. He was likewise a re-
ligious teacher, poet, and physician. He believed that he
possessed powers of magic.

EPICURUS: (342?-~27o B.C.) . Born on the island of Samos
of Athenian parents. He taught in many Greek cities and
founded a school at Athens where he lived the remainder
of his life. His complete Extant Writings axe available.

ERIGENA, JOHN SCOTTJS: (8i5?-877?). Born in Ireland
and educated in Irish schools. Was called by Charles the
Bald to head the Schola Palatina at Paris. One of his more
important works is On the Division of Nature.

FlCHTE, JOHANN GOTTLIEB; (1762-1814). Bom HI

ony, the son of a poor weaver. Received his education
through the generosity of a rich nobleman and rose to
fame as a teacher of philosophy and a writer. Was one of
the founders of the University of Berlin, Among his writings
are Science of Ethics and Science of Rights.

FKOEBEL, FRIEDRICH WTT.HKT/M AUGUST: (1782^1852).
Born in a small village in the Thuringian forest Attended
the University of Jena and met and studied under some of
the greatest minds of his times. Founded the first kinder-
garten.

GALILEO, G.: (1564-1642). Born in Pisa and educated
at Florence* Studied medicine and mathematics. Became
famous as an astronomer and invented the first telescope.
He came into conflict with the Inquisition but was able to
escape death when he promised not to teach that the sun
was the center of the universe.

GREEN, THOMAS HILL: (1836-1882). Born in Birldn,
Yorkshire. The son of the rector of the parish. Became

282 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHILOSOPHERS

student at Oxford where he spent the remainder of his life
as student and teacher. Was widely interested in educa-
tion. Had great faith in the common people and in democ-
racy.

GROTIUS, HUGO: (1583-1645) . Leader of the aristocratic
party in Holland. Born at Delft. Spent most of his life in
public office and was several times in conflict with the
authorities. Became the Swedish ambassador to Paris in
1635 where he remained until shortly before his death.
One of his chief works is The Law of War and Peace.

HAMILTON, SIR WILLIAM: (1788-1856). Scottish phi-
losopher. Taught at the University of Edinburgh. He left
his library to the University of Glasgow,

HABTLEY, DAVCD: (1705-1757). An English physician
and philosopher, he founded associational psychology,
which holds that the whole mind does not represent a
*souT but is the result of the many different sensations im-
pinging upon it His principal work is Observations on
Man.

HEGEL, GEOBG WTT.HKT/NC FRIEDRICH: (1770-1831)*
Born in Stuttgart and studied theology and philosophy at
Tubingen. Served as professor at a number of the great
seats of learning such as Jena, Heidelberg, and Berlin.
Among his many literary works are Phenomenology of
Mind, Logic, and Philosophy of Right.

HEIDEGGER, MABTIN: (1889-1976). A German philoso-
pher, he was professor at the University of Marburg
(1923-28) and at the University of Berlin (1928-^33). He
is generally regarded as the father of atheistic existential-
ism. Among his writings is Existence and Being.

HEBACLTTDS: (535?-475? B.C.). Born in Ephesus. Was
an aristocrat and had no respect for democracy. He was

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES 283

called "The Obscure" because his writings were hard to
understand.

HEBBABT, JOHANN FBIEDBICH: (1776-1841). A critical
German thinker who opposed the entire Idealistic move-
ment He held many famous chairs of philosophy, includ-
ing the one made famous by Kant at Konigsberg,

HESIOD: (8th cent? B.C.) . Greek poet of whom virtually
nothing is known. Possibly a Boeotian fanner, his works
include Works and Days.

HOBBES, THOMAS: (1588-1679). Studied Scholasticism
and the philosophy of Aristotle at Oxford and traveled
widely on the continent where he met many of the great
minds of his day. After the assembling of the Long Parlia-
ment he fled to France in November, 1640, and did not
return until he made his peace with Cromwell in 1651,
His writings include Leviathan, Of Liberty and Necessity,
and On Human Nature*

HOLBACH, PAUL HENBI THIRY, BARON D': (1723-1789).
A French philosopher, one of the Encyclopedists, An op-
ponent of organized religion, he believed that man is in-
nately moral though perverted by society.. His principal
work is System of Nature.

HUME, DAVID: (1711-1776). Born in Edinburgh. Stud-
ied law and became Under-Secretary of State in 1767. His
fame during his lifetime rested upon his ability as an his-
torian. Among his most important works are Treatise of
Human Nature, Philosophical Essays, and Inquiry Con-
cerning Human Understanding.

HUTCHESON, FRANCIS: (1694-1746). A professor of phi-
losophy at the University of Glasgow from 1729. Hutehe-
son was an early utilitarian, believing that of man's many
senses, the most important is the moral. He was also one

284 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

of the first to write on the subject of aesthetics. Among his
works is the System of Moral Philosophy.

JAMES, WILLIAM: (1842-1910). Born in New York
City. He was educated in private schools and by tutors in
New York, attended the Lawrence Scientific School and
was graduated from the Harvard Medical School in 1869.
His teaching career included anatomy, physiology, psy-
chology, and philosophy. He taught at Harvard University,
University of Edinburgh, and at Oxford. Among his many
significant writings are Pragmatism, The Meaning of Trvth>
and Essays in Radical Empiricism,

JASPEBS, KABL: (1883-1969). A German philosopher
and psychologist, he taught philosophy at the University
of Heidelberg. One of Germany's leading philosophers, he
was associated with the existential movement. Two of his
provocative books are Man in the Modern Age and The
Question of German Guilt.

KANT, IMMANUEL: (1724-1804)* Born at Konigsberg,
the son of a saddler. Nearly his entire life as student,
teacher, and writer was spent in the town of his birth. His
writings influenced the trends of thought as much as those
of any philosopher who ever lived. The large body of his
written works includes the Critique of Pure Reason, the
Critique of Practical Reason, and the Critique of Judg-
ment.

KIEBKEGAAKD, S0BEN: (1813-185$). A Danish philoso-
pher and writer on religious subjects. He had a profound
effect on Danish literature as the result of his writings on
aesthetics. Many of his ideas were incorporated into ex-
istentialism. His writings include Stages on Life's Way and
The Gospel of Suffering and The Lilies of the Field.

LA METTRIE: (1709-1751). The founder of French ma-
terialism. For some time he was a military doctor but lost
his position because of his materialistic views. He was

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES ^8$

hounded and persecuted and is believed to have died from
poisoning.

LEIBNITZ, GOTTFBJED WELHELM: ( 1646-1716). Born int
Leipzig and studied law, philosophy, and mathematics at
Jena. He received his doctorate in law at the age of 20. He
served as court councilor and librarian at Hanover until
his death. Various editions of his Philosophical Writings
are available*

(sth cent B.C.). Little is known of his life.
He is said to have come from Miletus and to have studied
with Zeno at Elea. He possibly established the school at
Abdera which Democritus made famous.

LOCKE, JOHN: (1632-1704). He studied philosophy,
natural science, and medicine at Oxford. For many years
he was in the service of the Earl of Shaf tesbury as secretary
and tutor to his son and grandson. He followed his patron
in exile to Holland and returned to England with the rise of
William of Orange, He is the author of On CM Gooern-
ment.

LOTZE, RTOOLF HERMANN: (1817-1881). Studied med-
icine and philosophy at Leipzig and became a teacher of
physiology and philosophy at that university* He also
taught at Gottingen and at Berlin.

LTJTHEB, MABTIN: (1483-1546). The leader of the Ref-
ormation. While teaching at Wittenberg he challenged the
church and was from then on the center of the rebellion
against church authority. His written works have been col-
lected several times.

MACHIAVELLI, NICCOL&: (1469-1527). An Italian dip-
lomat. Secretary of the Council of Ten at Florence. In
later years he was exiled by the MedicL His most famous
book is The Prince.

286 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

MAISTRE, JOSEPH DE: (1753-1821). French writer and
diplomat in the service of Sardinia. His great literary skill
made his opposition to the French Revolution widely and
effectively felt. He believed the world should be ruled en-
tirely by the pope, with no separate civil authorities. His
works include On the Pope and Discussions in St. Peters-
burg.

MAIJEBRANCHE, NICOLAS: (1638-1715). A member of
the Oratory of Jesus. He sought to harmonize religion and
philosophy, the position of Descartes and that of Augustine,
but failed so that his works were put on the Index.

MARITAIN, JACQUES: (1882-1973). Raised a Protes-
tant, he became dissatisfied with the values of his upbring-
ing, and joined the Catholic Church in 1906 in his native
France. Strongly interested in the writings of St. Thomas
Aquinas, Maritain developed and integrated Thomistic
principles with everyday life. From 1945 to 1948 he was
French Ambassador to the Vatican. Among his important
works are An Introduction to Philosophy and Art and
Scholasticism.

MAHX, KJLRL: (1818-1883). Born in Treves, Germany.
Widely recognized as the foremost Socialist philosopher
and founder of the international Socialist movement.

Mnx, JOHN STUABT: (1806-1873). Son of James Mill,
secretary in the East India Company. His father gave him
a special education consisting of much training in philos-
ophy and political science. He also served with the East
India Company, and later entered Parliament as a liberal.
Some of his most significant books are On Liberty, Repre-
sentative Government, and Utilitarianism.

MILTON, JOHN: (1608-1674), English poet and philos-
opher. He studied at St. Paul's School and at Cambridge.
He was appointed foreign secretary to the Council of State
in 1649 and later, because of much careful work, became

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES 287

blind. His writings are English classics, One of his most
important philosophical works is Tractate of Education.

MOORE, GEORGE E.: (1873-1958). An English philos-
opher, he was professor at Cambridge University. He also
was a guest lecturer at many colleges and universities in
the United States from 1940 to 1944. A neorealist, his posi-
tion is similar to that of Bertrand RusselL Philosophical
Studies is one of his chief works.

NEWTON, SIR ISAAC; (1642-1727). Born at Wools-
thorpe in Lincolnshire and educated at Cambridge where
he studied mathematics. He made many scientific discov-
eries and was honored highly by the English government

NICHOLAS OF CUSA: (i4Oi?-i464). Though a Ro-
man Catholic prelate and cardinal from 1448, Nicholas
was a humanist and had an original and critical mind. In
1451, he was made papal legate and traveled widely,
preaching and reforming monasteries. But his reforms were
not carried through. He anticipated Copernicus in believ-
ing that the earth orbits the sun.

NEEBUHR, REINHOIJ>: (1892-1971). An American the-
ologian, he spent the early years of his ministry as pastor
of a church in Detroit, where many of his parishioners
were automobile workers with whom he sided in their
struggles for better working conditions. A liberal in politics,
he adjured many of the liberal theological tenets.
Among his many important writings are Moral Man and
Immoral Society, The Nature and Destiny of Man, and
Beyond Tragedy.

NIETZSCHE, FBIEDBICH WTT.HKT.M: (1844-1900). A dis-
tinguished German philosopher, born at Rocken near Leip-
zig. Became a professor of classical philology at Basle. Per-
haps his most famous book is Thus Spake Zamthustra.

OBIGEN: (i85?-*54?). A Christian apologist, scholar,
and theologian; bom in Egypt. At age eighteen, Origen be-

288 BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

came head of the famous catechetical school of Alexandria,
having previously studied under Clement of Alexandria.
Later, Origen established his own school at Caesarea. He
is reputed to have written 800 works, and he became fa-
mous for his exegesis of the scriptures. Among his surviving
works are Commentaries, Homilies, and Against Celsus.

PAHACEI-SUS: (1493?-! 541). His real name was Theo-
phrastus of Hohenheim. A leading figure among a group of
"wonder men'* of the period, men who worked miracles.

PAHMENIDES: ($th cent. B.C.). The son of a wealthy
Elean family who developed the philosophy of Xenophanes,
He was probably a Pythagorean in his early days.

PASCAL, BLAISE: (1623-1662). A gifted mathematician
and physicist He was also influenced by mysticism and
sought to combine a mystic religious point of view with
the findings of mathematics and science.

PAULSEN, FRIEDBICH: (1846-1908). A German philos-
opher who presented an idealistic world-view similar to
that of Lotze and Fechner. He was widely read in both
Germany and the United States.

PELAGIUS: (36o?-42O?). A celebrated British monk and
theologian. His opposition to Augustinian doctrines of pre-
destination and total depravity led to his persecution and
banishment from Rome in 418. A heretical sect (Pelagian-
ism) grew from his teachings on the perfectibility of man.
He is the author of On the Trinity, On Free Witt, and
Commentary on P&uFs Epistles.

PESTAIAXZZI, JOHANN HEINBICH: (1746-1827). Born at
Zurich. He was inspired to relieve the suffering of the
peasantry about htm and made many attempts to educate
them and give them better methods of fanning and living.
His influence on modern education has been wide and deep.

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES

PHILO: (20? B.a~go? A.D.). Known as "the JeV or "of
Alexandria." He came of a priestly family and wrote widely
on historical, political, and ethical matters. He held that
Judaism was the sum-total of human wisdom.

Pi*AT0: (427?-Q47? B.C.) . Bom the son of noble parents.
The greatest pupil of Socrates* He traveled widely, had an
independent income, and lived in the highest of style. He
was intimate with Dionysius I, the tyrant of Syracuse, and
is said to have hoped to establish an ideal state at Syracuse,
He founded the Academy in a grove outside of Athens. His
extant writings are almost all included in the famous Dia-
logues (of which the Republic is one).

PLOTINUS: (2O5?-27o). Born in Lycopolis, Egypt.
Studied philosophy under Ammonius Saccas in Alexandria
for eleven years. He established a school in Rome soon after

343*

PRIESTUEY, JOSEPH: (1733-1804). A Unitarian natural
philosopher. He made great discoveries concerning the
properties of fixed air. His sympathies with the French
Revolution resulted in his house being wrecked by a mob.
After this he fled to the United States and remained here
until his death.

PROTAGORAS: (sth cent. B.C.). A famous Sophist, he
taught in Athens and was a friend of Pericles. His agnos-
ticism caused his banishment from Athens. He was con-
sidered the first to systematize grammar, distinguishing
parts of speech, teases, and moods. One of his most noted
works is On the Gods.

PYTHAGORAS: (580-500 B.C.). Born in Samos and emi-
grated to the Greek colonies in Southern Italy about 55219.
He founded the school of the Pythagoreans, a semi-reli-
gious and philosophic sect

29O BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

QCXNTHJCAK: (35?-95?)- A Roman rhetorician whose
work had great influence in antiquity and in the Renais-
sance. Among his more famous writings is Institutes of
Oratory.

RAMOS, PfcTRUS; (1515-157*) H& true French name
was Pierre de la Ramee. He was influenced by Vives and
attacked the Aristotelian logic as responsible for the barren
dialectical methods used in the universities of his time. He
attempted to establish a new logic. He was also influential
as an educator.

REID, THOMAS: (1710-1796). Leader of the Scottish
school in its reaction against the idealism of Berkeley and
the skepticism of Hume, He attempted to return to "com-
mon sense" in philosophy.

RQSGELJN: (fl. 1092-1119). Scholastic philosopher. He
was a canon at Loches and taught Abelard. Considered
the founder of nominalism. He was forced to recant his
doctrine of the Trinity by a council at Soissons.

ROUSSEAU, JEAN JACQUES: (1712^-1778). French phi-
losopher, political theorist, and writer whose colorful and
scandalous life has led to many conflicting theories about
his personality. Among his more important philosophical
writings are Emile and The Social Contract.

ROYCE, JOSIAH: (1855-1916). Born in Grass Valley, Cali-
fornia. Studied at the University of California and at Leip-
zig, Gottingen, and Johns Hopkins. Though he taught
English for a while at the University of California, he spent
most of his teaching years as professor of Philosophy at
Harvard University. The Spirit of Modern Philosophy and
The World and the Individual are among his major works.

RUSSELL, BERTHAKD: (1872-1970)* Bom at Trefleck,
Monmouth, England, and educated at Trinity College,
Cambridge. He lectured widely and received many
high honors for scholarship. In 1950 he received the Nobel

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES

Prize for Liteiature. Among his extensive works are History
of Western Philosophy and Human Knowledge. With Al-
fred North Whitehead he wrote the monumental Prindpfo
Mathematica.

SAINT-SIMON, CLAUDE HENBI BE ROUVROT, COMTE I>E:
(1760-1825). French political scientist who conceived the
idea of a new society in which there would be equal distri-
bution of property, power, culture, and happiness.

SANTAYANA, GEORGE: (1863-1952) . Born in Madrid and
graduated from Harvard University. He taught philosophy
at Harvard for twenty-two years. Then, from 1912 on, he
lived principally in Europe. In 1943 he was elected an
honorary member of the American Academy of Arts and
Letters. He was a poet and literary critic, as well as a
philosopher. He died in Italy. His many important works
include The Realm of Essence and Scepticism and Animal
Faith.

SARTRE, JEAN-PAUL: (1905-1980). French novelist and
playwright, he is considered the founder of French exis-
tentialism. He was imprisoned by the Germans during the
early part of World War II, and upon his escape he joined
the resistance movement in Paris. Both his philosophical
writings and his plays and novels have received interna-
tional attention and acclaim. Perhaps his philosophy is
best stated in Being and Nothingness.

SCHEIXING, FRIEDRICH WILHELM JOSEPH: (17751854),
Studied theology at Tubingen and became professor of
philosophy at Jena in 1798. He became one of the brilliant
circle in which the Romantic movement centered. He was
called to Berlin to stem the tide of Hegelian philosophy, but
met with little success. Prominent among his major works
are Of Human Freedom and Transcendental Idealism.

SCHT .EDERMACHER, FRIEDRICH ERNST DANIEL: (1768-

1834), Bom in Breslau and received part of his education
in the schools of the Moravian brotherhood. After a short

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHTLOSOPHEBS

stay as student and tutor at Halle, he went to Berlin as
minister of Trinity Church. Later he became professor of
theology at the University of Berlin.

SCTUCK, MOBTTZ: (1882^1936)* Austrian philosopher.
Strongly influenced by Wittgenstein, he joined a discus-
sion group in 1923 called the Vienna Circle, out of which
grew logical positivism* He developed a form of psycho-
logical hedonism in his book Problems of Ethics. Sdhlidc
called the principles of logical positivism "standpointibss-
ness/*

SCHOPENHATJEH, ARTHOR: (1788-1860), Born in Danzig
of a banker father and a novelist mother. He refused to
enter his fathers work, but chose philosophy. He lectured
widely but met with little success since other philosophers
held the popular ear. This made hfai bitter, a bitterness
which was sweetened slightly in later life as his fame grew.
He wrote several books, among them: The World As Will
and Idea and Fourfold Root of the Principle of Sufficient
Reason.

SCOTXJS, JOHN DUNS: (i26s?~i3o8?), A member of the
Franciscan order. After studying at Oxford he became a
teacher there and later taught both at Paris and at Cologne.

SHAFTESOTRY, LORD: (1671-1713). Moral philosopher
and pupil of John Locke* He believed in the essential har-
mony between egoism and altruism. In ethics, he was the
first to apply the tern "moral sense* to man's instinctual
drive to promote both the general welfare and individual
happiness. His collected essays are found in Characteristics
of Men* Manners, Opinions, Times.

SMITH, ADAM: (1723-1790). Bom at Erkcaldy in Scot-
land. He studied at Glasgow and at Oxford, but was not
at all happy at Oxford. He thought the professors there
were narrow-minded. This was because they refused to let

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES

him read Hume. His writings in political science have had
wide influence. His most famous book is Wealth of Na-
tions.

SOCRATES: (469-399 B.C.)- Born in Athens, the son of
a poor sculptor and a midwife. He lived a most erratic
life and never wanted more than the simple necessities.
He often went barefoot and dressed in rags to stress sim-
plicity. He married but never had a satisfactory home life.
Because his views were considered dangerous by the pow-
erful political leaders of his time, he was condemned to
death by the court of Athens and forced to drink a cup
of hemlock. These final events are recorded in Plato's Dfc-
logues, especially the Phaedo and Apology.

SPENCER, HERBERT: (1820-1903). Utilitarian philoso-
pher. He was for some time a civil engineer. In London he
was intimate with a large circle of literary and philosophic
geniuses and was greatly influenced in his work by them.
His extensive writings include Essays on Education, The
Man versus the State, and A System of Synthetic Phi-
losophy.

SPINOZA, BARXTCH: (1632-1677). He took the name
Benedict. Born in Holland, the son of wealthy Portuguese-
Jewish parents. Because of his views he was expelled from
the synagogue and forced to wander about Europe. He
gained a livelihood by grinding lenses. Among his major
writings are Ethics and Treatise on the Improvement of
Understanding.

TKT.ESIO, BEBNABDINO: (1509-1588). Italian philoso-
pher, born in Milan of noble family. With Bruno and Cam-
panella, Telesio attacked the Aristotelian basis of scholas-
ticism and stressed the importance of knowledge based on
empirical scientific inquiry. At Naples he established his
Academia Cosentma to further scientific methods of
study,

#94 BASIC TEACHINGS OF CHEAT PHILOSOPHERS

THAJLES: (64O?~546? B.C.). Born in Miletus. Noted as a
statesman, mathematician, and astronomer. He is said to
have predicted the eclipse of May 28, 585. He is classified
as one of the Seven Wise Men of Greece.

PATELS (1886-1965). A Protestant theologian,
Tfllich was boni in Germany. During World War I he
served as field chaplain on the Western Front, and later
taught theology and philosophy at Halle, Berlin, Breslau,
Dresden, Leipzig, and Frankfort on the Main. After the
rise of Hitler, Tiffitch came to the United States, becoming
a citizen in 1940. He taught at Union Theological
Seminary and at Harvard University. He is the author of
The Courage to Be and other works.

UNAMONO Y JXJGA, MictnEL DE: (1864-1936). A Span-
ish creative writer and scholar, Unamuno was rector of the
University of Salamanca. His outspoken criticism of the
monarch, and of the dictator, Primo de Rivera, caused his
removal from his post, and later his expulsion from Spain.
He remained in eerile from 19524 to 1930; thereafter he re-
sided in Spain again. His masterpiece is generally consid-
ered to be The Tragic Sense of Life in Men and Peoples.

VmcoBiNO X>A FELTBE: (1378-1446). Founder of the
famous court school at Mantua which set the pattern for
many such schools throughout Europe*

VIVES, LtJixmoo: (1492-1540). Spanish scholar, born
Juan Luis Vives at Valencia. After studying and teaching
in France, Vives went to England and taught at Oxford.
Later, having incurred the displeasure of Henry VIBE, he
went to Bruges where he wrote most of his major works.
Rejecting the authority of Aristotle and scholasticism, Vives
published pioneer works on psychology and was one of the
first to urge scientific induction as a philosophical and psy-
chological method* One of his major works is De Aroma et
Vita.

BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES

VOLTAIBJS: (1694-1778). His original name was Fran-
9015 Marie Arouet. Born in Paris. He was imprisoned sev-
eral times for his writings, which, include satirical roman-
ces and plays as well as philosophical treatises.

WHITEHEAJD, AUFRED NORTH: (1861-1947). British
mathematician and philosopher, resident in the United
States for many years, he criticized positivistic antireligious
science. The obscurity of his style and his coinage of new
technical terms makes much of his work difficult to under-
stand. He received the Order of Merit in 1945. His writings
include Science and the Modern World and Process and
Reality.

WTT.T.TAVT OF OCCAM: (1300? 1349). Known as *T>OO-
tor Invincibilis** and "Venerabilis Inceptor.** An English
scholastic philosopher and a member of the Franciscan
order. He was first a pupil and then a rival of Duns Scotus.
In his Dialogues, he laid the foundations for the modern
theory of the independence of the secular government from
the religious authorities. A vigorous and successful advocate
of nominalism*

WITTGENSTEIN; LUDWIG: (1889-1951). Born in Austria,
Wittgenstein studied at Cambridge University, England,
and returned there to teach in 1929. He became a natural-
ized British subject in 1938. Although his major work
Tractatus Logico-PhUosophicus led to the founding of the
Vienna Circle, and his teaching in the 1930*5 and 1940*5 at
Cambridge inspired the logical positivists, Wittgenstein felt
that his ideas were often misunderstood and distorted by
those who claimed to be his disciples. He did not hold with
the positivists that statements not verifiable through sense-
experience are useless or meaningless. Other published
works are Philosophical Investigations and Remarks on the
Foundations of Mathematics.

XENOPHON: (43o?-355? B.C.). A Greek historian and
disciple of Socrates, his Memorabitia of Socrates gives a

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GBEAT PHEUOSOPHEHS

portrayal of that philosopher that differs markedly from the
portrait given by Plato,

ZENO OF ELEA: (4o?-43O? B.C.)- Greek philosopher
of the Eleatic school According to Aristotle, Zeno was the
first to employ the dialectical method. He is famous for
**Zeno*s paradox^ the Idea that a moving object could
never cover a given distance completely because, after hav-
ing gone fa?lf fh^ way, it must cover half the remaining dis-
tance, then half again, and so on,

ZENO THE STOIC: (aaSP-a&j? B.C.)* Greek philosopher,
founder of Stoicism* He integrated the views of Heraclitus*
Plato, and Aristotle into a metaphysical and logical system
which supported his ethical theories and program for living,

INDEX

Abelard, Peter, 22, 60, 89,
137. 190, 215-16, 234-35,

Alchemy, 28
Alcuin, 215, 275

Johannes, 194, 275

Ambrose, St, 187, 275
Anarchy, 180
Anaragoras, 9, 229-30*
Anasimander, 6-7, 102, 228,

276
Anaximines of Miletus, 7, 155,

276

Animism, 127
Anselm, St, 22, ill, 190, 234*

276
Apologists, 19, 58, 88, 108-9*

135, 160-61, 187, 213
Aquinas, St Thomas, 23-24,

6o~6i, 89-90, iiOr-13, 137,

162, 190-91, 235, 252-53,

276
Aristotle, 12-15, 26, 57, 85-

86, 105-6, 131-^32, 158-59,

183-84, 211-12, 231-32,
250, 276

Astrology, 28
Atihanasius, 110-11, 276
Atomists, 10 ff., 16, 55, 156
Augustine, St, 19-20, 59, 88-
89, 109, 136, 161, 187, 233-

34, 252, 276

Bacon, Francis, 29-30, 63-64,
114-15, 139-40, 163, 218,

Bacon, Roger, 235-36, 277
Basedow, Johann Bernhard,

221, 277

Bayle^ Pierre, 141, 277
Behavioristic psydiokgy, 171
Benedict, St, 214, 277
Bentham, Jeremy, 97-98, 277
Bergson, Henri, 51, *44> ^77
Berkdey, George, 36-37, 66,

117-18, 165-66, 240, 256,

277-78

Bernard of Chartres, 22
Bodin, Jean, 194, 278
Boehme, Jacob, 114, 278
Bradley, F. H., 124, 244, 278
Bruno, Giordano, 29, 114, 163,

278
Buber, Martin, 271, 278

Callides, 83, 180
Campanefla, Tommaso, 29,

193, 278-79

Camap, Rudolf, 268, 279
Cameades, 107, 279

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT IHILOSOPHEBS

Catechetical schools, 213
Catedbmnens, 213
Categorical imperative, 41, 95
Change, problem of, ?&
Chartres, School of, 22
Cicero, Marcos TuEius, 213,

City of God, The, 187-88
C% of tfce Sun, The, 193
dement of Alexandria, 213,

379
Comenins, John Amos, 218-

19, 279
Comte, Auguste, 74, 124, 171,

201-2, 244, 260, 279-80
Conceptualisin, 190
Creative evolution, 51
Croce, Benedetto, 269-70, 280
Cumberland, Fichard, 93, 280

Demiurge, 12, 104^5, 157
Democritus, 10, 16, 82, 156,

179,248,280
Descartes, Rene, 31-32, 64, 92*

113-16, 140^41, 163-64,

238, 255, 280
Dewey, John, 51, 77-78, 98,

Epicurus, 16, 86, 132-33, 250,

281

Epiphenomenalism, 238
Erigena, John Scotus, 21, 59-

60, 109-10, 189, 215, 281
Ethical problem, 81
Ethics, 81
Euthydemus, 83
Evfl, 80 ff.
Evolution, 48, 98

264-66

25, 244, 261-62, 280
Dialectical process, 43-44, 123
Dualism, 32
Duns Scotus, John, 24^5, 113,

137-38, I9it ^53,

Eckhart, Meister, 26, 90, 113,

280

Education, 2078.
Empedodes, 9, 5& 156* 247^

48,281
Epicureans, 16, 17, 86, 106-7,

132, 159, 184, 232

Fate, 127, 129 ff.

Fates, the, 128

Fechner, Gustav Theodor, 46,

123
Fichte, J. G., 41-43, 69-70,

9S-96, 121-22, 148, 168,

222, 242-43, 258, 28l

Freewill, 127&%

Froebel, F. W. A*, 223-^4, 281

Galileo, 28-^29, 236, 254,

Gaunilo, 112

God, the nature of, looff.

Golden mean, 85

Good, tie, 80

Gof gicw, 180

Great Society, 186

Green, Thomas Hill, 151, 281-

82

Giotius, Hugo, 194, 282
Guelincx, Arnold, 33, 141,

^38-39

Hamilton, Sir William, 124,

282

Hartley, David, 145, 282
Hegel, G. W. F., 43-44, 71-

INDEX

299

Hegel (confd)

72, 122-23, 149-50* 199-

300, 243, 258-59* s 8 *
Hddegger, Martin, 265, 282
Heraditus, 8, 54-55, 81-82,

102-3, 129, 155-56, 228-29,

247, 282-83
Herbart, J. F., 44-45, 72-73,

150, 169-70, 222-23, 243-

44, ^59, 283
Hesiod, 101-2
Hobbes, Thomas, 30-31, 64,

91-92, 115, 140, 163, 195-

96, 218, 237-38, 283
Holbach, Baton d", 145, 283
Humanism, 62
Hume, David, 37-38, 66-67,

118-19, 143-44, 166, 240-

41, 256-57, 283
Hutcheson, Frauds, 94, 283-

84

Idea-ist, 12
Idealism, 42, 44, 46
Idealists, 49-50, 71, 74
Ideas, 246 ff.
Idols," 139, 232, 237
Immortality, 153 ff
Induction, method of, 30, 75
Intuition, 51, 90

James, William, 50, 77, 98,
124-25, 151, 172, 244,
284

Jaspers, Karl, 265-66, 284

Kant,

4041, 68

69, 94-95, 120-21, 146-48,
167-68, 241-42* 257-58,
284

Kepler, Johannes, 236
Kierkegaard, Stfren, 264-65,
284

Laissez-faire, 198, 204

La Mettrie, Julien Offray de,

14^284-85

Lassalle, Ferdinand, 200
Laws, 182
Leibnitz, G. W., 39-40, 67,

94, 119-20, 144-45, 166-

67, 241, 257, 285
Leudppus, 10, 156, 285
Locke, John, 35-36, 65-66,

93-93, H7, M2-43, 165,

196-97, 219-20, 240, 256,

285

Logical positivism, 268-69
Logos, 18, 108-9
Lotze, Rudolf Hermann, 461,

73-74, 123, 170, 285
Luther, Martin, 217, 285

Machiavelli, Niccolfc, 193-94,

285

Maistre, Joseph de, 200, 286
Malebranche, Nicolas, 33, 164,

^39, 286

Maritafo, Jacques, 270-71, 286
Marx, Karl, 200, 286
Materialism, 31
Matter, 226 ff.

Mechanism, tiieory of, 31-8^
Memorabilia, 181
Metaphysics, 133
Mill, John Stuart, 47~48, 75-

76, 97, 150-51, 202-3, 260,

286

Mfltoi, John, 217, 280-87
Mind, 226 S.
Medalists, no

BASIC TEACHINGS OF GREAT PHILOSOPHERS

Monads, 29, 39, 67, 144, 166,

241

Moore, George E., 268, 287
Mysticism, 26, 112

Newton, Sir Isaac, ng, 236, 287
Nicholas of Cusa, 27, 114, 287
Niebuhr, Reinhold, 270, 287
Nietzsche, F. W., 74, 204-5,

287

Nominalism, 25, 6a
Nominalists, 22, 25, 189, 251-

52
Noumenal world, 41

Occaskmalists, 141, 239
Organism, philosophy of, 267
Origen, 213, 287-88

Pantiheism, 21, 34, 43, 60
Paracelsus, 28, 62, 236, 288
Pannenides, 8-9, 229, 288
Pascal, Blaise, 116, 141, 288
Paulsen, Friedrich, 46, 288
Pekghis, 136, 288
Pestalozzi, J. H., 221-22, 288
Philo, 18, 87-88, 107-8, 134,

233,289
Pkto, 10-12, 18, 26, 56-57,

84-85, 104-5, I3i 157,

181-83, 211, 230-31, 249*

289
PlotLaus, 18-19, 88, 108, 134-

35. 289

Positivism, 74, 171
Pragmatism, 51, 171-72
Pragmatists, 50, 79, 244
Predestination, 59
Priestley, Joseph, 145, 289
Protagoras, 55, 83, 210, 248,

289
Psycho-physical parallelism,

35, 240

Pyrrho, 17, 232
Pythagoras, 7, 129, 155, 289
Pythagoreans, 7, 129, 155,

178-79

QuintilLan, 212-13, 290

Ramus, Petrus, 62, 290
Realism, 45
Realists, 22, 189, 5i
"Reals," 45, 72, 244
Reid, Thomas, 38, 290
Religious tradition, philosophy

of, 270-71

Republic, 182, 193, 211
Richard of St. Victor, 112
Roscelin, 22, 111, 190, 290
Rousseau, Jean Jacques, 68,

146, 199, 220, 290
Royce, Josiah, 49, 244, 290
Russell, Bertrand, 78, 245,

267-68, 290-91

Saint-Simon, Claude Henri

Rouvoy, Comte de, 201, 291
Santayana, George, 52, 245,

291

Sartre, Jean-Paul, 266, 291
Schelling, F. W. J., 43, 70,

122, 148, 243, 291
Schleiermacher, F. E. D., 71,

122, 148-49* 169, 291-92
Schlick, Moritz, 268, 29*
Scholasticism, 23, 59, 215
Schoolmen, 23, 189
Schopenhauer, Arthur, 45-46,

73, 96-97, 150, 170, 292

Science, philosophy of, 266-

68

Seven liberal arts, 214-13
Shaftesbury, Lord, 94* 292
Skepticism, 38

Skeptics, 17-18* 3107, 232-33
Smith, Adam, 198, 292-93
Socialism, 200
Sociology, 2Q*
Socrates, 56, 83-84, *<>4> 130-

31, 181, 210-11, 249, 293
Sophists, 55, 83, 104, 130,

179-80, 209-10, 5248
Soul the, 153&
Spencer, Herbert, 48-49* 76,

98, 124, 203-4, 260, 93
Spinoza, Benedict, 33~35>

65, 92, 116-17,

42, 164, 196, 239-40,

293

Spirit, pMosopliy of, 269-70
State, the, 175
Stoics, 16-17, 58, 86-87, 107,

133, 159, 185, 232, 251
Sturm, Johann,

INDEX 301

Transmigration of souls, 158
Trinity, the, no

Telesio, Bernardino, 28, 62,

162, 293

Thales, 6 f 54, 103, 294
Thinking, 246 ft
Hirasymachiis, 83
Tiffich, Paid, 270, 294
Thnaeus, 12, 104, 157
Toland, John, 145

XTnamtmo y Juga, Miguel de,

Universe, the, 5ff-, 53 &
Unknowable, the, 48, 76, 124
Unmoved mover, 15,

Vittorino da Feltre, 216, 294
Vives, Lndovico, 27, 62,

63, 294
Voltaire, 145, 198,

Watson, John B^ 171
Wedth of Nations, 198
Whitehead, Alfred North,

266-67, 295

William of Champeanx, 60
William of Occam, 25, 6a

191-92, 295
Wittgenstein, Ludwig, 268,

295

Wilhehn, 46

Xenophanes, 8, 103
Xenophon, 181, 295-96

Zeno of Elea, 9, 296

Zeno the Stoic, 16, 133, 296

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

S. E. Frost, Jr. (1899-1978) taught in the Department of Educa-
tion, Brooklyn College, City University of New York. He received
a Ph.D. from Columbia University and a Bachelor of Divinity
degree from Yale University. He spent many years in the study
and teaching of the history and philosophy of education and is
the author of a number of books on philosophy, religion, and
education.